Home

Ektron CMS400.NET Administrator Manual

Contents

1. When visitors to the SharePoint portal page access this search Web Part they can perform a search on your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Search Web Part Settings You can configure the search Web Part to fully customize how the search is displayed in the portal as well as the search s functionality Several options are configurable including e Starting folder e Recursive search e Maximum amount of results to display To configure the search Web Part follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the content Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 2 Minimize the Appearance Settings and expand the CMS400 NET Search settings 3 The Search Web Part Settings screen is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 384 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 4 Make the necessary changes to the search settings using the following table as a guide Field Description Default Starting Folder Ektron CMS400 NET content folder where the search begins to retrieve results from Example Products RC Cars or root content folder Recursive Specifies whether the search looks through the starting folder No and its subfolders or the starting folder only e No search only the starting folder e Yes search starting folder and its subfolders Target Page The Web page that displays t
2. eeeescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 419 Enabling Manual Aliasing ceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 419 Activating Deactivating Manual Aliasing 425 Permissions for Manual Aliasing ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeereeeeeseeneeeeeees 425 Adding a Base Reference to a Template ccceeeeeseteeeeeeeenaes 426 Assigning a Manual URL Alias css s cceceisisscceetsinacdeesstancecesitaaces 426 Editing a Manual URL Alas 430 Removing a Manual URL Alas ssssicsnssirssrininsasnanssisnnaasasain 430 email POA ES jsssccctssscccctnanesiintitacnenienaenennaiviaaanens 432 Configuring SMTP Server ccccssseeeseessseeeeceeseseeeeesesesenees 432 Automatic eMail Notification ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeneneneees 432 Instant eMail ei csatisc ccc aie secesectertecans stesddases ceencdastedsencaaccenesninaccecs 433 Conditions Tor Instant C Mall ieee ccsnsentecanssseat iia iselersdaa tian 435 Where Instant email is Available 0 0 0 2 eccccccceeeeecccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeenees 436 Moditying Instant 6M alleesas sccaceeccccceusceccccscaeaceaccensecacsaccansecauiaacottes 436 Active Directory Feature ccccccccccccccccseecescessseesceeseeenees 438 Active Directory Integration eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 440 How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET irre aa ORAE 440 Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CGMS400 NE P iicaiieo ris 441 Logging into a System that
3. 00 105 Managing USES icciiccescccsctcsccnecancecccxecarcciecnsececccseceinneceaceasansctecs 106 VONIN A USOU ssnin 108 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 iii EGming a WSClaistsccentsusgaaccesisaadauncenisaadcccce mainisactes patddonnteigaaissccceiias 109 Deltog a LG y a eenreraenemer tere rere erat rrrereteratrrrer er ret eters rrcrtr cra tre 109 Removing Users from User Group 0 cseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeetes 110 Managing User Groups issirinksi ainiin viinaan 110 Assigning Users To User Groups esssessssssssresssrsssressrsnsssrnnessnens 111 Viewing the Users in a User Group c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeetenes 111 Editing a User Gio nasisira a 112 Deleting a User GOU Ds eneriea cect oat eases dant anaes 112 Removing Users from User Group ceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 Private Content amp Memberships eceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 114 Private CONIC scseciccscctinis secesciasaieveseceassascsczencsdcasetencsateoeteucnatert 114 PAG IYARIE TG NIG cccosccet recs eae eee cee 117 Accessing the Membership Module Foldet sseess 118 WC 8 ecg 2 gL C7 dae ay ee ne nese ner peer 118 Adding Membership USerS i sii victesaxise crc eatianc comeasevcttemaadlaiaalaies 118 Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group 119 Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership Users 119 Viewing Membership User Information 0
4. Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Using the Formula Field You can copy a sample calculation into the Formula field by clicking the Examples field and selecting an operation from the drop down list For example if you click on Examples Add two numbers X Y X Y appears in this field Calculation Formula x Y Examples Add two numb Next replace the variables with fields on the screen Be sure to select the curly brackets as well as the letter between them Then when the user enters data into those fields the calculation is performed using the current field values If a calculated field tries to perform a numerical calculation with a value that is blank or contains letters nan appears in the field nan stands for not a number If a calculated field tries to divide by zero tnfinity appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 201 Using the Data Designer WARNING If the user does not replace all variables with a field or a number when the content is validated validation will fail To do this follow these steps 1 Select the first variable to replace To continue the example select X 2 Click the Select Field button A screen appears listing appropriate fields on the Data Design screen Select a Field or Group Select a Field or Group book Books 1 or more ab title Insert the title of the book
5. Field Description XML Specify the xsd file used to validate the XML content Schema that the XML configuration will be assigned to Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 141 Managing XML Field Description Target Specify the default namespace used for outgoing XML Namespace Preview Tab The Preview tab displays the XSLT applied to the editor when XML content is created This is the XSLT that was created for the XML configuration Display Information Tab RC Planes Product Name Description Specifications Airfoil Overall Length Wingspan Weight Engine Size Fuel Tank Size Engine Run Time Refill Time Fuel Type Color The display information tab lists the XSLTs that are used when displaying XML in the respective environment Field Description XSLT1 Display XSLT 1 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 142 Managing XML Field Description XSLT2 Display XSLT 2 XSLT3 Display XSLT 3 XSLT Display XSLT Package created Package using the Data Designer NOTE When an XML configuration is created using the Data Designer a default display XSLT is also created which looks similar to the edit XSLT created in the editor This default XSLT can be applied to the XML content The asterisk denotes the default XSLT for the XML configuration Editing XML Configur
6. NOTE If upgrading the installation does not create sample Web site s folders on the file server These folders must be added manually However all folders created by you are also created on the file server when enabled Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 25 Modifying the Application Setup Screen BuiltIn User The builtin user is a user that is defined in the Ektron CMS400 NET setup screen The builtin user s primary function is to be an emergency user if you cannot log in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site as the normal administrator NOTE The builtin user can log in to Ektron CMS400 NET whether or not Active Directory is enabled Only use the builtin user to correct a bad or expired license key It is not designed for regular CMS operations If you try to edit content while signed on as this user you see errors By default the username and password combination for the builtin user is builtin builtin For security reasons Ektron recommends changing the username and password upon installation Editing the BuiltIn User To edit the builtin user s information follow these steps 1 Accessing the Edit Application Setup Information screen as described in Updating Setup Information on page 21 Locate the Built In User field Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password 4 Click the Update button i Editor Options Style sheets greatly red
7. CS genre f authors ab price V Paperback fn Field c Field2 lab Field3 mee F ield4 current field 12 A A 12 B B ab Name 3 Select a field to replace X When you do the field name replaces X in the Formula field WARNING If a variable appears more than once in a formula for example x number X amp lt Y Y number X amp gt Y you only need to replace the first occurrence it eWebEditPro XML will replace the subsequent occurrences for you 4 Continue replacing all variables in the formula Notes e If an XML document contains several occurrences of a field that is referenced in a formula the value is derived as follows When using the XPath functions sumo and count all values with the field name are considered For example a document includes three books whose prices are 10 20 and 30 In this case sun s value is 60 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 202 Using the Data Designer When using all other functions the first value is used For example a document includes three books whose prices are 10 20 and 30 If a calculation formula refers to lt price gt its value is 10 e You can replace a variable with a number instead of a field For example replace x y with price 1 15 e The expression can be complex such as round Fieldi 0 80 1 div
8. csssee 454 The Active Directory Setup Sereen c ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 454 The Active Directory Status SCre n ccccceceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 459 The View Users SCH SM ercsicmcten tenira ane sed rA 463 The View User Groups SCreen c ccecceeeeeeeeneeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee 465 Setup Guidelines siciccssccaswtcciccccczccccaceciccwcscecerctacascaseasueacceienacaes 468 Disabling AD Integration csccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenees 470 User Authentication Only Mode ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 472 How Information is Transferred from Active Directory to Ektron CSE Toriai ie 472 Which Information is Transferred from Active Directory to GMS4A0O NE Tonem ne eee ne Sener nnnE ED Eanes nnnEree 472 Logging UN cc ccce tase tnt innit 472 Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET 472 Changing the User Login Name in AD ccsssseeeeesseeeeees 473 Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400 NET 0 473 Deleting USET Sirin 473 Replacing a USO 0 sascssccscccicccteccsccccetstnsdncmsdnsncgucendesscantencetenccieccte 473 User GrOU PS cicscctcseccessceceectesectcsensaestetttatincendeentcctceansecceeceunecess 474 The Screens of the Active Directory Feature in User Authenti ot 1002 0 lt eee ara Be sn eee ene ee rere 474 Setup E70 Pe lt 1 Sse Ae ea i eset a eee eee eer 474 Disabling AD Authentication cccccsssssseeneneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 475
9. Selectable Metadata Check this box to force users to select from the options specified in the Allow Selectable Text and Default Text fields If you do not check this box users can create their own metadata Allow Multiple Check this box to let users select multiple metadata values instead of Selections one If multiple values are allowed use the separator character to delimit them This field is only active if the Selectable Metadata box is checked Allow Selectable Text Enter standard metadata that can be selected by users Separate each option by the separator specified for the metadata definition This field is only active if the Selectable Metadata box is checked Default Text Enter default content for the metadata tag Searchable Additional Fields For background information on Searchable Property type metadata see Metadata that appears on your Web site s search page below the standard search fields on page 62 After creating a searchable metadata definition assign it to folders whose content will use it See Also Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 67 Metadata Field Description Publicly Viewable If you check the box this search field appears on your Web site s search screen Site visitors can use the field to find content on your Web site Note Regardless of whether this is checked this s
10. on page 212 File Link Lets user insert a link to a file such as a File Link Field on page 214 PDF document Field Lets you change the properties of any Properties field Select the field then click this button This option is also available on the right click menu but not available on the drag and drop toolbar Validate ey Ensure the screen contains valid XML Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 163 Using the Data Designer Deleting a Field from the Screen To remove a field from the screen follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the field 2 When the cursor changes to a four headed arrow click the mouse 3 Small boxes surround the field Name nian p ame REDER m a E 4 Click the cut icon oe to remove the field Usually the field label is not deleted when you delete a field To delete the label use standard eWebEditPro XML editing buttons Sample Screen Design This section provides a brief overview of designing a screen so that you can learn how the pieces fit together Let s assume you want the screen to look like this BRR MA Boa Ye AO AS GB e Bi Apply Style z Normal v Arial Helvetica v 2 10 pt f nbsp JE v a a W o eee la City State Massachusetts NOTE The following example helps you understand how to create a simple data entry screen It does not explain how to save a screen so that a user can enter data i
11. 2RBBBRAA A eae ARE Ets eal e EE m o e amp F i i b fe Z e rv R g First Name 4 If desired edit the form title Vacation Request Form Required Fileds 5 Enter the form s fields By default the form elements toolbar appears lt 2 Ss esa TERA rR EY The following table explains the form element toolbar buttons Button Inserts this Example of HTML inserted Prompts on dialog box that kind of field appears Form lt form name Test action http e Name amp localhost ewebeditpro4 formtest htm method post gt lt e Action page form gt e Method Note If this content is associated with a e Encode Type form this button is not needed Button lt input type button value Test e Name BJ Button name Test gt e Value Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 238 Working with HTML Forms Button Inserts this Example of HTML inserted Prompts on dialog box that kind of field appears 5 Submit Button lt input type Submit value Submit e Name Button name Submit gt e Value Reset Button lt input type reset value Reset e Name R Page name Reset gt e Value Hidden Text lt input type hidden value This e Name fab Field is initial content name mycontent gt e Value lab Text Field lt input size 15 value This is e Na
12. Make CMS Users Unique He Username Domain New Unique Username bbolt saturn planets com bbolt_ _saturn planets com bbolt venus planets com bbolt_ _venus planets com This screen lists all users whose user names are not unique and suggests a new unique Ektron CMS400 NET username The new name consists of the user name underscore at sign underscore the domain name So for example JJackson saturn com would appear as JJackson_ _saturn com The same is true for user groups For example if you had two groups name Account Operators one in the planets com domain and another in the saturn planets com domain the Make Ektron CMS400 NET Groups Unique screen would look like this Make CMS Groups Unique We User Group Name Domain New Unique User Group Name Account Operators planets com Account Operators_ _planets com Account Operators saturn planets com Account Operators_ _saturn planets com Ektron recommends that you accept the suggested new names Click the Save m button to do so One advantage of using the new name format is that if you later decide to re enable AD integration the software can automatically associate the AD and Ektron CMS400 NET users or groups Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 471 User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature User Authentication Only Mode How Information is Transferred from Active Directory to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400
13. XML Tag Description lt FormTitle gt Title given to the form that was submitted lt FormDescription gt Description given to the form that was submitted lt date gt Date and time the form was submitted lt MailTo gt To email address es defined in the form lt MailFrom gt From email address es defined in the form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 248 Working with HTML Forms XML Tag Description lt MailCc gt CC address es defined in the form lt MailSubject gt Subject for the generated email defined in the form lt MailPreamble gt Preamble for the generated email defined in the form Data Tags The XML email s data tags wrap the information entered by the form s submitter Each form element in the content becomes an XML tag The following image illustrates how a form is edited in the editor displayed on a Web page and then converted to XML for the email Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 249 Working with HTML Forms lt table width 100 bgcolor cOcOcO gt Form on Web Page lt td gt Name lt td gt lt td gt lt input size 15 name Name gt lt td gt john doe yourcompany com lt td gt Email Address lt td gt lt td gt lt input size 15 name Email gt lt td gt lt td gt Phone Number lt td gt lt td gt lt input size 15 name PhoneNumber
14. cc ceeeeeeesteeeeeeeenaees 119 Editing Membership UsSafS i isiiisi05 eeartiaspeteniaungtteraqeastbieniasoseinaas 119 Deleting Membership USers cceeeseseeceeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeeneeees 120 Membership User Groups s ecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeenseeeeees 121 Adding Membership User Groups 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 121 Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group 121 Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group 122 Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User Groups 122 Editing Membership User Group Name cceceeeeesteeeeteeeeee 122 Deleting User from Membership User Group ccccceeeseeeeees 123 Deleting Membership User Group cccsecceeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 Assigning Permissions for Membership sseecceseeeee 123 Troubleshooting Problems with Membership Users and GROUPS cicien a a 125 Using eWeDEditPrO s sisien 126 Prompting the User to Save Upon Closing Browser 126 Managing XMU orssed eaaa a riaa 128 Before You Manage XML Configurations ccssssseeeeee 129 The XML Configuration TOOW AN jssa 00sasrsvassecassaastecenassnava scabs sastsasnates 129 Accessing XML Configuration Skiset ntin iaeia ai 130 Adding a New XML Configuration sssssnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 131 Adding an XML Configuration Using the Data Designer 131 Adding an XML Configuration
15. iste Site LB _Images1 Server2 C drive jnetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedimages IISHelp Fe oe a ass i a at Buploadedfiles a a min uploadedimages aspnet_dient I xmlfiles ea 3 Application cfm 2 S contact ektron asp cms300scripts b S contact ektron aspx B LB_Images1 databases 9 contact ektron cfm H graphics 9 contact ektron php H E uploadedfiles S default css al he ann 16 Repeat the above steps for each virtual directory that you need to create on each Web server running Ektron CMS400 NET 1 unlnadedimanae NOTE Remember the names of the virtual directories on each server must be identical Setting Up Ektron CMS400 NET Load Balancing After setting up the virtual directories on both Web server machines you are ready to create the load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET Review Before we begin let s review the virtual directories that have been created Computer1 Virtual Directory Points to Uploadedimages C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedImages UploadedFiles C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFiles Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 406 Load Balancing Computer1 Virtual Directory Points to LB_Images1 Computer2 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploaded Images LB Files2 Computer2 C InetPub wwwroo
16. Deleting Content on page 54 i Move Content Move content to another folder Moving Content on page 50 EJ Add Folder Create a subfolder below the current folder Adding Subfolders on page 36 j Delete Folder Delete the current folder Note You cannot delete the parent folder Content Deleting Folders on page 37 al the properties window you can set permissions approvals etc 5 Collections Add edit or delete a collection from Collections on B the folder page 288 Search Search through content in the Search Content i Workarea Folder on page 37 Archived Displays content that passed its See the Ektron content scheduled End Date and whose CMS400 NET User archive option is either Archive and manual section remove from site or Archive and Scheduling Content to remain on Site Begin and End gt Setting Archive Options Properties View properties of current folder In Folder Properties on page 31 Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 The folder properties screen lets you set permissions and approvals for a folder 31 Managing Content Folders Accessing the Folder Properties Screen To access the folder properties screen follow these steps 1 Navigate to and click the content folder whose properties you want to edit 2 The folder
17. Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 403 Load Balancing 9 The Web Site Content Directory screen is displayed irtual Directory Creation Wizard x Web Site Content Directory Where is the content you want to publish on the Web site Enter the path to the directory that contains the content Directory Browse Cancel 10 Enter the path to the directory to be used for the virtual directory or click the Browse button to locate it NOTE The path is constructed using ComputerName FilePath format 11 Click Next to continue 12 Check off the permissions that you want to allow for the virtual folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 404 Load Balancing irtual Directory Creation Wizard Access Permissions What access permissions do you want to set for this virtual directory meamemeke we NOTE At a minimum the IIS user needs read and write permissions 13 Click Next to complete the wizard 14 A confirmation notifies you that you have created a virtual directory Click the Finish button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 405 Load Balancing 15 The IIS console is displayed with the virtual directory added to the specified location on View Help amx e Hh e e 2 IEIL2 local computer a gt H Web Sites C cmss00scripts
18. Inetpub 3 sPscms300Collection CAB 4KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 25 PM Program Files B spscmsso0content cAB 4KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 25 PM Common Files B sPscms300Form caB 4KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 25 PM ComPlus Applications B sPscms300ListSummary CAB SKB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 26 PM Gy Ektron 3 sPscms300Login caB 3KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 26 PM 3 amp cms300 3 sPscms3o0Profile cAB 3KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 26 PM E SharePoint2003 B sPscms3005earch cAB SKB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 26 PM cas 5 Internet Explorer E Microsoft SQL Server E NetMeeting E Outlook Express 5 SharePoint Portal Server Uninstall Information 4 E Windows Media Player E Windows NT E WindowsUpdate 5 WINDOWS E wmpub a SMe cil z fit objects Disk free space 3 54 GB 33 7 KB J my Computer VW 3 Double Click RegisterWebParts bat to execute the batch file that registers Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 355 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration lt SafeControl lt SafeControl lt SafeControl lt SafeControl lt SafeControl NOTE If you receive errors when running the bat file edit the file and make sure the correct location to stsadm exe is referenced 4 When complete the following lines are added to your Web config file Assembly CMS400Approvals Namespace CMS400Approvals TypeName Safe True
19. Tree NRConfig 8 UploadedImages C inetpublwwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedimages a woodgrove UploadedFiles C inetpub wwwroot CMs300Sample uploadedfiles AspNetExmp LB _Images1 WDoneil2 wwwroot CMS5300Sample uploadedimages aspnet_client LB Files1 WDoneil2 wwwroot CMS5300Sample uploadedfiles CM5100Sample_ASP C cms300scripts cms2005ample C databases CMS300RCSample E graphics EEE ia xmifies UploadedImages UploadedFiles H LB_Images1 LB_Files1 C cms300scripts E databases E graphics E xmlfiles 9 contact ektron asp AA E a products asp 9 search display asp m CM5300_ 2 1 0 06 ba CmsWebApplicationcl 2 search asp CodeBehind 9 site_scripts_path demoz 9 support asp demo3 SyndicationDemo Why Must the Virtual Directory Names Be Identical The virtual directory names must be identical because when load balance paths are created in Ektron CMS400 NET they are stored in one database The names of the load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET are unique but depending on the Web server machine that a user is on IIS resolves the path to point to the virtual directory stored on that Web server machine Example A load balance path is called LB_Images1 Ektron CMS400 NET talks
20. 3 Click the Edit Full Text Search button 4 4 The Edit Screen appears icp ENish US gt XPath Label froot products specifications tires Mires froot products specifications black Blak t froot products specifications mtbf MTBF ts froot products specifications datemanufactured Date manufactured 5 From the language dropdown list in the top right corner select the language whose labels you want to edit 6 Change the labels as needed 7 Click the Save button fa Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 157 Using the Data Designer Introduction NOTE EaRBRBHA S Oa Y Pee eWebEditPro XML s Data Designer feature lets you design a screen that collects information from users and stores it as XML data Creating the screen is simple and requires no knowledge of XML When using the Data Designer feature the following browsers are supported Netscape 6 2 or later Internet Explorer 5 5 or later For example you may create the following screen ES Sp S fb S Apply Style z Normal y Arial Helvetica gt 2010p z i nbsp CIm m ai n NOTE City State Massachusetts This screen can store information entered by a user as the following XML lt address gt lt street gt 123 Sesame St lt street gt lt city gt New York lt city gt lt state gt NY lt state gt lt address gt Note that the street a
21. After successfully configuring your load balancing model for your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site you are ready to use it Now each time an image or file gets uploaded in your Web site regardless of the Web server the user is currently working on the asset is replicated in all folders specified Ektron CMS400 NET on Three Machines This section examines a Web site driven by Ektron CMS400 NET and three Web servers Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 409 Load Balancing Setting Up Multiple Ektron CMS400 NET Web Sites NOTE To run an identical Ektron CMS400 NET Web site on three machines you must use the same database for each site To do this 1 Install the Ektron CMS400 NET exe file on each Web server that will be part of the Web site Refer to the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual for additional information on performing an install 2 Identify one installed database as your master database Each Web site points to this database for content users and load balance paths 3 Create an ODBC or OLE DB connection to that database and edit the web config file for each Web site to use that DSN Provider string or file string If performed correctly each Ektron CMS400 NET Web site on each Web server uses the same database Setting Up Virtual Directories Through Internet Information Services IIS on all three Web servers create virtual directories for each image or file folder to be used
22. Comment a Apply Style Normal 2 10pt A3 vo m ee m Be en Aa a E ot A a l AG O M Md ld Requiring Users to Enter Metadata You can determine that any metadata definition must be completed for content before it can be saved see the Required checkboxes in the illustration above This occurs both when new content is added and existing content is edited If you set a kind of metadata to be required its label is red and includes an asterisk on the Metadata tab of the Edit Content screen as shown below Edit Content in Folder Content Title cms Developer Engl Content Summary Meta Data Schedule Comment title coms Developer CBSE current character count 13 500 max Ser Character Required fields If the user does not complete a required metadata field a message informs him that the information must be entered before he can save the content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 75 Metadata Effect of a Default Value on Required Metadata A default value can be defined when creating or editing a metadata definition See Also Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 If a default value is defined for a required metadata field the default value is used when the user saves the content In this case the user is not prompted to enter a value because the default value is sufficient Inheritance of Metadata by Folder Each
23. If needed click the Edit Summary or Edit Metadata tab to edit to the content s summary or metadata Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Editing a Form s Summary A content s summary is used to contain the post back message when a visitor submits a form To edit a form s summary follow these steps 1 Or oe ee IN Deleting a Form Access the View Form screen of the form whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing a Form s Properties on page 256 Click the Edit Summary tab The Edit Summary screen is displayed Make the necessary changes to the summary Click the Save button E You can easily delete forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and summary To delete a form follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 259 Working with HTML Forms 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 2 Click the Delete Form button AF 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 260 Font Manager Font Manager As an administrator you can add edit and delete fonts to and from the Ektron CMS400 NET application By adding fonts you are allowing the content contributors to use them when creating content Administrators can
24. Move Down Remove F First item is not a valid selection For example Select Caption Co Data Style Cancel Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may not appear depending on how your administrator has set up your system List Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 196 Using the Data Designer Field Description Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Value Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter musi
25. Not be the first option on the selection list 7 Enter an error message This message appears if the user s input does not conform to the validation rule Tip If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after the form is submitted and if the message does not identify the field the user may be unable to identify which field needs correction 8 Click the Save button to save changes Viewing Form Reports If a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps 1 Access the Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report The Form Modules screen appears Click the form you want to view Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 254 Working with HTML Forms 5 The View Form screen appears 6 Click the View Reports button l The View Forms Report screen appears 8 Enter report criteria using the following table as a reference Field Description Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date Th
26. Select a default language for Ektron CMS400 NET How a User s Application Language Affects His Use of Ektron CMS400 NET This user s language determines the screens and messages that appear within Ektron CMS400 NET How the System Default Language Relates to a User s Language Setting In the user profile you can set each user s language You can set any user s language to system default Each user whose language is set to system default uses the language assigned here Note Do not confuse this default application language with the ek_ DefaultContentLanguage variable in web config For more information on that variable see The Default Language on page 318 Maximum Content Size In bytes limit the size of each content item by specifying a maximum size If a user s changes to content results in exceeding this limit the user is told to reduce the size of the content before he can save it Maximum Summary Size Limit the size of each summary by specifying a maximum size If a user s changes to a summary result in exceeding this limit the user is told to reduce the size of the content before he can save it System email Address Enter a valid email address into this field This will be the address in the From field in the notification emails Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 21 Modifying the Application Setup Screen Field Description Enable
27. Set Up Email Accounts For l o a Docs Creating Task Categories and Task Types From the View Categorization screen you can create Task Categories and Task Types by clicking the Add Task Button L When you do the following screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 270 Managing Tasks Task Type Add Task Type to Existing Task Category Administration x Task Type Description O Add Task Type to New Task Category Task Type Availability O Not Available From this screen you can e Adda Task Type to an existing Category e Create a new Task Category and Task Type e Edit a task category e Edit a task type and description e Define Task Type availability Adding a New Task Category and Task Type To add new Task Category and Task Type follow these steps 1 Click the Add Task Type button L 2 The Add Task Type Screen appears 3 Click the Add Task Type to New Task Category radio button or in the text box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 271 Managing Tasks 4 Enter a name in the New Task Category field Add Task Type Task Type O Add Task Type to Existing Task Category v Task Type Ohaa Task Type to New Task Category O Not Av 5 Adda Task Type name in the Task Type field Enter a Task Type Description 7 Choose a Task Type Availability See Also Ta
28. The View Users in Group Screen displays for each user in the group e username and domain e first and last name e language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 466 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature View Users in Group CMSAdmin planets com pe Username Lastname Firstname Language admin planets com admin admin App Default soneil saturn planets com O Neil Ambrose App Default bbolt planets com Bolt Bob App Default The screen also displays the following buttons Button Description 2 Replace group See Also Replacing a User Group on page 453 Return to previous screen E i The Search Active Directory for Groups Screen Search Active Directory for groups e Active Directory Group Domain planets com Search Use this screen to add AD groups to Ektron CMS400 NET Enter as much search criteria as you know to reduce the number of groups that the search yields NOTE You can only select AD groups that do not already exist in Ektron CMS400 NET Also the Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain If it does you can only search for groups within that domain Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 467 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature For example if you know that the group begins with S and is in the planets domain enter those criteria and y
29. e Inheritance on page 79 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 78 Setting Permissions e Standard amp Advanced Permissions on page 80 e Setting Permissions for a Content Folder on page 81 e Setting Permissions for Content on page 84 Inheritance By default all content folders and items inherit permissions from their parent folder You have two options for modifying permissions e Modify the permissions of the parent folder see Setting Permissions for a Content Folder on page 81 e Break inheritance and add permissions to a folder Breaking Inheritance To break inheritance from a parent folder follow these steps 1 Access the Permissions Table for a content folder or content in your Workarea as described in Accessing the Permissions Table on page 81 2 Remove the check mark from the box that says Allow this object to inherit permissions 3 Aconfirmation message appears 4 Click OK Restoring Inheritance To restore inheritance for a content folder or content follow these steps 1 Access the Permissions Table as described in Accessing the Permissions Table on page 81 2 Place a check in the box that says Allow this object to inherit permissions 3 Aconfirmation message appears 4 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 79 Setting Permissions Standard amp Advanced Permissions There are two categories of
30. gt Quicklinks and Forms A Quicklink for Ektron CMS400 NET content is made up of these elements e Site address e Template file name e Content ID number e Language identifier WARNING Only use the language identifier if you are forcing or changing the language Content Block Language Web Site Address Template iIp Identifier ttp www yoursite com news asp 7id 9 amp LangType 1036 The Template The default template URL is the address of the default template file in the Web server s file system By itself the template URL would retrieve the empty template or the template with its default document Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 45 Managing Content NOTE You can set a default document for a template in the content function by inserting an id number The Content Variable A question mark separates the template URL from the content variable The content variable indicates which document or content the server places in the template before displaying the page Below is a description of the URL format www yourEktronwebsite com Content Example Description variable ID n http ID selects a single document to display This variable would be used for a template of the single index aspx ID 1 document template type The value corresponds to the content s id value The above variable s name is based on the templates includ
31. j Now that you have entered information about the form the next step is to enter information about the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 236 See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 225 Letting the User Override email Values You can let the user completing a mailto form override default values for the following elements Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 235 Working with HTML Forms to email recipient s from email recipient s cc email recipient s subject line preamble that is default text To set up a user override for these fields follow these steps 1 6 Perform steps 1 4 in Creating a Form s Content on page 236 or edit existing content Within the editor insert an appropriate field label such as Enter your email address Click the Text Field button fab from the form element toolbar The Insert Text Field window is displayed In the Name field enter the appropriate override name Name Overrides send_email to address es in the generated email send_from from address es in the generated email send_cc cc address es in the generated email send_subject subject line in the generated email send_preamble preamble in the generated email Enter the remaining information and click Insert to add the field to the content When a user is completing the form and ins
32. Each user depending on their permissions can upload images and files through the library in their Workarea In the library you determine the types of files that can be uploaded and each user s library permissions What s In This Chapter This chapter assume you are familiar with the Library Folder chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual As a result this chapter only provides information that is unique to administrators The following topics are covered in this chapter e Library Folders and Permissions on page 94 e Folder Properties on page 95 e Load Balancing on page 100 e If You Have an Ektron WeblmageFX License Key on page 103 Library Folders and Permissions Whenever a new content folder is created and permissions given to it a corresponding new folder is created in the Library The new folder inherits permissions from the content folder Items added to library folders are only accessible by users with permission to the corresponding content folder If items are added to a library folders directly under the main Library folder all users with at least Library Read Only permissions can use those library items in their content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 94 Managing Library Items Conversely if a library item is uploaded to a folder to which only one person has permissions that is the only user who can use that library asset Folder Properties The li
33. Editing Tabular Data on page 175 Caption If desired enter text to describe this table on the data entry screen The caption appears centered above the table After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify the caption s size font color and other attributes Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 182 Using the Data Designer Checkbox M A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example Check if you are over 65 Dialog Box Checkbox Field x Name M Indexed Display name r Default value C True checked False unchecked Caption cne Fields on the Checkbox Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may not appear depending on how your administrator set up your system Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 183 Using the Data Designer F
34. Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 194 Using the Data Designer Field Description Caption Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Choices field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor No longer See No longer available on page 197 available Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Select List 2a A Select List field is similar to a Choices field The biggest difference is that the responses appear in a drop down box instead of appearing separately To see the choices click the down arrow on the right side of the box circled below See Also Choices Field vs Select List Field on page 191 For example CELINTE E Mpply Style Normal Select areas of interest music art sports Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 195 Using the Data Designer Select List Field Name List M Indexed ltem List Check item to be selected by default ltem Value Text I No longer available dd Change
35. Multi Language Support XLIFF File Skeleton XHTML File XLIFF File Skeleton XHTML File XLIFF File Skeleton XHTML File XLIFF File Skeleton XHTML File Number of XLIFF files XLIFF XHTML files created c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles sliff 1046_1033_29 0_cb xml Click here to see the file cVinetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles xhtml 1046_1033_29 0 cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles sliff 1046_1033_28 _0_cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles xhtml 1046_1033_28_0_cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles sliff 2055_1033_29 0 cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles xhtml 2055_1033_29 0_cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles sliff 2055_1033_28 _0_cb xml Click here to see the file c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles xhtml 2055_1033_28 0 cb xml Click here to see the file For each content item that satisfied the criteria on the Select Content to Translate screen two files were created one XLIFF and one Skeleton XHTML file The following information is included inside the XLIFF file Note that TODO precedes each string that needs to be translated Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 333 Multi Language Support lt xml
36. Scripts H I1SAdmin H 11SSamples H MSADC H ISHelp E E Webpub databases H a Printers S search cfm H SamplecF S addcontent asp 9 search php S addcontent aspx 9 addcontent cFm H 0 viewlets H ephoxeditlive a it el il 3 In the toolbar at the top of the screen follow the path Action gt New gt Virtual Directory Internet Information Services mH Lo winlasdadflac Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 401 4 The Virtual Directory Creation Wizard is displayed irtual Directory Creation Wizard this web site Welcome to the Virtual SI Directory Creation Wizard This wizard will help you create a new virtual directory on Click Next to continue Load Balancing 5 Click Next to proceed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 402 Load Balancing 6 The Virtual Directory Alias screen is displayed irtual Directory Creation Wizard a xj Virtual Directory Alias You must give the virtual directory a short name or alias for quick reference Type the alias you want to use to gain access to this Web virtual directory Use the same naming conventions that you would for naming a directory Alias o Cancel 7 Enter an alias for the virtual directory This name will reference the virtual directory in Ektron CMS400 NET 8 Click Next to continue
37. This section explains how to create and manage XML configurations using both methods The XML Configuration Toolbar During the process of creating and managing XML configurations several toolbar buttons are available The following table describes the buttons and their actions Button Name Description More Information Fal Add XML Create a new XML configuration or Adding a New XML Bgl Configuration create a new XML configuration based Configuration on page 131 on the properties of an existing one Back Return to previous screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 129 Managing XML Button Name Description More Information F Configure Full Edit search screen labels Editing the Search Labels on Text Search page 157 i Delete Delete an XML configuration Deleting XML Configurations on page 148 E Edit Edit an XML configuration created Editing XML Configurations on CY with external files page 143 Pd Edit Data Edit an XML configuration created Editing Data Design Packages se Design with the Data Designer on page 143 Save Save changes Update Save and update changes E View XSLT Display the XSLT for an XML Viewing Data Designer XSLTs E configuration on page 147 Accessing XML Configurations To access the XML Configuration section of the Workarea follow these steps 1 Access your Workarea as described
38. Types of Search Criteria XML Indexing allows multi dimensional searches on all types of XML data If the field type is string a search can look for an exact phrase or the occurrence of any word in the phrase Numerical and date information can be searched using expressions such as greater than less than or between two values List and choices type fields let the user select from several predetermined values When searching on these fields the screen can display all values and let the user select relevant ones For every search field NoSelection is a possible value If this is chosen the search disregards that field when compiling results Displaying Search Results The results page can show content that satisfies all search criteria or one or more criteria If you choose the latter option the results page shows weighted results That is pages with the highest number of matches the most relevant ones appear first followed by pages with fewer matches The number of hits is indicated by an asterisk So if one page matches all of the selection criteria it appears in the top group If another page matches some of the selection criteria it also appears but lower on the page In the example below the first two Web pages had two matches with the selection criteria while the third page RC Cheetah had one match Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 151 XML IndexingManaging XML RG internati
39. e Deleting Membership Users on page 120 e Membership User Groups on page 121 Adding Membership Users To add a new membership user follow these steps 1 Access the membership users folder as described in Accessing the Membership Module Folder on page 118 2 Click the Add Membership User button E 3 The Add Membership User screen is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 118 Private Content amp Memberships 4 Complete the form using the following table as a reference Field Description Username Enter a unique username for the membership user First Name Enter the first name of the user Last Name Enter the last name of the user Password Enter a password for the user Confirm Pwd Re type the password to confirm it is correct Email Address Enter an email address for the user 5 Click the Save button I Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group See Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group on page 122 Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership Users See Assigning Permissions for Memberships on page 123 Viewing Membership User Information To view membership user information follow these steps 1 Access the membership users folder as described in Accessing the Membership Module Folder on page 118 2 Click the user you want to view 3 The View Membership User Information
40. gt lt td gt This feature is great lt td gt Problem lt td gt lt td gt lt textarea name Problem rows 5 cols 15 gt lt textarea gt lt td gt lt td gt lt td gt lt td gt lt input t pe submit value Submit gt lt td gt Sample Site inquiry View Tools Message Help a A z v esl a xI OQ Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next From Ektron CMS300 User Date Wednesday July 23 2003 3 11 PM To support ektron com Subject CM5300 Sample Site inquiry eWebEditPro lt cmsMail gt lt FormTitle gt Contact Ektron Support lt FormTitle gt lt FormDescription gt Contact Ektron Support Form lt FormgDescriptiaon gt lt date gt 7 23 2003 3 11 24 PM lt date gt lt MailTo gt support ektron com lt MailTo gt lt MailFrom gt Ektron CMS300 User lt MailFrarm gt lt MailCe gt lt MailSubject gt CMS300 Sample Site inquiry lt MailJubject gt lt MailPreamble gt This form was submitted from Ektron CM Data Submitted by Form lt Data gt lt Name gt John Doe lt Name gt lt EMail gt john doe yourcompany com lt EMail gt lt PhoneNumber gt 555 555 1234 lt PhoneNumber gt lt problem gt This feature is great lt problem gt lt Data gt As you can see the content is comprised of four form elements that are converted to XML tags e Name e Email e PhoneNumber e Problem Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6
41. 5 Create a metadata definition for each supported language Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 6 Create or translate content e Creating New Content on page 319 e Translating Content on page 319 7 Change the language of content not in the default language Note Only needed if Web site previously had content in more than one language Resolving Conversion Issues on page 342 8 Setup approval chains for new content Multi Language Approval Chains on page 336 9 Set up multilingual collections Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 337 10 Set up multilingual menus Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 338 11 Modify text on templates Modifying Page Content Based on Language Selection on page 340 12 Translate graphics Modifying Images Based on Language Selection on page 341 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 339 Multi Language Support Creating Web Pages that Support Several Languages When thinking about setting up your Web site to support content in multiple languages consider these three actions Action For more information see Create language specific e Translating Content on page 319 content menus collections e Working with Collections in a Multi Language Sys tem on page 337 e Working with Menus in a Multi La
42. Asset Management Server Registration Asset Management ID 55e05fc4 803d 4959 a818 3b70ae Registered Asset Management Servers e http localhost AssetManagement http sqa lisa AssetManagement Show detailed registration information PDF Portable Document Format is a type of file developed as a means of distributing compact platform independent documents Each document is self contained packing text graphics and fonts into a file Office documents stored in Ektron CMS400 NET can be automatically converted to PDF format Then when adding the Office document to a Web page a visitor sees the PDF version of the document Why use PDF Files easily cross multiple platforms including Microsoft Apple Linux and Unix Documents keep their formatting and appear the same ona computer screen or when printing File size is typically smaller which means less bandwidth usage Free viewing application that allows any Office documents once converted to be viewed by anyone with a PDF viewer Eliminates the need for a different viewer for each file type Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 495 Asset Management Administration The following sections explain creating PDFs with the Asset Management feature e PDF Conversion Process on page 496 e Local PDF Generation on page 497 e Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation on page 507 e Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Auto
43. Click the Update button Gal Deleting Users or User Groups from the Permissions Table To remove permissions from a user or user group use the Delete button on the View Permissions window To do so follow these steps 1 ou Ff Wh Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content as described in Accessing the Permissions Table on page 81 Click the Delete button O The Remove Permissions screen appears Click the user or group to remove from the Permissions Table A confirmation message appears Click the OK button NOTE When you delete the permissions of a user or user group that change is propagated to all subfolders and content Also if the user or group was part of an approval chain they are removed from it Setting Permissions for Content You can assign permissions to a single content item overriding the default permissions inherited from the folder To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 84 Setting Permissions 1 Access the content by navigating to its folder selecting a language and clicking on it Click the View Permissions button 9 3 Uncheck the box next to Allow this object to inherit permissions A confirmation message appears Press OK 5 You can perform any action on the content that you can perform on a folder These options are described in Actions You Can Perform from the Permissions Table on
44. Content folders Setting Permissions for a Content Folder on page 81 Content Setting Permissions for Content on page 84 2 If necessary break the inheritance for the content or folder See Also Inheritance on page 79 3 Set the content folder or item to Private See Also Private Content on page 114 4 Click View MemberShip Users on the right end of the permissions table 5 The membership users user groups added to the permissions table are displayed Click the Add button dp The Add Permissions screen is displayed Click a username or user group name to add to the permissions table 9 The Add Permissions Options screen is displayed 10 Check Read only if you want the membership user or user group to be able to view the private content when logged in 11 Click the Save button E The membership user or user group is saved and added to the permissions table Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 124 Private Content amp Memberships Troubleshooting Problems with Membership Users and Groups Symptom Problem Solution Error Response Buffer exceeded its Increase limit To do so follow these steps message limit 1 Stop IIS oes cam 2 Locate the file F SWinDir System32 Inetsrv Metabase xml error ASP 0251 3 Modify the AspBufferingLimit value eee 4 Restart IIS Response The default value is 4194304 which is about 4 MB Butte
45. Fields that Appear on Several Dialogs cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 217 Custom VAN CAMO M sena EET 220 Working with HTML FOrmMS sssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 225 Overview of Form Processing ssssssnunrsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 227 The Structure of Form Data ecccssseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeees 227 Form Folders and COnN essaiera 228 M ilto Or Database FORM suosia aaa 229 F m Permis SIGIR occ oss wieccssecccsscecteccccecceseetacacceccclicesietccctact 230 Preparing the Server to Send email csseeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 231 Accessing the Forms Folder cccsssssccsseseeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeees 231 Form Module Toolpa i rcranaerennununnn 232 Greating a NOW FOr siscsisiccsesencctecsocnccsinccncrccesccecsteccncerescsscnced 234 Letting the User Override email Values cccccceeeseeeeeeseeneeeees 235 Creating a Form s Content ccssseeeceessseeeeeeessseeeeeeesneeeees 236 Heering FORM ISIS MSitsccisssessecntadeny indetaagadatadattanatateeaiveatacanianis 237 Implementing a Form on a Web Page ssssccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 243 Sending Data as XML sisien erences 244 AML email SUC MUNG cirie sae pcedeccinasnitecccitaswiieccersadiaectersbiiaceieensbdlunce 246 Form Vahdati Msssls 251 Steps for Applying Validation Rules to a Form Field 0 251 Viewing Form REPOTIS siiissirisiiindsinsiuinieisnneinina iisbaan 254 Exporting Form RGPOMS sarissa 255 Viewing Form
46. From the language drop down list select the language in which you want to create the content Human_Resources 3 Danish English US French Standard German Standard If the desired language is not available see Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 Click the Add Content button and create the content as you would any content See Also Adding Content on page 39 In order to add metadata to a content metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language See Also Metadata on page 62 Translating Content When translating content into a foreign language you have three options Option For more information see Copy original content into a new content item in a Translating Content Manually on new language Then translate content manually page 320 Use the computer based translation tool provided Using Machine Translation on page 322 with Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 319 Multi Language Support Option For more information see Create an XLIFF or XHTML file from existing content The files are sent to a translation agency and return translated in the new language s Then you import the translated files into the CMS Using the Language Xport Feature on page 325 Translating Content Manually Use this procedure when you want to initialize n
47. Ifitis checked click OK Do not change other settings in this dialog box If it is unchecked click the checkbox to add a check Then click OK Do not change other settings in this dialog box 11 Click the Directory tab Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 499 Asset Management Administration 12 Click the Create button EktronPdfGenerator Properties When connecting to this resource the content should come from The designated directory S e located anotner A redirection to a URL Local Path EktronPdfGenerator C Script source access M Log visits V Read M Index this resource CI Write C Directory browsing ares Application name Default Application Starting point lt Default Web Site gt Execute Permissions Scripts only Application Protection Medium Pooled 13 Click OK Do not change other settings in this dialog box 14 Open a Web browser 15 In the Address field insert the following line http localhost EktronPdfGenerator PdfGenerator asmx Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 500 Asset Management Administration 16 Verify the following page appears 4 PdfGenerator Web Service Microsoft Internet Explorer TB File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Links EktronNet Welcome Ektron Inc CMS400 Example PdfGenerator The following operations a
48. MC 5500 0000 0000 0004 16 digits AMEX 340000000000009 15 digits DC 30000000000004 14 digits DIS 6011000000000004 16 digits Social Security Text field only Be a valid social security 123 45 6789 Number number 123456789 U S Postal Codes Text field only Be valid U S state postal NH 2 Letter state code MA U S Zip Codes Text field only Be a 5 digit U S zip code or 12345 zip 4 12345 6789 U S amp Canadian Phone Number Text field only Match the U S or Canadian phone pattern 123 456 7890 123 456 7890 Canadian Postal Text field only Match the Canadian postal Z5Z 5Z5 Code code format Z5Z5Z5 Time Text field only Be in a valid time format 12 45 HH MM HH MM SS 12 45 05 HH MM SS mmm 12 45 05 052 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 253 Working with HTML Forms Validation Rule Can be When applied data in Valid Examples applied to the field must IP Address Text field only Be in a valid IP address 192 168 0 1 format For example 255 255 255 255 999 999 999 999 Dollar Amount Text field only Be in a valid dollar format 100 100 00 100 100 00 Canadian Social Text field only Be in a valid Canadian social 999999999 Insurance Number insurance number format 123456789 Number of Characters Text area only Adhere to the max min settings specified Cannot be first option Select list only
49. Multi Language Support Submitting Translation Files to Service Agency After you create the translation files determine which format the service agency wants XLIFF or XHTML Then make a copy of the corresponding folder and send it to the service agency IMPORTANT Leave the original translation files both XLIFF and XHTML intact They are needed when you import the translated files back into Ektron CMS400 NET When the service agency returns the files copy them back to the original folder During this process you overwrite the translation files that were copied to that folder It is important that your translation agency does not rename the files if they do you cannot import them successfully Importing Translated Files into Ektron CMS400 NET WARNING You can only import each file once After the you import the file once subsequent translated versions of content are ignored To import the translated files into Ektron CMS400 NET go to the Workarea gt Modules gt Import Export Lang Then choose the import option corresponding the type of file your service agency translated After the translation files are imported a report shows the results An example is below XHTML files Imported 1 File 1031_1033_24 0 cb xml Content ID 24 Can Not be updated The content is in the state PendingDate 2 File 1036_ 1033 24 0 cb xml Content ID 24 Can Not be updated The content is in the state PendingDate 3 Impor
50. Office documents take less time to be converted to PDF format e Security Office documents never leave the local network e Quality You can configure the output quality of the Office documents Ektron has tested the following PDF generation systems with Ektron DMS400 e OmniFormat by Software995 e ActivePDF Server by ActivePDF Inc The following sections explain setting up local PDF generation e Setting Up a Local PDF Generator on page 497 e Modifying the lt PdfGenerator gt Tag Information on page 506 Setting Up a Local PDF Generator This section describes setting up OmniFormat as a local PDF generator It includes e Editing the AssetManagement Contfig file e Setting up the EktronPDFGenerator folder e Editing the Web Config file e Installing the PDF generation software e Starting the PDF generation service on your server Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 497 Asset Management Administration Follow these steps to set up a local PDF generator on your network 1 Extract the zip file you received for PDF generation from Ektron Inc It creates two directories Pdf995 EktronPDFGenerator 2 Copy the EktronPDFGenerator folder to your webroot For example c inetpub wwwroot 3 Open the web config file located in webroot EktronPdfGenerator 4 Make sure the following keys exist between the lt appSettings gt tags lt add key DocumentsDirectory value C O
51. TaSK svstsssttatsensasicsnsicansinassinasanasdatetaasntecidiavsainnncnanacass 286 Pu rgi ga TSU sa cirsestccs ccc sccccaces tte cccctecsctestcccercccciicccactesintecatiecacs 287 es E E E 288 Collection PerimlSslons wisiesensncccsscansccossecentesensarensetecsaccecedussscees 289 Men a ye iapa aana 290 Calendars vcr cnstoseonmnenns 292 Calendar Toolbar Buttons iiisiessicetssissscisasssscsssscsaansecssacsccsesasiaas 292 Accessing the Workarea Using Calendars eeecseeeee 294 Calendar PermiSSiOns risici iaaeao naaa 294 Adding a New Calendat ccccsssseeceessseeeeeeessseeeeeesseneneeeeeeees 295 DISPIAY VWWSCKENOS ain 298 Editing Galondars zesarea EE 299 Deleting GalenGars ssrma n a a 300 Ga lendar Event Ty BCG ceases ss asic eect access pecceeeteeecccnmecnidens 300 Epabling Event MWPOSisci ticiesranntinierensandnnscaes AEE 301 Viewing Event Types sccecesscncccceaesssstedsenesssshedeceexssstedecaesussbedocedesnstees 301 AOGIIG Eveni TOES 301 Editing the Event Type NaMe cccessseecceeeeeseeneeeeeeeeerneeeeees 302 Deleng Evont TY PCS sesen 302 Assigning an Event Type to an Event ssssssessrrressrrrrrrssserenns 303 Displaying Calendars on Web PageS s sssssnssnurennurennunnnnnns 303 Creating a Foreign Language Calendat ccsssseeeseesee 303 Using Existing Calendar ID or Creating a New One 305 Searching Content on the Web Site ccccseeeeeeeees 309 poor fe 3 ALS
52. U A E 14337 Arabic Yemen 9217 Azeri Cyrillic 2092 Azeri Latin 1068 Basque 1069 Belarussian 1059 Bulgarian 1026 Burmese 1109 Catalan 1027 Chinese Hong Kong SAR PRC 3076 Chinese Macau SAR 5124 Chinese PRC 2052 Chinese Singapore 4100 Chinese Taiwan 1028 Croatian 1050 Czech 1029 Danish 1030 Dutch Belgium 2067 Dutch Netherlands 1043 English Australian 3081 English Belize 10249 English Canadian 4105 English Caribbean 9225 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 512 Appendix A List of Supported Languages English Ireland 6153 English Jamaica 8201 English New Zealand 5129 English Philippines 13321 English South Africa 7177 English Trinidad 11273 English United Kingdom 2057 English US 1033 English Zimbabwe 12297 Estonian 1061 Faeroese 1080 Farsi 1065 Finnish 1035 French Belgian 2060 French Canadian 3084 French Luxembourg 5132 French Monaco 6156 French Standard 1036 French Switzerland 4108 Gaelic Ireland 2108 Galician Spain 1110 German Austria 3079 German Liechtenstein 5127 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 513 Appendix A List of Supported Languages German Luxembourg 4103 German Standard 1031 German Switzerland 2055 Greek 1032 Gujarati In
53. Users a MemberShips E E User Groups 4 Import Export Lang s Help ae Configuration Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click the ES button in the upper right corner Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Getting Started When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron CMS400 NET view of your Web site but do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Navigation NOTE The Ektron CMS400 NET administrator Workarea is divided into two frames e the left frame displays the system s folders e the right frame displays common reports For more information see Content Reports on page 59 Each category in the right frame is followed by a number indicating how many content items are in that status Content to Expire lists how many content items will expire within ten days By going to the report Smart Desktop gt Reports gt Content To Expire and changing the number of days you can view a list of content to expire in that amount of time The number next to Tasks indicates how many open tasks are assigned to or have been assigned by you Open tasks are those in one of the following states not started active awaiting data on hold pending reopened Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 8 Getting Started alainaani Smart Desktop for John Edit D Smart Desktop s Tasks 4 Reports Content Awaiting Approval 0 CY Content Currently Che
54. data in Valid Examples applied to the field must Working with HTML Forms Preel Pelee Submit Foi 4 Click the Set Validation button Ff from the form element toolbar 5 The Form Validation Rules window opens 4 Form alidation Rules Microsoft Internet Explorer validation No Yalidation Type Error Message zi 77 en eRe WE Ge EN o Se Z 6 Select from the drop down list a validation rule to apply to the form element The following table explains validation rules and the fields to which you can apply each rule No Validation Text field No validation is applied Text area field Select list field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 252 Working with HTML Forms Validation Rule Can be When applied data in Valid Examples applied to the field must Cannot be blank e Text field Contain text or numbers anything Field cannot be left blank e Textarea field Numeric Only Text field only Contain only numbers no text 1248361 Text Only Text field only Contain only text no yada numbers Date Only Text field only Conform to a date format For 03 02 80 example mm dd yy or mm 08 29 2002 dd yyyy Email Type Only Text field only Be a valid email address ajo company com Credit Card Validation Text field only Be a valid credit card number VISA 4111 1111 1111 1111 16 digits
55. difference between them is how you use the button to add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the drag and drop toolbar drag a button to desired screen location Note that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform the commands You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context sensitive menu of all commands To edit the properties of any field already on the screen select the field right click the mouse and select Field Properties e two buttons appear on the regular Edit toolbar Design mode and Data Entry mode For more information see Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 160 I nhan t A l n The Data Entry mode button lets you preview the screen being created e several regular toolbar buttons are grayed out because they do not work with Data Designer Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode The Data Designer feature supplies two modes which make it easier for you to design screens e Data Design mode lets you insert and remove fields from the data entry screen e Data Entry mode simulates the screen s appearance during data entry Two toolbar buttons let you switch between modes The buttons are located on the Edit toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 160 Using the Data Desi
56. eo SP or Access the View Event Types for Calendar Name for the calendar with the Event Type you want to edit as described in Viewing Event Types on page 301 Click the Event Types button 5 The View Event Types for Calendar Name window opens listing all Event Types Click the Edit button L The Edit an Event Type screen appears Click the radio button next to the Event Type you want to edit Click the Edit button C The Add or Edit an Event Type screen is displayed Update the Event Type name Click the Save button i Deleting Event Types To delete an event type from a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Event Types for Calendar Name for the calendar with the Event Type you want to delete as described in Viewing Event Types on page 301 Click the Event Types button 5 The View Event Types for Calendar Name window opens listing all Event Types Click the Remove button The Delete Event Types screen displays available Event Types Check the box next to each Event Type you want to delete Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 302 Calendars NOTE Click either Select All or Clear All to check off all or none of the Event Types 7 Click the Delete button BD to delete the Event Type 8 Aconfirmation message is displayed 9 Click OK Assigning an Event Type to an Event After Event Types are available users can
57. gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt E A dy nbsp TM E i 6 The next field State should let the user choose from several states Assume that you want the state to appear to the right of City Move the cursor to the end of the City field and drag the Select List Field field icon as into that space Then complete the dialog as shown below Name state F Indeved List U S States amp Territories m ltem List Item Value Text kansas F No longer available med Forces Americas med Forces Europe Add Change AP Armed Forces Pacific x Check item to be selected by default Move Up Move Down Remove J First item is not a valid selection For example Select ALLII Data Style Cancel Now the screen looks like this Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 169 Using the Data Designer S RORMA Sl oo yu Aee E Alel ce ll Bi Apply Style Z y Arial Helvetica 2 10 pt x nbsp 0 1M amp La IEY fo wit ss ee el Uy Address Street City State Select The above example is very simple and does not use some of the Data Designer s more powerful and flexible features To learn more about Data Designer read the rest of this chapter T Select Button z Data Designer Field Types To help you use all of the Data Designer s capabili
58. on page 62 8 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Using Machine Translation Ektron CMS400 NET includes a machine translation feature which can automatically translate content from to the following languages e English e Dutch e French e German e Italian e Portuguese Brazil e Spanish NOTE Currently machine translation is not supported for all languages in the Language Settings screen Like most software based translation someone fluent in the new language should review the translated content to verify that the translation is appropriate within the context of the page The machine translation feature lets you choose a glossary that is a field industry or subject area This helps the software find the best translation for a term or phrase with different meanings in different fields To use the machine translation feature follow these steps Accessing Content via the Web Site 1 Navigate to a page on which you can select the site language See Also Viewing Your Site in Another Language on page 315 2 Select the language into which you want to translate Navigate to content you want to translate Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 322 Multi Language Support NOTE You must have privileges to add content to the folder See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 4 Right click within the content s b
59. round X Rounds the number to the nearest integer For example round 3 14 The result is 3 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 204 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Subtract two numbers X Y Subtract the value in the second field Y from the value in the first field X Multiply two numbers X Y Multiply the value in the first field X by the value in the second field Y Divide two numbers format number X div Y OHHH Divide the value in the first field X by the value in the second field Y Format as a percentage Absolute value of a number format number X div Y 0 X number X amp gt 0 2 1 Determine what percentage one number X is of another Y For example if X 10 and Y 100 the result of the calculation is 10 The number regardless of the sign negative or positive Minimum of two numbers X number X amp lt Y Y number X amp gt Y The smaller of two field values Maximum of two numbers X number X amp gt Y Y number X amp lt Y The larger of two field values Zero if subtraction is negative X Y number X Y amp gt 0 Subtract one number Y from another X If the difference is less than zero insert zero Multiply by another number if checkbox is
60. you want to edit as described in Viewing Metadata Definitions on page 72 2 Click the Edit button LY 3 The Edit Metadata Definition screen is displayed 4 Make the necessary changes to the definition See Also Metadata Definition Fields on page 66 5 Click the Update button i What Happens When a Metadata Definition is Edited If you create a metadata definition assign it to a folder then users insert metadata information into their content the collected information takes on the characteristics of the metadata definition For example if the metadata is title and its type is HTML tag this is how it appears in the Web page s source code lt title gt CMS Developer lt title gt If you later change its type to Meta the following effects occur e metadata to which the definition has already been assigned maintains the previous style definition For example lt titie gt cus Developer lt title gt e when you create a new content item that uses the metadata definition its metadata takes on the new style For example lt meta name title content CMS developer gt Deleting a Metadata Definition You can remove metadata definitions that are no longer used from the Ektron CMS400 NET site When you delete a definition it is removed from every content item that uses it To delete a definition follow these steps 1 Access the View Metadata Definition screen for the definition as described in V
61. 338 e Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site on page 338 e Resolving Conversion Issues on page 342 Enabling Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content Support for multi language content is enabled in the web config file To enable or disable it follow these steps Open the file webroot yourwebsite web config 2 To enable multi language content set the value of ek_EnableMultilingual to 1 To disable it set it to zero 0 3 Save and close web config Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 314 Multi Language Support Viewing Your Site in Another Language It s easy for your site visitors to view your site in any enabled language On any screen your developer can display a language drop down list circled in red below RG international Home Products Support Latest News Careers Search Calendar Login Contact Ektror Lots of new features in Ektron CMS300 Welcome to RC International RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing In three short years RC International has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RC community We will continue striving to improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC International member NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe NEW PRODUCT Introducing
62. 6 11 Getting Started Vertical LY Edit Th View History 0 Delete Add Task Title Corporate Published i Workarea for Application Administrator Logout Horizontal To change the display type follow these steps Open web config in your root folder Find the variable ex_menuDisplayType Change its value 0 zero Horizontal 1 Vertical Returning to the Classic CMS Interface Prior to Release 4 7 the colored borders and the toolbar menu always appeared on the screen not only when the user moved the mouse over the area To return to this display style follow these steps NOTE If you switch to the classic interface the page layout is not depicted accurately because of the fixed toolbars 1 Open web config in your root folder 2 Find the variable ek_UserMenuType 3 Change its value to 1 After you make this change the colored borders and toolbar menu appear on a screen when it appears and remain there Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 12 Floating Toolbar Buttons The following table describes buttons you might see on the floating toolbar The buttons can vary depending on the status of the content your permissions etc Getting Started Toolbar Name Description More Information Button iE Add Appears if you selected a language and Translating Content the content is not available in that on page 319 language Use this button
63. Active Directory setup screen the only relevant fields are authentication and domain See Also The Active Directory Setup Screen on page 454 Also on the Active Directory Status Screen only one discrepancy message may appear CMS user needs to be associated with an AD user See Also Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users on page 460 The View Users Screen works the same for both modes See Also The View User Information Screen on page 463 Setup Guidelines 1 Make sure that each AD user to be used in Ektron CMS400 NET is defined correctly in the Active Directory Remember that when you enable AD integration logon name and domain are copied from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 474 User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature 2 Try to match up names For example if an Ektron CMS400 NET user s username is jsmith but that user s AD username is john smith rename the user in Ektron CMS400 NET or Active Directory so they match While you can match user names when authentication is enabled doing it beforehand simplifies the process _ _ _ lt lt aes m Published Certificates Member Of Dial in Object Security Environment Sessions Remote control Terminal Services Profile Saleen ines General Address Account Profile Telephones Organization Content Manageme
64. Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 460 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature the Refresh button S to update Ektron CMS400 NET and resolve the discrepancy Finally if this user should not exist in the Ektron CMS400 NET database click the box under the Delete column to delete the user from Ektron CMS400 NET After you make all necessary changes click the Save button m to save them Associating User Group Membership with Active Directory User Group Membership If you click CMS relationships need to be associated with Active Directory relationships on the Active Directory Status screen the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Relationships with Active Directory Relationships screen appears illustrated below Use this screen to coordinate Ektron CMS400 NET user group membership with AD user group membership The screen displays a user s group membership that exists in Ektron CMS400 NET but does not exist in the AD Associate CMS Relationships with Active Directory Relationships Hse Username User Group Name Delete Kristin planets com editors E See Also Associating a User s AD Group Information with Ektron CMS400 NET on page 449 After viewing the discrepancy on the screen you have two choices Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 461 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature e To associate the user with the same user group in the AD go to th
65. Application Mail Messages Check the box to enable email notification for the entire CMS Un checking this box disables email notification regardless of whether individual users have their email enabled Publish as PDF Check the box to allow folder properties to be set for PDF generation When a checked PDF generation is available for individual folders PDF generation for each folder is defined in the folder properties section See Also Editing Folder Properties on page 33 Note This property appears when Ektron DMS400 v1 1 or later is installed For more information see PDF Generation on page 495 Enable CMS to create file system folders for library assets Check the box if you want to create physical folders on your file system machine that match the Ektron CMS400 NET library folder tree See Also Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders on page 24 Built in User Information Edit the username and or password for the built in user By default the username and password combination is builtin builtin See Also BuiltIn User on page 26 Editor Options Toggle between displaying and not displaying font related buttons in the editor Also choose to remove styles and preserve MS Word styles and classes See Also Editor Options on page 26 Work Page Size upgrade to 4 7 or higher The following fields change the e default editor screen size e default Workarea page e de
66. CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 77 Setting Permissions Setting Permissions Permissions determine which actions users and members of user groups can perform on content library items and content folders For example you allow your Webmaster to perform the most advanced actions such as adding folders editing folder properties and deleting folders At the same time you could restrict content contributors to viewing editing and adding new content You can set permissions for a content folder or content item If you assign permission to a content folder it affects all of its subfolders unless you break inheritance for a subfolder Only Ektron CMS400 NET administrators can set permissions You manage permissions through the Permission Table illustrated below It appears when you click the Permission button from the folder s or content s Properties window View Permissions for Folder abc F Allow this object to inherit permissions I The content in this folder is private and is NOT viewable on the public Web site iew Advanced Permissions View MemberShip users admin jedit e Everyone e Administrators User or Group Name Read Only EditAdd Delete Restore x x xX xX Library Add Add Add Overwrite Read Only Images Files Hyperlinks Library x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x This chapter explains how to manage permissions through the following subtopics
67. Content edition Last published date Are translation files created for content Target does not exist Source 12 01 2004 Yes because target file does not exist Only content with published date from No Start Date to No End Date Field Use this field to limit content by a range of published dates For example to include only content whose last published date is no later than December 1 2004 you would enter no Start Date and December 1 2004 as the End Date Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 329 Multi Language Support In this case if content was published on November 28 and again on December 5 the version published on November 28 would be copied to the translation files To select a start date follow these steps Follow the same procedure for end date 1 Click No Start Date 2 The following date selector appears Start Date year 1999 Month Jan Day 1 insert cancel 3 Select the year month and day 4 Click insert Previewing Translation Files After deciding on target languages and selecting content you can view a report of what will appear in the translation files before creating them For each content item in the file you see information such as its ID number and its folder ID number last published date of source edition and last published date of target edition After viewing the report you can go ahead and c
68. Elements are Indexed s 10 153 Satch Dialog SetU DO sscsisiae sects ce eeceetscceetnt 155 Editing the Search Labels i ciccccsnsccccsncisccncssncuccxnencrnunsencstencecensss 157 Using the Data Designet 1e eee 158 DPRET OU CUNO si csi ces Sa cerccas a E 158 Differences in eWebEditPro XML ssseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeees 159 Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode c cccseeeccseseeeeteeeeeeeeees 160 D signimg pcs 31 ae Pree er Oo 161 inserting Field TYPO i accscscccesccsnscccmscnsassnsmcnnsaseneniennceansmteascusnass 162 Deleting a Field from the Screen cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 Sample Screen DOS ccs sicsesicccsensescnccctasescncanansncasvananssencsacaccse 164 Data Designer Field Types ccssseececseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneneneeees 170 Group BOX aid beeerpereereretee crcrersrreereere ttre cre aN 170 Tabular Data scesssctssantenvenssincecdeay thn 174 MOCK ON ocina a Hatace R ees 183 Plain TOX essri 184 POMATON 189 Choices sscezadsavansceesceticccencaiectedcioieiavaaepiteutestieias a 191 SIO CE IS TNs esere ce css lice cant deiteear se aatrwana at cerns sae c chad abate iaaete 195 Calculated Fiela cisscecweisiessce ners a 198 Calendar FielGli i qccessarsccasscgescactece anaa 209 image Only Field ivccsiseassa seniceicsarsseiceten a a 212 Kle LNE Feld Qcccwatamsreniadcic issn atin n ni 214 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 v
69. Export Report Download form data to a Microsoft Exporting Form Reports Excel spreadsheet on page 255 View Reports View submitted form data can select range of dates Viewing Form Reports on page 254 e or Form Properties View Content Properties Access view properties for the content Viewing a Form s Content Properties on page 258 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 233 Working with HTML Forms Button or Name Description More Information Tab View View If you can view forms in more than language one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current form into new Translating Content on select select language block and translate it to selected page 319 language language Creating a New Form To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 319 1 Access the Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 2 Click the folder in which you want the form to reside If you have permission to do so click E to create a new subfolder under any folder 3 From the language drop down select the language in which to create the form WARNING Do not choose a folder to wh
70. Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Ektron CMS400 NET does not let you index a rich area field Ignore this checkbox Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 190 Using the Data Designer Field Description Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Cannot be If you want to require the user completing this field to blank enter a response click inside this check box Choices Use the Choices field when you want to give the data entry user several choices For example you could create a Choices field named Interests that lists these options e music e art e sports The data entry user could check the first two and leave the third blank Choices Field vs Select List Field The following capabilities are available with a Choices field but not a Select List field e You can limit the user s choice to one item or many e All items appear on the screen arranged horizontally or vertically The following capabilities are available with a Select List field but not a Choices field e The user can only select one item Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 191 Using the Data Designer e Only the default item appears on the screen To the right of the field a black down arrow app
71. Information csssseeeesseeceeeeeenssseeneeeeeseeees 256 Viewingia Form s Prope ntleSs ccscecesssecethietassteocascistaiscocesssezneacesannages 256 Viewing a Form s Content Properties c ccceeeeeeeesseeeeeteeeeeenes 258 Editingia FOUN 3c cee oe sacs cat eee caer 258 GIS U RONG a ODM saccade cterlarsecesctcescencedereosectedianciecmaistiohnmne 259 FONE MANAGE sisipin 261 Add FOG acca waste secc secede acess cntintecccecind eetnceadecnccntaecnineene 261 Viewing FOM ee ee pre ewer ere 262 EAI FONDIS Saara a a aE 263 Delete FONiSirinn a a aa aa aaae io siaii s ii 263 Managing Tasks iissa 265 Th Tasks Fold e hisviciss ccc sesccescscccsceccccescccescccsenctecscastessitectressiccess 266 Task POlMISSIONS occs ecesccsescesectesecccsesceseseessenzieaas iiaeiai 266 Task Categories and TYPesS sssccccsesseeeeeseseeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeees 267 View Gategorization Sree sssi jesienna 268 LECI E E E E 277 User Assigned versus System Assigned States cccceceeeees 278 Progression Of Task States cesce aunga 278 Task View OPHOM S asa ccs testececteeectetitsenietreceeencerennante 280 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 vi Determining Which Tasks a User Can VieW cccccesseteeeeeeeees 283 Email MOUMGATION siicsssssanesacsnsicsaadasessnsatiaansenensensnteadananaparaneennasa 284 Archivingia TAG sscissciccs seccsccsts cccccterrccxeceecrccebestieaccumeceeciecemennscees 285 Deleting
72. Mail Tags The form and mail tags display information about the form that was generated from the form information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 247 Working with HTML Forms This illustration compares the information defined for the form with the information in the XML email View Form Contact Ektron Support 9 2 cemssamp DX OR LY E7 ee tent ary Title Contact Ektron Support ules Description Contact Ektron Support Form allections ID 1 E Form information arms Mail Properties in Workarea arts To support ektron com 2 From Ektron CMS300 User Groups cc y Subject CMS300 Sample Site inquiry figuration Preamble This form was submitted from the Ektron CMS300 Sample Web site To support ektron com Subject CMS5300 Sample Site inquiry Form information lt FormTitle gt Contact Ektron Support lt FormTitle gt in XML Email lt FormDescription gt Contact Ektron Support Form lt FormDescription gt lt date gt 7 23 2003 3 11 24 PM lt date gt lt MailTo gt support ektron com lt MailTo gt lt MailFrom gt Ektron CMS300 User lt MailFrom gt lt MailCc gt lt MailSubject gt CMS300 Sample Site inquiry lt MailSubject gt lt MailPreamble gt This form was submitted from the Ektron CMS300 Sample Web site lt MailPreamble gt The following table explains each XML tag in the form and mail sections of the email
73. NET you should have received an email with a license key for WeblmageFX as well To enable WebImageFX within Ektron CMS400 NET from the application setup page insert the WeblmageFX license key in the Module License field m EE E Module Licenses I Insert Ektron Web Image FX License Key Here Default Application Language English US v Maximum Content Size 1 1 000 000 characters Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders If this option is enabled each time a new content library folder is created in Ektron CMS400 NET a corresponding physical folder is Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 24 Modifying the Application Setup Screen created on the file system This helps organize library assets on your file server The following illustration compares the library folder tree with the file system s folder structure Ektron CMS Folder Tree File Server Folder Tree B cms300scripts B cms300ws O cmswsdemo O cmsxmlwsdemo O databases Ao Human Resource f B eC AS Marketing Human Resources i ay News 5 O Marketing AS Products Me ba EX RC Cars koo S RC Planes E RC Planes EY Syndication Syndication O uploadedimages Human Resources HOGI Dannrte B Marketing O News L Products O RC Cars O RC Planes O Syndication
74. NET does not write to the AD it only reads from it This results in the following changes to how the username domain and password are handled within Ektron CMS400 NET e Changes to user logon name domain and password must be made in the AD you cannot update these fields in the Ektron CMS400 NET Edit User screens e When adding a new user to Ektron CMS400 NET you can only select AD users If the user does not exist in the AD create the user there and then import the user into Ektron CMS400 NET Which Information is Transferred from Active Directory to CMS400 NET CMS refers to the following AD sign in authentication information during sign in password user logon name and domain Note that the password is not stored in CMS CMS only refers to the password during sign in Logging In See Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration on page 443 Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 444 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 472 User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature Changing the User Login Name in AD If a user s logon name changes in the AD it no longer matches the Ektron CMS400 NET logon name This discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens You should proceed to the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Users to Active Directory Users screen w
75. Screen on page 100 Click the Web Path of the load balance path you want to edit The Edit Library Load Balancing Path is displayed 4 Make the necessary changes to the load balance path Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 102 5 Managing Library Items Click the Update button E Deleting a Library Load Balance Path Library load balance paths that are no longer needed may easily be deleted To delete a library load balance path follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Load Balance Settings screen as described in Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen on page 100 Click the Remove button The Remove Library Load Balance Path is displayed Check off the box es of the load balance paths you want to delete Click the Remove button to delete the load balance path A confirmation message is displayed Click OK If You Have an Ektron WeblmageFX License Key If you purchased and inserted an Ektron WeblmageFX license key into Ektron CMS400 NET the images folder is enhanced automatically Since Ektron WeblmageFX has a built in thumbnail creator for images each uploaded image in the library also has a thumbnail created for it allowing you to locate uploaded images faster and easier Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 103 Managing Library Items Here is an example of the images folder for an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site wi
76. Section Description Long Description This field can allow the user to enter additional information about a calendar event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt No Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event E Long Description Your choices are e No Long Description no additional description is allowed e Text Only while adding an event a user can enter text into a Long Description box No formatting is allowed within this text This text appears in the Event View screen and in the XML Packet Because the text is not formatted the XSL creator is responsible for its display e Rich Text Description works the same as the Text Only option see above except the user can format text using Ektron s eWebEditPro editor Content Folder Specify the calendar s content folder To understand how folder assignment affects calendar use see Calendar Permissions on page 294 4 After you enter calendar information click the Save button E Display Weekends To display seven day weeks for example Sunday to Saturday as opposed to five day weeks Monday to Friday check this box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 298 Calendars Editing Calendars All calendar information with the exception of the ID can be edited at any time To edit a calendar follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Man
77. Using External XML Files 133 XML File VermeatiOn serenireannennien ae 135 Assigning XML Configurations ssssssssesennnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 136 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 iv Inheriting an XML Comfiguration sseni anios a 136 Assigning a Different XML Configuration 137 Assigning an XML Configuration to Content 137 Viewing XML Configurations asssssunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 138 PROPOGUCS TAO sern oaia 140 Edntor MORN ANON enaa 141 Validation IMPOrnMAtON ciciessscicedeeesssasceeeeessiasceieessiandedeersiantedeerssannce 141 PVN Onsa a SE 142 Display inioimation Tabaro 142 Editing XML Configurations scisiccccseccsnscusntncdnscescantecseceesscentscese 143 Editing Data Design Package 143 Editing an XML Configuration Created with External Files 145 Creating XML Configurations Based on Existing Configura a E E 146 Viewing Data Designer XSLTS s ssnsnsunnnnnennunrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnman 147 Deleting XML Configurations sssssunnnnennunernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 148 XML COMING aeanai 150 User vs Developer Selected Search Criteria ccccceeeenees 150 TYPES OF SSANC My Cmte ies eisiaa 151 Displaying Search ReSulS renei pcecotecesteiesiscedsteiecaie 151 Setting up a User defined Search 0 cccececseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeenees 153 Setting up a Developer defined Search ccccccssceeeetteeeeeees 153 Specifying Which XML
78. V validation HTML form 251 view content difference toolbar button 16 view history toolbar button 17 window 56 W Web parts see SharePoint integration Web parts web services 387 WeblImageFX inserting license 24 using with library 103 weekends display on calendar 298 width screen adjusting 22 Word classes preserve 27 styles preserve 27 work page size setting 22 workarea accessing 6 closing 7 navigation 8 site map 7 X XLIFF creating file 326 description 325 XML configurations accessing 130 adding via data designer 131 via external XML file 133 applying to content folder 35 assigning 136 breaking inheritance 137 creating based on existing configuration 146 deleting 148 editing 143 file verification 135 inheriting 136 toolbar 129 viewing 138 viewing XSLTs 147 XML content block adding 42 XML indexing introduction 150 search developer defined setting up 153 dialog setup 155 displaying results 151 labels editing 157 user defined setting up 153 search criteria types 151 user vs developer 150 specifying elements to index 153 validation 153 154 XML managing 128 Xpath expression entering for calculated field 200 XSLTs viewing 147 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 iv
79. Web Part The calendar Web Part displays an event calendar created within the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Here is an example of a calendar Web Part displayed in the SharePoint Portal Server Calendar ET NT aT Te TESTO TST TE January 2004 PSS ee ee Tunes 1E In addition to displaying the event calendar if you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Portal Server you can add and manage calendar events assuming you have permissions to do so NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for information about adding a login Web Part and logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 367 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Calendar Web Part Settings The calendar Web Part can be configured to display any event calendar from your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site To configure the calendar Web Part follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the calendar Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 Minimize the Appearance Settings and expand the CMS400 NET Calendar settings The Calendar Web Part Settings page is displayed Change the value in the CalendarID field to the ID number of the event calendar you want to be displayed Click Apply for the changes to take effect without closing the menu The screen is refreshed with the updated calendar displayed Ma
80. Web site s pages By default Ektron CMS400 NET Web pages have the following format Content Block Language Web Site Address Template iIp Identifier ttp www yoursite com news asp 7id 9 amp LangType 1036 See Also Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400 NET Documents on page 45 Sometimes you want to change a page s name The Aliasing feature offers two ways to do this e Ektron CMS400 NET can automatically change each page s name to a format that search engines more easily recognize This is called Automatic Aliasing e You can manually change the name of any page to whatever you wish For example you can change the name of your technical support page to http www YourEktronwebsite com help htm from http www YourEktronwebsite com help aspx id 27 This is called Manual Aliasing NOTE When using Manual Aliasing you cannot alias the root of your Web site for example www yourEktronWebsite com You can however alias everything after that This chapter explains how to alias pages on your Web site through the following topics e Automatic vs Manual URL Aliasing on page 415 e Automatic URL Aliasing on page 415 e Manual Aliasing on page 418 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 414 URL Aliasing Automatic vs Manual URL Aliasing Automatic URL Aliasing allows you to create a URL that does not have a URL parameter This URL aliases the URL that contains parameters
81. administrator can customize the examples Instructions are provided in The lt cmddsgcalc gt Command in the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide See Also Explanation of Examples on page 203 Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field Your choices are e No validation the user s response is not checked e Non negative number required the result of the calculation must be a positive number e Custom You can create custom validation For more information see Custom Validation on page 220 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criteria the field remains surrounded by red dashes Your system administrator determines if a user can save a screen with invalid data Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 200 Using the Data Designer Field Description Caption Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Calculated field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor
82. also edit the name of a font and delete a font from the system Minimizing the number of available fonts makes the Web site look more uniform Below is the Font Manager screen a x View Available System Fonts Settings 4 Users Fontname Font Face Sample 70 Peete ciple Arial This is a sample ofthe selected font face style IO Help Courier This is a sample of the selected fi 9 Configuration style G E Active Directory test This is a sample of the selected font face st Times New Roman This is a sample of the selected font face style Setup Verdana This is a sample of the selected font face st Metadata Definition XML Configurations Adding Fonts To add a font to the application follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Fonts 2 Click the Add Font button Ay Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 261 Font Manager 3 The add font screen is displayed Add Font Font Name or Family 4 Enter the font name or family into the text field provided 5 Click the Save button The new font is available to use when adding or editing content End Date E iem Heading 4 gt ARCM Kristen ITC Verdana elcome to RC International al is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play e short years RC International has become one of the leading m eed Meee eee bee Fee de eee
83. any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 4 Click OK to delete the content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 54 Managing Content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Content Folder screen you can delete several content items at one time To do so follow these steps 1 Access the content folder that contains the content you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Content button GA 3 The Delete Contents of Folder screen is displayed Check the boxes next to the content that you want to delete NOTE Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all 5 Click the Delete Content button GA 6 A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Check Links button locates all content that includes a Quicklink to the displayed content This feature is useful when deleting content because it informs you of every content item that will include a dead link after you delete the selected content You should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want check as described in Viewing Content on page 46 2 Click the Check Links button a 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content C
84. apply bold and the custom color shown above Now the screen looks like this ABBAAS ooa AeA al AR PZ HE SE e Apply Style gt Normal gt TimesNewRoman 3 12pt gt A Oe nbsp M j Mr PHERg 4 The next field street should let the user enter text So drag the plain text field icon ab into the space below Address Then complete the dialog as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 166 Using the Data Designer Plain Text Field Fee Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 167 Using the Data Designer Note that the Street field is not wide enough To widen it click the field move the cursor until you see a two sided arrow and drag the arrow to the right P oe es Stree o t o o 07777 5 The next field City should also let the user enter text Assume that you want City to appear in the line below Street To make room for City move the cursor to the end of the Street field and press lt Enter gt to create a new line Next drag the plain text field icon ab into the line below Street Then complete the dialog as shown below Plain Text Field Now the screen looks like this Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 168 Using the Data Designer SBeeeaa Sooo es Aeee a eR PZ SE ee El Apply Style Normal
85. aspx Syndicated content 91 3 8 2005 11 52 46 AM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid50 aspx Syndicated content demo 90 6 29 2005 3 44 04 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid49 aspx The aliasing feature does not review Quicklinks embedded in your content these maintain their original format When a user or site Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 417 URL Aliasing visitor is navigating through Ektron CMS400 NET either format works Manual Aliasing When using manual aliasing you choose content then assign a different URL to it From then on the content can be identified either by its original URL assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET or its alias When assigning an alias choose the name you want users to see as your URL In the example below the page name changed from CMS400Example index aspx tO cMS400Example Launch htm Launch htm is the alias Before Manual URL Aliasing Library Folder Content quicklinks amp English U S v ID Date Modified URL Link 7 27 Dec 2004 11 11 56 AM Login Information 8 05 Sep 2002 05 46 07 PM CMS4005ample index aspx id 2 2 Seasons Greetings 30 04 Dec 2003 10 30 18 AM CMS400Sample index aspx id 24 24 A a 44 aar Ae AAAA Arar aw men IMAAM aman ile Me 2 eet oa After Manual URL Aliasing Library Folder Content quicklinks E English U S v Title ID Date Modified U
86. be be ee eek ee Be 2 hh eee Viewing Fonts When viewing fonts you can also edit or delete them To view a font 1 Access the font manager in your Workarea as described in Adding Fonts on page 261 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 262 Font Manager 2 Click the font you want to view Fontname Font Face Sa Arial This is asamp Courier This is a Kristen ITC This is a Samp aa tow Roman This is a sample Verdana This is a sam 3 The view font screen is displayed Edit Fonts When you edit a font the font or family name is changed Editing does not change any fonts in existing content To edit a font name follow these steps 1 Access the view font screen as described in Viewing Fonts on page 262 Click the Edit button 3 The Edit Font screen is displayed Edit Font Arial Font Name or Family Arial 4 Edit the font name or family in the text field specified 5 When finished click the Update button i Delete Fonts By deleting a font from the system you are taking away the content contributors use of that font in their content To delete a font follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 263 Font Manager 1 Access the view font screen as described in Viewing Fonts on page 262 Click the Delete button 7 A message is displayed Microsoft Internet Explorer i xi YD Are you su
87. between two values X lt and lt Y Must equal another number gt Must not equal another number th string lenathi 5 Click Maximum text length This option lets you specify the length of the user s response 6 string length lt x appears in the Condition field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 223 Using the Data Designer 7 Since you want the user s input to equal 10 remove the less than sign lt from the calculation Now it looks like this string length X 8 Replace the X with 10 Now it looks like this string length 10 9 Move the cursor to the Error Message field and compose a relevant error message For example must be 10 digits 10 Your screen should look like this Custom alidation x Data Type Data Type Whole number hg Validation Condition string length 10 Select Field Examples o Error Message must be 10 digits OK 11 Press OK and return to the Plain Text field dialog 12 Press OK to save that dialog and test the validation on the phone number field To do this switch to Data Entry mode and enter more or fewer than 10 digits as well as non digit characters to verify that validation works as expected Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 224 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allow
88. blank Email format as emaill yourcompany Xxx Product Select Product gt must select product from list Purchase Date format as MM DD YYYY Purchase Price format as DDD CC Visa Mastercard format as 4111111111111111 Notes Ei 3 Save and close the template file 4 To test your form navigate to your Web site then to that page 5 Complete the form 6 Click the Submit Form button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 243 Working with HTML Forms 7 The screen is refreshed and displays the post back message that you created Sending Data as XML While creating a form that generates email you can specify that the email be sent as XML data or plain text See Creating a New Form on page 234 for information about setting this option Because XML data is structured you can easily parse the content to store and retrieve important information Also if you download the form data to an Excel spreadsheet the XML tags become the spreadsheet s column headers See Also Exporting Form Reports on page 255 This section contrasts XML and plain text email using the form displayed below as the example Here is an example of a form before it is submitted Contact Ektron Support Name JohnDoe D john doe yourcompany com Noone 655 555 1234 This feature is great Problem Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 244 Working with HTML Forms The f
89. content Scenario Web Page Display Site visitor accesses content in a private folder RG internavional Home Products Support News Careers Search Copyright 2003 Ektron Inc Sample Site Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 115 Private Content amp Memberships Scenario Web Page Display Logged in user with read only permissions accesses content in a private folder Logged in user with more than read only permissions accesses a content ina private folder RG international Home Products Support News Careers Search Customer Support RC International is committed to providing our customers with a plea experience Our support department is available to help you in all are We invite you to review all of our extensive online documentation M inquiries can be answered using this information All repairs and returns must have a Return Authorization Number RM International To obtain an RMA number or if you require information contact our support department at support cms300samplesite com response within 24hrs or phone 1 800 555 5555 9am to Spm EST Copyright 2003 Ektron Inc Sample Site RG internanonal News Careers Search Home Products Support Customer Support RC International is committed to providing our customers with a pli
90. domain Directory authentication page 472 e password active e user logon name On the Active Directory Setup Active Directory directory l screen check Enable Active Integration on integration e domain Directory authentication and page 440 e password Enable Active Directory integration e user s first and You may also want to check last name Enable automatic addition of Ss emalad ress user from AD and Enable automatic addition of user to e user groups groups e user s group memberships WARNING To successfully operate Ektron CMS400 NET with Active Directory the anonymous access user must be running as a domain user account It cannot be run under a local user account That domain account can be permission limited if security is a concern If anonymous access user is not running as a domain user account you receive an Automation Error when viewing the Active Directory Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 438 WARNING Active Directory Feature Setup page After Active Directory is installed correctly you can view the AD Setup page and click edit but when you try to save the settings you receive a User Properties Verification error At that point you must either set up IIS to run as a domain user or the user properties are invalid The domain user must have query permission into Active Directory so he can retrieve that information After you change the user account under which IIS is runnin
91. dragging it See Resizing a Plain Text Field on page 189 e The text can be read only or hidden The following capability is available with a rich area field but not a plain text field e In Data Entry mode the user can change the text s format size style etc along with adding hyperlinks using eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities e You can enter custom tags Dialog Box Name Fieid1 F Indeved Display name Field 1 Default value Use Allow May not be removed Only one May be removed More than one Options Validation J Invisible Validation I Allow multiple lines No validation z Cannot be changed Custom Validation Caption Text Data Style Cancel Fields on the Plain Text Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 185 Using the Data Designer Field Description Name Enter the name of this field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may not appear depending on how your administrator set up your system Display Enter the text that appe
92. first field X Multiply two numbers X Y Multiply the value in the first field X by the value in the second field Y Divide two numbers format number X div Y OHHH Divide the value in the first field X by the value in the second field Y Format as a percentage Absolute value of a number format number X div Y 0 X number X amp gt 0 2 1 Determine what percentage one number X is of another Y For example if X 10 and Y 100 the result of the calculation is 10 The number regardless of the sign negative or positive Minimum of two numbers X number X amp lt Y Y number X amp gt Y The smaller of two field values Maximum of two numbers X number X amp gt Y Y number X amp lt Y The larger of two field values Zero if subtraction is negative X Y number X Y amp gt 0 Subtract one number Y from another X If the difference is less than zero insert zero Multiply by another number if checkbox is checked X Y number Z2 true number 2 true X is a numeric field Y is another numeric field to multiply by X if a checkbox is checked Z is the checkbox For example X 2 and Y 3 e if the checkbox is checked the result is 2 3 which is 6 e If the checkbox is not checked the result is 2 Round a decimal number
93. folder leave blank to inherit fems300sample The inherited style sheet for this folder is cms300sample default cs Template filename for this folder leave blank to inherit foms300sample fhr asp Select an existing template here a ML Configuration Job Postings RC Cars RC Planes Adding XML Content To add XML content follow these steps 1 In your Workarea browse to an XML content folder where you want to create the new XML content For more information see Assigning an XML Configuration on page 42 NOTE When selecting the folder to create the content in keep in mind the permissions that are going to be set on it and which users will have permissions for it 2 Follow the steps described in Adding HTML Content on page 39 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 44 Managing Content NOTE Depending on the XML configuration assigned to the content the default XML may appear differently If content has an XML configuration it is used to format the screen display When XML content is published and a site visitor completes the XML screen the user s input is saved as XML For more information see Managing XML on page 128 Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400 NET Documents Whenever content is created Ektron CMS400 NET generates a Quicklink which is a unique identifier of that content See Also Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual gt Library Folder
94. folder can inherit metadata fields from its parent folder or have a unique set of them The information includes not only which kinds of metadata are assigned but also which ones are required For example you could assign the top folder Content all metadata definitions while you assign the Contacts folder directly below it none On every folder s properties screen use the Break Inheritance check box illustrated below to determine if metadata definitions are the same as the parent folder or unique Metadata Custom Fields available for folder Contacts Assigned Required Name Vv ai title Vv ai keywords Vv fs description IV si page Vv si robots By default Break Inheritance is not checked which means that all folders inherit metadata definitions from the root folder Content When you click the Break Inheritance check box all inherited values appear by default that is Assigned and Required boxes are either checked or unchecked You can then change which boxes are checked unchecked as desired Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 76 Metadata Adding Metadata to Content When a user creates or updates content he can define its metadata within the assignments specified for the folder Default metadata are applied without user intervention Instructions for adding metadata are found in the Adding or Editing Metadata section of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Ektron
95. group has permission to view all subfolders Setting Permissions for a Content Folder You can set permissions for any content folder and language from the Folder Properties screen Here is the Permissions button on the Folder Properties screen Accessing the Permissions Table To access the Permissions Table follow these steps 1 Select a folder from the left frame of the Workarea 2 Select the language whose folder properties you want to update 3 Click the Folder Properties button EE The Folder Properties screen appears 5 Click the Permissions button E Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 81 admin jedit Cc Administrators 4 Everyone View Permissions for Folder abc Allow this object to inherit permissions I The content in this folder is private and is NOT viewable on the public Web site iew Advanced Permissions Setting Permissions 6 The Permissions Table appears User or Group Name Read Only EditAdd Delete Restore x x x x x x x x x x x view MemberShip users Library Add Add Add Overwrite Read Only Images FilesHyperlinks Library x x x x x x x x x Actions You Can Perform from the Permissions Table The following table summarizes actions you can perform from the Permission Table screen Action How to perform it For more information see View advanced permissions Click View Advanced Permissi
96. gt Assembly CMS400Calendar Namespace CMS400Calendar TypeName Safe True gt Assembly CMS400Content Namespace CMS400Content TypeName Safe True gt Assembly CMS400Form Namespace CMS400Form TypeName Safe True gt Assembly CMS400ListSummary Namespace CMS400ListSummary TypeName Safe True gt lt SafeControl lt SafeControl lt SafeControl Safe True gt lt SafeControl Assembly CMS400Profile Namespace CMS400Profile TypeName Safe True gt Assembly CMS400Search Namespace CMS400Search TypeName Safe True gt Assembly CMS400Collection Namespace CMS400Collection TypeName Assembly CMS400Login Namespace CMS400Login TypeName Safe True gt The Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts are successfully registered and your Web config is updated with the Web Parts registered as safe controls Specifying Your Ektron CMS400 NET Site Path Manually The Web config file must contain a reference to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site During installation if an incorrect path or no path was given you need to update your Web config file with the correct Ektron CMS400 NET s site path To do this follow these steps 1 Open your SharePoint Portal Server s Web config for editing with a text editing program such as NotePad 2 Enter the following information within the lt configuration gt tags lt appSettings gt lt add key CMS400sitelocation value CMS400Sit
97. in a browser and view your Virtual Server Gallery Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 352 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration A list of Web Parts that were added to the Virtual Server Gallery including the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts appear at the bottom of the page Web Part List CMS300 Approvals CMS300 Calendar CMS300 Collection CMS300 Content CMS300 Form CMS300 ListSummary CMS300 Login CMS300 Profile EE R E ETR ETET CMS300 Search If the installation was not successful see Installation Troubleshooting on page 353 What s Next Having configured the SharePoint Portal Server you are ready to add Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts into your portal pages See Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Overview on page 357 for information about working with Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts Installation Troubleshooting During installation you may receive messages that information you entered is not correct If you continue the installation with incorrect data it might be necessary to register the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts or update your Web config file manually The following section explains solutions to problems that can occur if incorrect information was submitted during installation Incorrect SharePoint Portal Location Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 353 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration If an incorrect Share
98. indicate that the user can add instances of a field see the Allow field below So if a field is required the icon could appear but omit a Remove option The Allow Field Check more than one if you want to let the user entering data add instances of this field Otherwise check only one Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 217 Using the Data Designer For example if a screen is collecting names and addresses and you want to let the user enter several of them check more than one If you check more than one when this field appears in Data Entry mode appears to the left of the field as shown below g J Insert Above 3F Insert Below Duplicate Have U j gt Move Wown Pemove If the user entering data clicks x a menu appears Shown above which lets the user add instances of the field to the screen NoTE The menu icon H can also indicate that the user can remove a field see the Use field above So even if a field allows only one instance the icon could appear but the menu would only display Remove The Data Style Field Click the Data Style button to apply formatting to the field that accepts user input When you do the following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 218 Using the Data Designer Data alue Style a x Font Name Unassigned Font Size Unassigned 1 Bold Unassigned b Italic
99. is displayed For more information see Content Properties on page 57 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described in Viewing a Form s Content Properties on page 258 2 Click the Edit Form button 3 The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 234 4 Make the necessary changes to the form 5 Click the Save button J See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 225 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including e Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 258 Working with HTML Forms Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 aro N Access the View Form screen for the content as described in Editing a Form s Content on page 258 Click the Edit Content button The Edit Content screen appears Make the necessary changes to the form s content
100. logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server Collection Web Part Settings After a collection Web Part is added to the portal you may configure it to display any collection on your Web site as well as specify the display function you want to apply to it To configure the collection Web Part follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the collection Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 2 Minimize the Appearance Settings and expand the CMS400 NET Content settings 3 The Collection Web Part Settings information is displayed Make the necessary changes to the available fields using the following table as a reference Field Description CollectionID The ID of the collection you want to display in the portal Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 369 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Field Description Collection The name of the display function you want to apply to Display the collection Function Contact your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site developer for a list of available display functions Click the Apply button for the changes to take effect The screen is refreshed with the updated collection displayed Make additional changes to the collection Web Part or click the OK button to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Managing Ekt
101. m to save them Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 462 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature The View Users Screen The View Users screen illustrated below lists all users in the Ektron CMS400 NET database To access the screen click Users from the left panel of the Workarea To view more information for a user click that user to move to the View User Information screen Username Lastname Firstname Language admin planets com admin admin 4pp Default asoneil saturn planets com O Neil Ambrose App Default bbolt saturn planets com Bolt II Bob App Default doneil planets com Oneil Daniel App Default The View Users screen also provides a toolbar button amp that lets you add AD users to the Ektron CMS400 NET database When you Click it the Search Active Directory for Users Screen appears The View User Information Screen View User Information aoneil saturn planets com YOSbSe Username aoneil Domain saturn planets com First Name Ambrose Last Name O Neil User Language App Default E Mail Address None Specified E Mail Notifications E Mail Disabled Emails for this application are currently disabled This User currently belongs to these User Groups e Everyone Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 463 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature The View User Information Screen displays the user s userna
102. must be configured for your server See Configuring SMTP Server on page 432 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 435 email Features Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available an email icon appears circled in the illustration below View All Open Tasks In The System Show Task Type ALL Title CID State Priority Due Date AssignedTo Assigned By do this right away 12 Not Started Normal 28 Jun 2005 admin a admin a Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Field Source of Default Information Editable To User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message If desired you appears If you then insert a valid email address the Ais can add email is sent recipients by If you specify a group to receive the message as long typing them as one group member has a valid email address all into this field group members with valid addresses receive the email Ektron CMS400 NET Ad
103. mycalendars_ektid2 aspx Enabling Automatic URL Aliasing If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Settings gt Configuration follow these steps to enable it NOTE Before editing your web config file you should close all open browsers In some instances you may need to do an IIS reset 1 Open the web config file located in your Web site s root folder 2 Change the value of ek_RedirectorInstallea to True Activating Deactivating the Aliasing Feature To activate the automatic aliasing feature follow this path to the URL Aliasing Configuration screen Settings gt Configuration gt URL Aliasing NOTE If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Configuration see Enabling Automatic URL Aliasing on page 416 The screen indicates if automatic aliasing is currently on or off To change its state click the Edit button CY check or uncheck the box and click the Save button fq CMS400 URL Aliasing Configuration Automatic URL Aliasing Off Manual URL Aliasing Off If Automatic Aliasing is turned on and you uncheck it your page URLs return to their original format see Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned Off on page 417 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 416 URL Aliasing Effect of Activating Automatic URL Aliasing When you enable automatic URL aliasing the feature updates every Quicklink in your Ektron CMS400 NET library to the new fo
104. of numbers or beginning and ending num bers on the Search screen e plain text with no validation criteria the display is determined by the Dropdown and Multiple checkboxes below If Dropdown and Multiple are not checked the search screen contains these values No Selection Exact phrase Contains Dropdown If the field type is Choices or List and you check this box the user performing the search can choose from the choice or list values when selecting search criteria If the field type is a plain text and you check this box the user performing the search can choose among any value stored in this field of the Data Design when selecting search criteria Multiple Check this field if you want to allow the user performing the search to select more than one value Only active with plain text List and Choices fields Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 156 XML IndexingManaging XML Editing the Search Labels This screen lets you change the labels that describes the search fields on the search screen You can create a set of labels for every supported language by using the language dropdown list in the upper right corner of the screen See Also Working with Multi Language Content on page 312 To change the search screen labels follow these steps 1 In the Workarea go to Settings gt Configuration gt XML Configurations 2 Click an XML configuration
105. only appears on this dialog when you create the Calendar field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Image Only Field 48 Use an ImageOnly field to place an icon on the screen which the user in Data Entry mode can click to insert an image into the Web content You can insert a default image if desired To let the user insert any file such as a Microsoft Word document use a File Link field See Also File Link Field on page 214 Using a Image Only Field in Data Entry Mode In Data Entry mode the image s caption appears followed by a default image if you specify one and this icon NOTE The user can only insert a file whose extension is defined within the lt validext gt element of the configdataentry xml file Your system administrator can help you do this Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 212 Using the Data Designer Image Only Field E xj Name Field1 7 Indexed Display name Field 1 Use Allow May not be removed Only one C May be removed C More than one Default Image Location A I Cannot be blank From File Caption JImage Fields on the Image Only Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spa
106. other folder defined in the library Ektron CMS400 NET provides to any administrator an interface for adding load balance folders to the application These folders needs to be either a virtual or physical folder under the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site In most cases this is a virtual folder that points to a mounted hard drive another server NOTE Refer to Load Balancing on page 395 for advanced information about this feature Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen To access the load balancing section in the library follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 100 Managing Library Items 1 Click the Library folder button 2 Click the View Properties button g Click the View Load Balance Settings button xj 4 The View Library Load Balance Settings screen is displayed The screen s columns are described in the following table Column Title Description Web Path The path of the folder under your server s Web site Type e Images load balance folder for uploaded images e Files load balance folder for uploaded files Relative An x indicates if the folder is relative to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Verified If the load balance folder exists in the proper location a green check is used to verify that the folder exists A red x is displayed when the folder does not exist in the specified location Physical Path The physical location of the folder to w
107. page 82 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 85 Setting Approval Chains Setting Approval Chains What is an Approval Chain An approval chain is a series of users or user groups who must approve content before it can be published on your Web site When the last person in the chain approves content it goes live Also if a user deletes content before it can be removed from Ektron CMS400 NET everyone in the approval chain must approve the deletion An approval chain can include any number of users or user groups However to be eligible a user or user group must have permissions to the content folder or content item See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 NOTE If you assign a user group to an approval chain only one member of the group needs to approve the content not all members Also if a user appears in an approval chain twice both as a user and part of a user group the approval chain skips the second approval because the user has already approved the content You can set up an approval chain for a content folder or a content item as well as a language See Also Multi Language Approval Chains on page 336 Finally the Approval Method determines if content must be approved by all users in the chain or only users higher up the chain than the one making the edits This chapter explains how to manage approval chains through the following subtopics e Examples of Approval C
108. quicklinks applying to content block 40 broken finding 55 remove styles option 27 RSS 388 S save when closing browser 126 screen height adjusting 23 screen width adjusting 22 search making content searchable 41 search data adding to content 74 searchable properties adding to content 77 definitions deleting 73 editing 72 searchable property fields 66 searchable property definitions adding 65 editing 72 HTML tag additional fields 66 meta tag additional fields 66 searchable additional fields 67 making publicly viewable 68 response field style 68 searching content see content searching setup screen modifying 20 SharePoint integration configuring server 349 installation troubleshooting 353 introduction 348 overview 357 prerequisites 348 server permissions 360 web page layout 357 Web parts approvals 366 calendar 367 collection 368 content 371 form content block 373 installing 361 login 380 381 managing 365 modifying 364 search 383 summary list 376 zones 359 Smart desktop set as start location in Workarea 23 spell checking foreign language 347 standard permissions 80 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 iii status content block 14 style sheet applying to content folder 34 determining appearance of page on Web site 34 subfolders adding 36 summary content inserting 41 maximum size setting 21 syndication example 389 Javascript 389 RSS 388 system email addres
109. select individual content items from several folders repeat the entire process for each folder The Only if target language is older or does not exist Field Check this field if you want to select content by the following criteria e Only select a source content item if its last published date precedes the last published date of the content in the source language The table below illustrates this point or e An edition of the content does not exist in the target language You are creating the first edition If you do not check this field this content is copied to the translation file regardless of current editions Example 1 Only if target language is older or does not exist is checked Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 328 Multi Language Support Content edition Last published date Are translation files created for content Target 12 01 2004 Source 12 01 2004 No because target file s last published date source file s last published date Example 2 Only if target language is older or does not exist is checked Content edition Last published date Are translation files created for content Target 10 18 2004 Source 12 01 2004 Yes because target file s last published date precedes source file s last published date Example 3 Only if target language is older or does not exist is checked
110. site uses one of the methods listed above to select a language Ektron CMS400 NET uses the following criteria to determine which language edition to display for content 1 If an edition of the content is available in the selected language display that 2 If option 1 is not available display an edition of the content in the default language defined in the ek_DefaultContentLanguage variable in web config NOTE When Ektron CMS400 NET is installed the default language is English See Also The Default Language on page 318 3 If neither edition is available display nothing Determining Which Languages are Available To determine which languages are available for creating content go to the Workarea and click Settings gt Configuration gt Language Settings The Language Settings screen lists all languages in which content can be created on your site To change the list follow these steps 1 Click the Edit button CY The Edit Language Setting screen appears Check the boxes next to languages you want to make available to your content contributors Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 316 Multi Language Support Language settings Language Name iB cred Enablec German Standard 1031 v English US 1033 IV Spanish Traditional Sort 1034 A Finnish 1035 Vv French Standard 1036 A Italian Standard 1040 Vv Dutch Netherlands 1043 Vv Portuguese Brazil 1046 a Albanian 1052 E
111. target language they are created at this point Creating the XLIFF or XHTML File To create an XLIFF or XHTML file follow these steps 1 From the Workarea click Modules gt Import Export Lang 2 Click Export Ektron CMS content to XLIFF and XHTML files 3 The Select Target Languages screen appears Selecting a Target Language The screen lists all languages enabled in your Language Settings screen See Also Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 Language Translation Import Export English US Select the target languages German Standard 1031 French Standard 1036 Portuguese Brazil 1046 German Switzerland 2055 Hoaada Italian Switzerland 2064 1 Check each language into which you want to translate content If you need to change the source language click the drop down box in the upper right corner 2 Click the Next button Qj 3 The Select Content To Translate screen appears Selecting Content To Translate Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 326 Multi Language Support Select Content To Translate Please select content by navigating the folders below Path S Human Resources E produis Products support Syndication I Select All Recursive B I Contact Ektron B I Greeting B I Home Page Content B I Introducing the RC Redstar B I Private Content B C Support Page The Select Content To Translat
112. than No validation the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 188 Using the Data Designer Field Description Caption Enter text to describe this field on the data entry screen It appears to the left of the field After you insert this field you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Plain Text field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Resizing a Plain Text Field If you insert a plain text field and its width is too small or too large you can easily resize it To do so follow these steps 1 Rich Area Eh Place the cursor over the field and click The cursor changes to a four headed arrow and small boxes surround the field Move the cursor to the far right of the field See illustration below The cursor turns into a two headed arrow Address Oo Streef o t gt o o m Drag the arrow to ad
113. that Ektron CMS400 NET uses to manage your content Each content item is assigned a unique ID Ektron CMS400 NET uses the ID to retrieve content from the database Database Document If during the evolution of your site the need for a new template arises you simply create a new one store it in a directory Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 3 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET accessible to Ektron CMS400 NET and create new content that uses the new template You can even modify the layout of an existing template reincorporate it and the content automatically flows into and adjusts to the new layout Conventions of the Documentation This document s typographic styles and conventions are explained below Convention Explanation Bold Bold type indicates a menu selection field or text that you must select Courier New Courier New font indicates code that you may enter Notes indicate special conditions or issues that the reader should be Note aware of WARNING A warning indicates very important information that should be followed Inattention to a warning can produce undesirable results Italic Italic text indicates either a title that is being cited or a special use of a word that might be confused with common world terms Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 4 Getting Started Getting Started Now that you have installed E
114. that your pre 4 7 Web site had four content items three English and one French Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 342 Multi Language Support During the database upgrade you select English Three content items are assigned the correct language but the fourth content item which should be assigned French is also assigned English You cannot simply change the content s language assignment When resolving the discrepancy there are two possible scenarios Scenario 1 Prior to 4 7 your site had unique content in French id number 4 To resolve this copy the content to a new French edition with the same id number Then delete the English edition Before Upgrade Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 not available English 2 not available English 3 not available English 4 not available French After Upgrade Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 English English 2 English English 3 English English 4 English French After Following Procedure Listed Below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 343 Multi Language Support Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 English English 2 English English 3 English English 4 deleted English English 4 French French Procedure for Scenario 1 To change a content item s language follow these steps NOTE Be
115. the Active Directory feature as well as determine other aspects of AD management such as whether users and groups are automatically updated To access the screen click Configuration gt Active Directory gt Setup from the left panel of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 454 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Active Directory Setup Ly Active Directory Authentication is Enabled and Requires More Configuration Active Directory Installed Active Directory Authentication Enabled Active Directory Integration Enabled Auto Add User Enabled Auto Add User To Group Enabled User Property Association CMS Property Active Directory Property EmailAddri mail FirstName givenName LastName sn CMS Administrator Group Association AD Group Name AD Domain The following table describes the fields on the screen See Also Messages Near the Top of the Active Directory Setup Screen on page 457 Field Description For more information see Active Directory Installed Active Directory If enabled user authentication is functional and User Authentication Only Authentication you can enable the following three fields Mode on page 472 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 455 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Field Description For more information see Active Director
116. the Configuration Manager Click the Windows Start button then follow this path Programs gt Ektron gt Ektron Explorer gt Configuration Manager When Explorer is open you can access Configuration Manager by placing the cursor in the left frame and right clicking the mouse Ektron Explorer Explore Search 9 Content Calendar E Form_Example O Press_Releases E Purchase_Orders E Books G Dynamic_Content_In_Cor D FAG G Contacts E O CentuyMedicalS ervices H H IntranetBasic Manage Configurations Use Configuration gt Refresh Properties Configuration Manager Options The Explorer Configuration Manager provides four buttons described below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 479 Ektron Explorer Button Description Use Lets you determine via the Existing Configurations dropdown list which CMS to explore See Also Switching Between Configurations on page 482 Edit For any configuration change the name location or authentication information See Also Editing a Configuration on page 480 Delete Remove a configuration See Also Deleting a Configuration on page 483 Create New Create a new configuration See Also Creating a New Configuration on page 481 Editing a Configuration To edit an existing configuration follow these steps 1 Access the Configuration Manager as described in Accessing the Confi
117. the RC Redstar Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear exhaust RC International is proud to introduce the RC engines and are now used in both the Sportster and Redstar This new addition to the RC International the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made fleet brings new options to our customers With from high quality aluminum This new pipe is more laser cut balsa wings and a wing span of 71 this is durable and will withstand a bad crash one plane that has to be seen Copyright 2004 Ektron Inc Sample Site Site Language English US vj For more information about the function used to display this ecmShowSiteLanguage S C the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Manual On the sample site provided with Ektron CMS400 NET this drop down list appears in the lower right corner of the home page but your developer can place it anywhere on any page Another way to indicate which language edition of content to display is by adding the language parameter 1angtype to the Quicklink For example products aspx LangType 1033 displays the English US edition of the products aspx content This syntax automatically sets the language cookie NOTE For a list of the decimal values for each supported language see Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 315 Multi Language Support What Happens if Chosen Language is Not Available A visitor to your
118. the screen Field Description Form Title Title used to reference the form FormID ID number automatically assigned to form Status The form s current status Description Extended description for the form Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 227 Content Displays the properties of the form s content Properties Content Title Title of content associated with form Note The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content Status The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 256 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Start Date Date and time when the content will go live on the Web site if set for a future date End Date Date and time when the content will be removed from the Web site if set for a future date Date Created Date and time when content was created Mail Properties The form s mail properties link To Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Letting the User Override email Values on page 235 From Text that appears in the email s From field See Also Letting the User Override email Values on page 235 CC Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Letting the User Override email Val
119. to IIS and resolves the path for the virtual directory LB_Images1 which happens to be Computer1 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedImages However if the Web site is accessed from another Web server machine the load balance path LB_Images1 points to the physical Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 399 Load Balancing directory Computer2 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedImages IMPORTANT In order for the load balancing model to work correctly the virtual directories on each Web server must be identical Creating a Virtual Directory This section explains the steps needed to create a virtual directory in IIS To create a virtual directory 1 Access your IIS management console Internet Information Services File Action View Help gt 8 S8l gt 4 Internet Information Services H DONEIL2 local computer DONEN local computer Yes TIS V5 1 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 400 Load Balancing 2 Inthe folder tree on the left side of the console navigate to the Ektron CMS400 NET Site root folder In this case it is CMS400 NETSample Action View e omx erae 18 gt p E E cms300scripts uploadedimages XM LILES fe CmswWsDemoa CmsxmlWsDemo C cms300ws graphics Dhelpimage faa uploadedfiles ektron bbolt H Default FTP Site a A Default Web Site
120. to appear after users sign in enter the URL to that page You can click Select Page to browse to the landing page The last published version of the page appears If the page has never been published nothing appears By default the page from which the user logged in reappears Set smart desktop as the If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as users enter the start location in the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Workarea Navigation on page 8 By default the user sees the Smart Desktop after sign in If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 23 Modifying the Application Setup Screen Field Description Force preferences to all To force these settings on all Ektron CMS400 NET users check this users box If you do users can see the values in the user profile screen but not change them If you leave this box blank users can personalize these values in their User Profile 4 Make the necessary changes 5 Click the Update button i Enabling WeblmageFX When purchasing Ektron CMS400 NET you had the option to purchase Ektron WebImageFX as well WebIlmageFX is an imaging application that allows users to edit images online If you purchased WebImageFX when you purchased Ektron CMS400
121. to copy existing content into new content and translate it to the new language Approve Approve or decline request for content to Approve on page 17 be published or deleted wj Assign Task Assign a task related to this content Managing Tasks on page 265 Delete Opens content s View Content screen 0 From here you can view important information about the content and perform all actions on it Cy Edit Checks out content to be edited by you Edit on page 15 2 Logout Log out of the Ektron CMS400 NET view Logout on page 19 of the Web site A Preview Preview content before it is published Preview on page 18 Properties Opens content s View Content screen Content Status on From here you can view information about content and perform all actions on it page 14 Managing Content on page 38 View Content Difference Displays differences between historical version and published versions of content View Content Difference on page 16 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 13 Getting Started 9 Toolbar Name Description More Information Button Ete View History Displays historical versions of content View History on You can also restore older version if page 17 needed Workarea Opens the Workarea From here you Workarea on can perform all actions page 18 Content Status After s
122. users The following table displays the actions that can be performed for each library item type Action Files Images Hyperlinks Quicklinks ae oe vV v v v Vv ma vV v v v Vv en vV v v v Vv Overwrite of Delete Fol wt P r Y Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 98 Managing Library Items Action Files Images Hyperlinks Quicklinks Form Quicklinks Remove from server vA vA Check links z YA of we uf Update URL 4 a i Most actions can be performed by an user who is granted permission to do so See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 However only members of the administrator group can delete a library item See Also Deleting Library Items on page 99 Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library fo
123. validation Custom Validation Caption Co Data Style OK E Fields on the Calculated Field Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may or may not appear depending on how your administrator has set up your system Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 199 Using the Data Designer Field Description Calculation Use this area of the screen to define the calculation that this field will perform Formula Enter the calculation that this field will perform See Also Using the Formula Field on page 201 Select Field Click this button to select a field to reference in the calculation For more information see Using the Formula Field on page 201 Examples Click the down arrow to the right of this field to see examples of calculations you can perform When you select an example it is copied into the Formula field Your system
124. view that information While viewing a user you can edit or delete the user To view a user follow these steps 1 Access the user folder as described in Accessing the User Folder on page 105 Click the Username of the user you want to view The View User Information screen is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 108 Managing Users amp User Groups From the View User screen you can edit or delete users These actions are described in the next sections Editing a User When editing a user you can change the username first name last name password user language and email address To edit a user follow these steps 1 N Oa F WN Deleting a User Access the view user screen of the user you want to edit as described in Viewing a User on page 108 Click the Username of the user you want to edit The View User Information screen is displayed Click the Edit button LY The Edit User screen is displayed Make the necessary changes to the user information Click the Update button i When you need to remove a user from the application you can easily do it from the User s Folder in the Workarea WARNING Once a user is deleted from the database he is deleted permanently The process cannot be undone To delete a user follow these steps 1 oa fF vN Access the view user screen for the user you want to delete as described in Viewing a Use
125. which is hidden by default or the right click context menu How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure Tabular data creates three levels of XML tags e inner level each field in the table e middle level each row in the table e outer level the entire set of table data To explain how this works we ll use the following contact list as an example Name Phone Email John Doe 555 1212 john doe email com Mary Smith 555 8765 msmith mymail net How XML Tags are Assigned to Field Names When you insert a field into a table a dialog helps you define the field type For example when inserting a plain text field the Plain Text Field dialog appears On that dialog the value of the Phone field defines the tags that enclose that field s contents Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 176 Using the Data Designer Plain Text Field Indexed Display name Phone Default value Insert Phone m Use E May not be removed Only one C Mau he removed More than nne To continue our example every contact is represented in XML as lt Name gt John Doe lt Name gt lt Phone gt 555 1212 lt Phone gt lt Email gt john doe email com lt Email gt and lt Name gt Mary Smith lt Name gt lt Phone gt 555 8765 lt Phone gt lt Email gt msmith mymail net lt Email gt How XML Tags are Assigned to Table Rows Each row of the table collects information for one co
126. with your load balancing model In addition it is recommended that you change the default Uploadedlmages and UploadedFiles directories to virtual directories as well For our example we create the following virtual directories on all Ektron CMS400 NET Web servers Virtual Directory Description Uploadedimages Virtual directory that points to the default Uploadedimages folder installed by Ektron CMS400 NET on the Web Server UploadedFiles Virtual directory that points to the default UploadedFiles folder installed by Ektron CMS400 NET on the Web server LB_Images1 Virtual directory that points to the Uploadedimages folder installed on the second Ektron CMS400 NET Web server Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 410 Load Balancing Virtual Directory Description LB_Files1 Virtual directory that points to the UploadedFiles folder installed on the second Ektron CMS400 NET Web server LB_Images2 Virtual directory that points to the Uploadedlmages folder installed on the third Ektron CMS400 NET Web server LB_Files2 Virtual directory that points to the UploadedFiles folder installed on the third Ektron CMS400 NET Web server These four identical virtual directories must exist in the IIS console for each Web server machine in your load balancing model Creating a Virtual Directory Refer to Creating a Virtual Directory on page 400 for inf
127. you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a Task Type follow these steps 1 On the View Categorization screen click a Task Type 2 The Edit Task Type screen appears Edit Task Type Task Type Review Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability O Not Available From this screen you can edit the following Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 274 4 5 Managing Tasks Task Type Task Type Description Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 275 Edit the information Click Save The Task Type information is changed Task Type Availability Task Types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making a Task Type not available you can suppress without deleting it When you make a Task Type not available you see the following warning Microsoft Internet Explorer p Are you sure you want to mark this task type Not Available Note After this task type is changed all tasks assigned to the task type will be assigned the Not Specified task type After you make a Task Type not available the assigned tasks Type and Category are changed to Not Specified Deleting Task Categories and Task Types You can delete Task Types by Task Category or individua
128. 0 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 354 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Registering Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts as Safe Controls In order for SharePoint to use Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts they must be registered by SharePoint as safe controls To do that manually follow these steps 1 Complete the Ektron CMS400 NET SharePoint Portal Integration Installation program This installs the files that need to be registered See Also Configuring Your SharePoint Portal Server on page 349 2 Access the directory to which you installed CMS cab files during installation NOTE The default location is C Program Files Ektron CMS400 SharePoint2003 CAB C Program Files Ektron CMS300 SharePoint2003 CAB File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ay Oei F A Search i Folders xox i BE Address C Program Files Ektron CMS300 SharePoint2003 CA4B gt SA Go Folders x Name Size Type Date modified 3 My Computer af 2 1KB Text Document 1 28 2004 7 57 PM F a 314 Floppy A E RegisterwebParts bat 2KB Windows Batch File 1 30 2004 1 47 PM E Local Disk C QsPscmss00approvals CAB 3KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 25 PM ip Documents and Settings E sPscms300Calendar cAB 4KB Cabinet File 1 21 2004 4 25 PM 7
129. 02 Managed Files Unknown http localhost AssetManagement Managing AMS Connections From Ektron CMS400 NET you can manage your AMS server connections The following sections describe the ways AMS is managed e Updating Registration Information on page 491 e Register with an Asset Management Server AMS on page 492 e Update Registration with an AMS that has a New Address on page 493 e Unregistering an Asset Management Server on page 493 e Reregistering an AMS that has been Unregistered on page 494 Updating Registration Information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 491 Asset Management Administration Updating registration information is useful when your AMS registration information gets corrupted or lost Follow these steps to update your registration information 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Asset Server Setup 2 Click the Edit button L Select the Update registration information radio button Select an asset management server to update from the dropdown list 5 Click Save fq Register with an Asset Management Server AMS Use this option to register Ektron CMS400 NET with a second AMS This allows you to keep separate servers for different types of assets For example you might want to keep all the Human Resource documents on a separate server 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration g
130. 05 e Creating a New User on page 106 e Viewing a User on page 108 e Assigning Users To User Groups on page 111 Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders All user and user group information is accessible from the Workarea Accessing the User Folder To access the user folder in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 105 Managing Users amp User Groups 2 Click the Settings button in the lower left frame of the Workarea 3 The folders tree under the Settings folder displays the folder hierarchy 4 Click the Users folder from the folder tree 5 A table of all Ektron CMS400 NET users is displayed From this screen you can add edit and delete users These procedures are explained in the next sections Accessing the User Group Folder To access the user group folder in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea 2 Click the Settings folder from the left frame of the Workarea window 3 The folders tree under the Settings folder displays the folder hierarchy 4 Click the User Group folder 5 A list of all user groups is displayed From this screen you can add edit and delete user groups These procedures are explained in the next sections Managing Users e Removing Users from User Groups on page 110 Creating a New User Before you can assign a user to a user group you must
131. 06 ibm com developerworks xml library x localis http Awww 106 ibm com developerworks xml library x localis2 Overview of Exporting Importing Translation Files 1 2 You select one or more target languages You select which content to translate You can select by e all content in a folder or only selected content e range of last published dates e all content that satisfies the first two criteria or only content that either does not yet exist or whose last published date precedes the source content You can preview which content items are about to be converted into XLIFF and XHTML files If necessary you can modify the selection criteria and rerun the preview until you are satisfied with the list of content to be translated Ektron CMS400 NET converts selected content to an XLIFF or XHTML file The converted content is saved to webroot CMS400 NETsample uploaded files xliff Of webroot CMS400 NETsample uploaded files xhtml You can prepare the same content for translation into several languages at once Transmit the XLIFF or XHTML files to a translation agency which converts them into the new language s When the translation agency returns the files replace the original files with the translated versions Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 325 Multi Language Support 6 Use the Import feature to upload the translated content to your Web site If the editions of the content do not exist in the
132. 1 Enabling WeblmagePX sssaccccssssscccccsstasctcccsstasctccctinaneecetenstorcesess 24 Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders ecese 24 UU a USEF ic ssicsiccccasaceacstediatsrscisiaseanseseriaiapianceantscansveacserinaeeacuatacens 26 Editor Options ae ae a a eee ere ener eee are 26 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 i Managing Content Folders ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 Accessing the Content Folder ccsssseeccsesseneseseseeeeeseesees 29 Folder PROD GING GS iiiisissiriiis inaina isinisi sini 31 Accessing the Folder Properties Screen ccccessceeeeseeeeeeneees 32 Folder PrOpenies IOOIDAN ssiri 33 Editing Polder Propero arrasin aiani 33 PUGS RINON enaa 35 Adding oU 5120 1 ape e ep er nner aeaaeai ass 36 Deleting FOND GIG issii dst ccc acdaeunadenctnisncceienstibucceascamtanausandnesecaciews 37 Search Content Folddel c seeria 37 Managing GOMGCH sosise soscas saa 38 Creating Updating Templates ecccessseeceeeesseeeeeeeeseeneeees 38 Adding Gont NMt sspe gt r np nernE Serer aeane 39 Adding HTML COMO ciscctosscecessadnccecccenbheadenesietitadeceesadshiteecseatiaadees 39 Adding AMIE CONME ctnscsscccatarscacnsnstesssntattecduaes a a A 42 Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400 NET Documents 45 WOE MOMMPIAUG E E E E A 45 The Gomont Venables nasses ia Raa Eia 46 The Language lS Miners cass saniecedess panied eccsdssccudectisisdenieisa
133. 1 Open its Data Design See Also Using the Data Designer on page 158 Move the cursor to the field you want to index Right mouse click on the field and choose Field Properties On the dialog box that appears check Indexed Plain Text Field E x V Indexed Name roduct name Display name productname o Default value E Validation Validation ensures that the user completing the XML form enters the right type of data You can decide if the user s input should be a number boolean date string zip code etc If you do not specify type attributes using validation data the field is a string See Also Validation on page 188 Validation is especially important when users search XML data because if used properly it can ensure that the search find the correct information For example if a form field collects a zip code but you set its type to plain text the user completing the form can insert anything into the field If the user inserts the letter o instead of the number zero 0 the field accepts that input and that record will not be found by the search On the other hand if you set validation to zip code the user can only insert five or nine digits any other entry is rejected when the user submits the form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 154 XML IndexingManaging XML Search Dialog Setup When you save a Data Design form a dialog appears that lets you set up t
134. 2 dae see ee He Deine ie re arene Ser neioii 310 Multi Language SUpport ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 312 Working with Multi Language Content asssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 312 Enabling Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content 314 Viewing Your Site in Another Language ccseeeeeeeteteeeeees 315 Determining Which Languages are Available 316 The Default Language wiieiccciceiecctwsnsmtecstiisdaderstaiedeceere a 318 Disabling a Langu essnee 318 Creating New CONTE sis ceteccsdvesissecetecteinteasdenesds pesancatecsextvncienentaas 319 Translating Content isaisa dinaanan ianiai tasnchesiusteceutentaascs 319 Using the Language Xport Feature ccceecessseeeseesseeees 325 Creating the XLIFF Or XHTML FilEeiisiinicsstirin inaa 326 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 vii Submitting Translation Files to Service Agency ceeeeeeees 335 Multi Language Approval Chains ccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 336 Working with Tasks in a Multi Language System ceeeeee 337 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 337 Working with Calendars in a Multi Language System 0 6 337 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System eeeeee 338 Creating an External Link to a Page of Foreign Content 338 Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site eeeeeeeeeeeeeee
135. 250 Working with HTML Forms Form Validation You can apply validation rules to elements in form content Validation rules ensure that user input in a form field meets your criteria For example a validation rule can specify that a user s response to the Birth Date field conforms to a standard date format If user input does not conform an error message that you create informs the user of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted You can only apply validation rules to these field types e Text field e Text area field e Select list field The field s type determines which validation rules can be applied When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a user submits a form not when the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears The user must change the field s input to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc Steps for Applying Validation Rules to a Form Field To apply a validation rule to a form field follow these steps 1 Perform steps 1 4 in Creating a Form s Content on page 236 Insert a text field text area field or a selection list Click the form element you just inserted so that it is surrounded by small squares Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 251 Validation Rule Can be When applied
136. 400 NET Load Balancing on page 406 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 396 Load Balancing Setting Up Multiple Ektron CMS400 NET Web Sites NOTE For an identical Ektron CMS400 NET Web site to run on two machines the same database must be used for each site To do this 1 Install the exe file for Ektron CMS400 NET on each Web server on the Web site Refer to the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual for additional information on performing an install 2 Select one installed database and use that as your master database Each Web site points to this database for content users and load balance paths 3 Create an ODBC or OLE DB connection to that database Also edit the web config file for each Web site to use that DSN Provider string or file string If performed correctly each Ektron CMS400 NET Web site on each Web server uses the same database Setting Up Virtual Directories Through Internet Information Services IIS on both Web servers create virtual directories for all image or file folders used with your load balancing model In addition change the default Uploadedimages and UploadedFiles directories to virtual directories For our example we create the following virtual directories on both Ektron CMS400 NET Web server machines Virtual Directory Points to Uploadedimages Default Uploadedimages folder installed by Ektron CMS400 NET on the Web Server Upl
137. Designer Field Description Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field Your choices are e No validation the user s response is not checked e Cannot be blank the user must enter a response e Non negative whole number or blank the user must enter a positive whole number or no response e Non negative whole number required the user must enter a positive whole number e Decimal number or blank must be a decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 e Decimal number required must be a decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma e Percent 0 100 required the user must enter a whole number from 0 to 100 e Zip code US only the user s response must consist of 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn e Social Security number US only the user s response must consist of nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn e Custom You can create custom validation For more information see Custom Validation on page 220 If you assign to this field any value other
138. E THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 1 5 Trademarks All terms in this manual that are known to be trademarks have been capitalized Ektron Inc cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals Active Directory ActiveX Authenticode BackOffice ClearType Developer Studio FrontPage IntelliSense JScript Microsoft MS DOS SharePoint Visual C Visual C Visual InterDev Visual J Visual J Visual Studio Visual Web Developer TM Win32 Win32s Windows Windows NT Windows Server TM Windows Server System TM Netscape Netscape Navigator Mozilla TM Firefox TM What s New in the 5 0 Release What s New in the 5 0 Release e Online context sensitive help is now available Click the help icon on the right side of the screen to g
139. EKITON EXPIOreT ssiiiiscsisctscereitcntstsaaceniiniceneainions 476 Providing the Ektron Explorer Installation File to Users 476 Access to Ektron CMS400 NET ccsssseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeseeneeees 476 Configuring the Ektron Explorer ccssssecccesseeeneseseeeenees 477 Editing a Gonhguratlio Mice s cscccsesssccacetcerncag eea 480 Creating a New ContiguratiOii sisiursieanonir anao 481 Switching Between Configurations ccscceeeseeeeeeeneeeeestaeeeeees 482 Deleting a Configuratio Misipa 483 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 x Asset Management Administration sscsesesesee 484 AssetManagement Contig cssssccccesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeensennes 484 IMI OCUC HOM sans EPT AT E E T E E TT 484 The AssetManagement Config File ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 485 AllOWING FIIS TYPO Siia 486 Setna the VIGW Type oense nA T 487 Asset Management Server AMS Registration 00 490 Steps to Setup a New AMS Connection 0 ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 490 Managing AMS Connection mossie 491 PDF 0c eo en eee aaia 495 PDF COMVerSION Process secs scccect ccc cesectetinsceteaatitamacgainosiumanes 496 Local PDF Generatio miseen hinen 497 Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation 0 c ccccsseeeeeteeeeereeees 507 Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Automatically 507 Additional Informatio is 509 Appendi
140. EMail gt lt PhoneNumber gt 555 555 1234 lt PhoneNumber gt lt problem This feature is great lt problem gt lt Data gt lt emsMail gt XML email Structure A form s XML structure consists of two groups of XML tags e Form and mail elements e Data elements Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 246 Working with HTML Forms The following image illustrates the sections of XML email structure jaj gt File Edit View Tools Message Help SY GH sg x Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Addresses From Ektron User XML Root Tags Form Module Information lt FormTitle gt Contact Ektron Support lt FormTitle gt lt FormDescription gt Contact Ektron Support Form lt FormDescriptian gt lt date gt 7 23 2003 3 11 24 PM lt date gt lt MailTo gt support ektron com lt MailTo gt lt MailFrom gt Ektron User lt MailFrom gt lt MailCc gt lt MailSubject gt Sample Site inquiry lt MailSubject gt lt MailPreamble gt This form was submitted from the Ektron Sample Web site lt MailPreamble gt lt Data gt lt Name gt John Doe lt Name gt lt EMail gt john doe yourcompany com lt EMail gt lt PhoneNumber gt 555 555 1234 lt PhoneNumber gt lt problem gt This feature is great lt problem gt lt Data gt Submitted Information The following explains the sections of the XML email Root Tag The XML email is wrapped in lt cmsmaii gt root tags Form amp
141. EditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes File Link Field E Use a File Link field to place an icon on the screen which the user in Data Entry mode can use to link to any file such as a Microsoft Word document or a gif image file You can also use an Image Only field to let the user insert an image See Also Image Only Field on page 212 Using a File Link Field in Data Entry Mode In Data Entry mode the file link field s caption appears followed by this icon B When the user clicks the icon this screen prompts the user to specify a file and a caption for it NOTE The user can only insert a file whose extension is defined within the lt validext gt element of the configdataentry xml file Your system administrator can help you do this Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 214 Using the Data Designer File Location http localhost ewebeditpro4 samples as Erom File File Description Fietik ss s s S Dialog Box File Link Field E x Name Field1 F Indexed Display name Field 1 Use Allow May not be removed Only one C May be removed More than one Default File Location TO I Cannot be blank From File Default File Description FO Caption fle Data Style Cancel Fields on the File Link Field Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Not
142. Field2 2 e You can use a string expression that creates a text message For example to calculate a full name from its parts concat title givenname familyname which could produce Dr Jonathan Smythe Referencing Other Calculated Fields A calculated field can only reference other calculated fields that appear before it in a document For example a document collects a series of numbers e One calculated field counts the number of numbers e Another totals their values e A third computes the average by dividing the total by the count In this example you must place the third field below or to the right of the first two fields Calculated fields that are defined later in a document do not appear in the Select Field or Group dialog Explanation of Examples The following table explains the standard examples that appear in the Examples drop down list of the Calculated Field dialog Note that your system administrator can customize the list so it may not match what is below Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Add two numbers X Y Add the value in the first field X to the value in the second field Y Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 203 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Subtract two numbers X Y Subtract the value in the second field Y from the value in the
143. Forms Folder To access the Forms folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Workarea 2 Click the Forms button in the left frame gt Content aoe w Modules mame 3 Navigate to the folder whose forms you want to work with or in which you want to create a new form 4 The View Forms of Folder screen appears Note that its folder structure matches the Content folder The screen has the following toolbar buttons Click one to begin that action Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 231 Working with HTML Forms i Button Name Description More Information e Add form Create new form Creating a New Form on page 234 Add folder Create new subfolder beneath See the Ektron current one CMS400 NET User manual section Working with Folders and Content Blocks gt Adding Subfolders oh Search folder Look for forms in current folder See the Ektron that satisfy user specified CMS400 NET User criteria manual section Working with Folders and Content Blocks gt Search Content Folder S Archive View archived forms in this See the Ektron em folder CMS400 NET User manual section Scheduling Content to Begin and End gt Setting Archive Options See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 225 Form Module Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with Forms Button or Name Descript
144. HTML See Also Assigning an XML Configuration on page 42 Path The folder path for the content Content Searchable Whether or not the content is searchable See Also Searching Content on the Web Site on page 309 Content Toolbar Buttons The following table displays the toolbar buttons that can appear Depending on the status of the content some toolbar buttons may not appear Button Name Function More Information E Edit Check out content to change it Editing Content on page 49 Pa History View previous version of content restore Content History on 5 if desired page 55 A Delete Submit a request to other approvers in approval chain to delete content If you are last or only approver the content is deleted immediately Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 48 Managing Content Button Name Function More Information 6 Move Content Move content to another folder Moving Content on page 50 Ist a Permissions Assign permissions to content By Setting a default permissions are inherited from Permissions on parent folder page 78 4 Approvals Set up an approval chain for content By Setting Approval default approvals are inherited from Chains on page 86 parent folder a Link Search Find content with a link to displayed Link Checking on a content page 57 Add Task Ass
145. HTML 126 email automatic content 433 notification of content activity 432 configuring SMTP server 432 disabling notification for a user 107 features 432 instant 433 conditions 435 modifying 436 system address 21 enable application mail messages setting 22 event types calendar see calendars event types eWebEditPro using 126 expired license key emergency user for login 26 F file extensions library folder property 96 97 File Link Field data designer 214 file upload path library folder property 96 98 floating toolbar 10 buttons 13 changing display 11 folder content accessing 29 applying style sheet 34 template 35 creating on server to match CMS folders 24 deleting 37 fields displayed on 30 managing 29 properties 31 toolbar 33 searching 37 toolbar buttons 31 XML configuration 35 permissions setting 81 font buttons enabling 27 fonts adding 261 deleting 263 editing 263 managing 261 viewing 262 Force All Approvers 92 foreign language calendar 303 forms HTML accessing folder 231 creating 234 creating content block 236 database 230 deleting 259 editing content block 258 introduction 258 summary 259 implementing on Web page 243 introduction 225 mailto 229 permissions 230 preparing server for email 231 reports 254 sending data as XML 244 structure of data 227 toolbar 232 validation 251 viewing 256 properties 256 XML email structure 246 H height screen adjusting 23 history view toolbar
146. L GH Address E http ws10050 cms400example WorkArea explorer views searchjresults htm gt Ektron Explorer x Explore Search Ektron a All Stars competition m G Content identifi O Calendar inne O Form_Example effective ESPs implementations The Ektron Explorer closes Access the Configuration Manager as described in Accessing the Configuration Manager on page 479 4 Pull down the Existing Configurations drop down list and select the configuration that you want to use 5 Click the Use button 6 Sign back on to Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 482 Ektron Explorer Deleting a Configuration 1 Access the Configuration Manager as described in Accessing the Configuration Manager on page 479 2 Pull down the Existing Configurations drop down list and select the configuration that you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 483 Asset Management Administration Asset Management Administration This section explains the administration of the Asset Management feature in Ektron CMS400 NET It includes the following sections e AssetManagement Config on page 484 e Asset Management Server AMS Registration on page 490 e PDF Generation on page 495 AssetManagement Config Introduction This section explains how to use the A
147. MS you are making it inactive This provides a way to restore the AMS to Ektron CMS400 NET if you Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 493 Asset Management Administration change your mind See Also Reregistering an AMS that has been Unregistered on page 494 The following steps explain how to unregister an Asset Management Server 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Asset Server Setup Click the Edit button L Select the Unregister an asset management server radio button 4 Select the AMS to update by choosing it from the Select asset management server dropdown box 5 Click Save i Reregistering an AMS that has been Unregistered You can reregister an AMS that has been unregistered in Ektron CMS400 NET Doing this re establishes the information contained in the database Your assets are again available to your users with the original content ID numbers assigned to them The following steps explain how to reregister an AMS 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Asset Server Setup Click the Edit button CY Select the Register with an asset management server AMS radio button 4 Add the location of the AMS in the Asset Management Server Address URL field 5 Click Save fA Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 494 Asset Management Administration The following appears PDF Generation
148. May 2004 o News j Dec 1 Greeting 1033 24 P 04 Dec 2003 H Products Home Page Content 1033 1 O 04 Dec 2003 3 Support Introducing the RC Redstar 1033 23 O 04 Dec 2003 HE Syndication Private Content 1033 2 amp 03 Mar 2004 C Support Page 1033 8 amp 27 Aug 2002 iia int Trinity In Line Pipe 1033 22 S 04 Dec 2003 This chapter explains how to add edit publish and delete content Permissions and Approvals are explained in later chapters This chapter includes the following information e Accessing the Content Folder on page 29 e Folder Properties on page 31 e Purge History on page 35 e Adding Subfolders on page 36 e Deleting Folders on page 37 e Search Content Folder on page 37 Accessing the Content Folder To access a content folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 29 Managing Content Folders Access the Workarea 2 Click the content folder in left side of the Workarea All content in the root content folder appears in the main section of the Workarea and the content folder expands to display the subfolders View Contents of Folder Content Content 44 Human Resources Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor Marketing Contact Ektron 15 26 May 2004 11 22 4M Administrator Applic 3 News Greeting 24 04 Dec 2003 10 57 4M Administrator Applic 24
149. NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 349 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 3 The installation s splash screen is displayed and the installation begins The following table guides you through the rest of the installation Action Setup Screen 4 Click Next to proceed The CMS Cab Files screen is displayed 5 Specify the location on your SharePoint server where you want to install the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Part CAB files Click Browse to specify a directory other than the default 6 Click Next to proceed The SharePoint Portal Site Location screen is displayed MS300 Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for CM 300 Integratio 2003 This setup program will 1 Install the Web Parts for CMS300 2 Register the CMS300 Web Parts 3 Add a reference to your web config file for the location of the server ry CMS300 Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup CMS CAB Files Setup needs to install some component files web parts Please select install them to E Destination Folder c Program Files Ektron CMS 3004S harePoint2003 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 350 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Action Setup Screen Specify the root directory of your SharePoint Portal site the directory that contains your Web config file Click Browse to specify a dire
150. NET Web site Summary List Web Part on page 376 Login A login button which allows users to log in and be Login Web Part on authorized by the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site page 380 Profile Configurable profile settings for the logged in Ektron Profile Web Part on CMS400 NET user page 381 Search Ektron CMS400 NET Web site search box and search Search Web Part on results page 383 Approvals Web Part Approvals ite Select All Clear All Title O Trinity In Line Pipe NOTE When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET via Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server the approvals Web page displays a list of content awaiting your approval See Login Web Part on page 380 for additional information Here is an example of the approvals Web Part displayed in SharePoint Server pary snared rac Approvals Web Part View All Content Awaiting Approval Reguest Type Start Date Submitted by Publish None Specified Edit John Path The approvals Web Part is identical to the approvals report page within the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Approvals Web Part Settings The Approvals Web Part includes no additional settings Approving Content via SharePoint After viewing approvals you can approve any content as you would in the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Calendar
151. Name gt John Doe lt Name gt Phone gt 555 1212 lt Phone gt lt Email gt john doe email com lt Email gt lt Contact gt lt Contact gt lt Name gt Mary Smith lt Name gt Phone gt 555 8765 lt Phone gt lt Email gt msmith mymail net lt Email gt lt Contact gt lt AddressBook gt A A Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 179 Using the Data Designer Tabular Data B Fields on the Tabular Data Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 180 Using the Data Designer Field Description Name Enter the name of this table See Also How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure on page 176 Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field The Name Field s Default Value By default the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number So the first field s default name is Field1 the second field s default name is Field2 etc You can change the default if you want Display name Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over the table s column headers Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Note If you check More than one here you are allowing the user to insert an entirely new table not an additional table row Rows
152. Point Portal Server path location is given the following message is displayed CMS Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup d You will need to manually add your site reference into the SharePoint Portal web config file Please see the manual For more detail When the installation is complete you must update your Web config file manually or perform the installation program again using the correct path See Updating Web config Manually on page 354 for more information Incorrect Ektron CMS400 NET Host Path If an incorrect Ektron CMS400 NET Host Path is given during installation the following message appears CMS Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup dD You will need to manually add your site reference into the SharePoint Portal web config file Please see the manual For more detai When the installation is complete you must update your Web config manually or perform the installation program again using the correct path See Updating Web config Manually on page 354 for more information Updating Web config Manually Your SharePoint Portal Server s Web config file must contain the following Ektron CMS400 NET information for integration to work e Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts as safe controls e Ektron CMS400 NET site location During installation if you receive a message that you must update your Web config file manually the following section explains the actions that you must perform Ektron CMS40
153. Products Home Page Content 1 04 Dec 2003 10 20 4M Administrator Applic 24 Support Introducing the RC Redstar 23 04 Dec 2003 10 26 4M Administrator Applic Private Content 2 Support Page 8 Sires Trinity In Line Pipe 22 03 Mar 2004 03 12 PM Administrator Applic 27 Aug 2002 02 18 PM Administrator Applic 04 Dec 2003 11 12 AM Edit John 46 Syndication lo I gt I gt lO lO ID o From this screen you can perform administrative actions and maintain content Each folder displays the following information about its content Field Description Title The name given to the content by the creator Language The content s language See Also Working with Multi Language Content on page 312 ID The number Ektron CMS400 NET assigns to the content It is used to retrieve the content from the database Status The content s status See Also Content Status on page 14 Date The most recent date that the content was added Modified edited or published Last Editor The last user who accessed the content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 30 Managing Content Folders Additionally each folder has the following toolbar buttons Button Name Description More Information Add Content Open the editor and create new content in the current folder Adding Content on page 39 E Delete Content Delete several content items at once
154. RL Link Cont ontact oo 00 en OO 05 465 0 Dr MSA00 couple fincde id Home Page Content 7 27 Dec 2004 10 50 04 AM CMS400Sample Launch htm il Login Information 8 05 Sep 2002 05 46 07 PM CMS400Sample index aspx id 2 2 Seasons Greetings 30 04 Dec 2003 10 30 18 AM CMS400Sample index aspx id 24 24 Support Page 14 05 Sep 2002 05 46 07 PM CMS400Sample index aspx id 8 8 Trinity In Line Pipe 28 04 Dec 2003 10 25 01 AM CMS400Sample index aspx 7id 22 22 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 418 URL Aliasing This section explains manual aliasing through the following subtopics Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing on page 419 Enabling Manual Aliasing on page 419 Activating Deactivating Manual Aliasing on page 425 Permissions for Manual Aliasing on page 425 Adding a Base Reference to a Template on page 426 Assigning a Manual URL Alias on page 426 Editing a Manual URL Alias on page 430 Removing a Manual URL Alias on page 430 Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing Manual URL Aliasing lets you completely alias a static or dynamic site Benefits include You can make your site more user friendly by creating human readable URLs for example ourcompany htm1 is readable while company aspx id 1 is not If you have a PHP site you can alias all php pages and use the same Query String names to pass the needed info to the new ASPX pages NOTE Any query strings appen
155. Row name Enter the name of the XML tag used to collect data for each entry in the table See Also How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure on page 176 Row display name Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over the table s cells Use this field to describe the kind of information to be inserted into the table s cells Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 181 Using the Data Designer Field Description Minimum If desired enter the minimum number of rows for this number table If you enter a number and the data entry user tries to save the screen without inserting at least the minimum number of rows he is informed that Element content is incomplete according to the DTD Schema By default the user is allowed to cancel or save the screen anyway However the system administrator determines whether or not a user can save an invalid document Maximum If desired enter the maximum number of rows for this number table If you don t want to assign a maximum number check the Unlimited check box Result of Assigning a Maximum When this table appears on a data entry screen anda user adds the maximum number of rows the Insert Above and Insert Below options are grayed out on the menu see example below 5 insert teld here It S 3 Move Up 4 Move Down Remove Columns Enter the number of columns to appear in the table See Also
156. S content That user cannot edit the content You can change these values using the Explorer s Configuration Manager illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 477 Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer Configuration Manager 4 i x Use Existing Configurations CMS400test Edit Edit Existing Configuration Delete Configuration Name Create New CMS Location http flocalhost CMS400Example gt Authentication J default Read Only Access CMS Login EkExploreruser CMS Password akk Update Test Connection Cancel If you change the password and Login name in an existing or new configuration users who sign on with that configuration have CMS editing privileges assigned to the user For example a user whose user name and password you enter has permission to edit all content in Ektron CMS400 NET To edit the content the user browses to it clicks its description in the right frame and then views the content in a new browser The content is surrounded by a colored border that indicates if it is eligible for editing For more information see Recognizing Content on page 9 NOTE _ Tolearn how to access Ektron CMS400 NET content from the Ektron Explorer see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Using Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 478 Ektron Explorer Accessing
157. ServerVariables HTTP_REFERER jsObj Add ContentID Request QueryString id Set conObj CreateObject EkBrMach4Content EkMach4Content if Request QueryString id lt gt then Set cConts conObj jSyndication AppConfStr currentUserID jsObj Site ErrString if cConts Count then amp gt document writeln lt Response write Replace cConts ContentHtm1 chr 13 document writeln amp gt Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 393 JavaScript Syndication lt end if end if Set jsObj nothing amp gt Ektron CMS400 NET provides a special template named jsyndication aspx This template has no images just the custom tag seen above It is all that is needed to allow other servers to display your content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 394 Load Balancing Setting up a load balance path via Ektron CMS400 NET is easy using the interface supplied in the Library NOTE Refer to Load Balancing on page 100 for additional information about setting up load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET Why Do Need Load Balancing When used properly load balancing is an extremely efficient and time saving tool for your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Instead of uploading an image or file on each Web server that makes up your Web site you only need to upload once The load balancing feature replicates the image or file in each
158. Swedish 1053 i The checked languages populate the language drop down list which helps visitors to your site select a language It s also used within Ektron CMS400 NET on screens that display multiple languages such as the View Contents of Folder screen illustrated below NOTE The default language on a dropdown list is determined by the value in the Default Application Language field in the Configuration Setup screen View Contents of Folder Human_Resources ID Status Plastic Molder 123 13 OA Servo Control Engineer 12414 A If you choose only one language on the Language Settings screen fields that prompt the user to select a language do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET All content is created in that language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 317 Multi Language Support The Default Language The default language determines which edition of content to display when a visitor to your site does not select a language It is also used if a visitor selects a language other than the default then navigates to page for which content does not exist in the selected language In that case Ektron CMS400 NET displays that content in the default language if available Within Ektron CMS400 NET the default language determines the default value on the language drop down lists that appear on every page on which a user can select a language When you install Ektron CMS400 NET the default
159. Syndication Exam C sccesccscsieceseesertsccercsscessehasaeee nance cieeaass 389 Hosting amp SVNGICAUNON cssisestesccsccessonccensaccetsnsasnccetscecencerneteaenteee 392 Load BAalanGing sisciciccccccssrerecccsssieetnicaneenaienien 395 Why Do I Need Load Balancing cccssseessesseeessseensenees 395 How Do Configure Load Balancing ccssseecseseeeeeees 395 Ektron CMS400 NET on Two Machines ccsssssesesssseseeees 396 Setting Up Multiple Ektron CMS400 NET Web Sites 04 397 Setting Up Virtual Directores cscssvcnsiacsdetdtnadessseizeasiaiadecaaeslaneee 397 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 viii Setting Up Ektron CMS400 NET Load Balancing 0 0 406 Wiat NON lec rare ea ede ens A Ps Reeea ond tuted 409 Ektron CMS400 NET on Three Machines ccsssseeeeeees 409 WV eR INOW eraren r ten daccersctdne Erea a GEE 413 URE NG SIG os scsseccscctscasateteneate te cccacacecomemncctetacatactettassencd 414 Automatic vs Manual URL AliaSing cccccessesseeeeeeeereeees 415 Automatic URL Aliasing sicsiccseccscsccssccsedccesctcsecinteccatersntectatecaee 415 Enabling Automatic URL AllaSING x iccccrsescsenesstendscnnnastnnceenantnnies 416 Activating Deactivating the Aliasing Feature ceceeeeeeeeeee 416 Effect of Activating Automatic URL Aliasing cceeeeeeeeeeees 417 Manual ANS WING criscia 418 Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing
160. System32 inetsrv asp dll cdx C WINNT System32 inetsrv asp dll asa C WINNTSSystem32 inetsrv asp dll htr C WINNT system32 inetsrv asp dll idc C AWINNT System32 inetsry httpodbc dll shtm CAWINNTSSystem32 inetsrv ssinc dll shtml C WINNTSSystem32 inetsrv ssinc dll oh PC MAJIRIRIT A Gustan 2 inatorne ooine All 4 Add Edit Remove Cancel Apply Help 10 The Add Edit Application Extension Mapping dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Extension Executable Path GET HEAL GET HEAD GET HEAD GET HEAD GET HEAD GET HEAD GET HEAD GET POST OPTIONS GET POST GET POSTI GET eyil URL Aliasing 2 xi Configuration 421 NOTE WARNING URL Aliasing Add Edit Application Extension Mapping Executable NET Framework w1 1 4322 aspnet_isapi al Benson hm Verbs All Verbs Limit to V Script engine check that fie exes 11 In the Executable field select the NET Framework aspnet_isapi dll file illustrated below Use the latest version of the asp net_isapi dll The default location is c windows Microsoft NET Framework latestversion aspnet_isapi dll In the path latestversion refers to the v1 1 4322 folder or the folder that contains the latest version IIS sometimes abbreviates the path in the Executable field causing the OK button to be gr
161. Traditional Sort 1034 Spanish Uruguay 14346 Spanish Venezuela 8202 Sutu 1072 Swahili Kenya 1089 Swedish 1053 Swedish Finland 2077 Tamil India 1097 Tatar Tatarstan 1092 Telugu India 1098 Thai 1054 Turkish 1055 Ukrainian 1058 Urdu India 2080 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 516 Appendix A List of Supported Languages Urdu Pakistan 1056 Uzbek Cyrillic 2115 Uzbek Latin 1091 Vietnamese 1066 Welsh United Kingdom 1106 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 517 Index A active directory integration 440 data transfer from AD to CMS 440 disabling 470 login procedure 443 user groups adding 453 adding user to 453 associating AD info with CMS 449 copying to CMS 448 deleting 453 introduction 447 mapping administrator group 451 removing users 453 replacing 453 user information deleting 447 editing 446 replacing 447 transfer to CMS 443 screens setup screen 454 status screen 459 view user groups 465 view users screen 463 setup guidelines 468 user authentication only mode 472 adding user information to CMS 472 changing user login name 473 data transfer 472 disabling 475 editing user information 473 log in 472 screens 474 setup guidelines 474 users deleting 473 replacing 473 advanced permissions 81 aliasing URL see URL aliasing Application Setup screen default application language 21 e
162. Unassigned T Text Alignment Unassigned w Text Line Unassigned nd Font Color V Unassigned Background Color Jv Unassigned Use the dialog to assign the following formatting attributes to a user response field e Font style and size e Bold and italic e Text alignment especially helpful for formatting dollar amounts in a plain text field e Underline or strikethrough e Font color and or background color NOTE The configuration data controls a command s appearance on the toolbar and on the Data Style dialog For example if lt button command cmdfontname gt is removed from configdatadesign xml it disappears from the toolbar and the Data Style dialog Below is an example of a response field whose font size alignment background and foreground colors were modified via this dialog Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 219 Using the Data Designer Default value al v Custom Validation The Plain Text and Calculation field dialogs feature a validation section illustrated below m Validation Validation No validation b Custom Yalidation You can use the validation feature to ensure the following about the user s input e The data type the default types are text URL whole number decimal number floating point number Floating point includes scientific notation so is appropriate for scientific numbers Decimals usu
163. Uses AD Integration 443 Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET 443 Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET 444 When Integration is First Enabled cccccceeesecceeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeeee 445 After Integration is Enabled ssc acsastacck ccerastnintidertinereistaacntee Saatnens 446 Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400 NET eeeeeees 446 DESIG WSCNS aaan AA 447 Replacing a USE cscs a 447 User Groups csi sce Poca ess cs cesen cess emcee seccenennnsancocemanstmcncctuentacis 447 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 ix Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET 448 Associating a User s AD Group Information with Ektron CMS400 NET 449 Mapping the Administrator Group ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 451 User Belongs to AD Group that Does Not Exist in Ektron MSA OO NET a ed eer teeceteen teed E EE ae eee ees 452 User Belongs to Ektron CMS400 NET Group that Does Not Exist in A cans EA A PATET A EREN eee miata 452 Removing Users from amp Group esriseiiniiiiair iia a 453 Adding User Grau OS secede cases reteed extra teats cxgivaamed Sh csietared testi drecescs innate 453 Adding a User toa Group ieissar aa 453 Replacing a User Group ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeseeeeeeesaaeeeee 453 Deleting a User Group tescssercisccerspnstiecininiiaeods aia aa 453 The Screens of the Active Directory Feature
164. Where appropriate the dialog automatically populates drop down lists from the indexed data NOTE As the name implies XML indexing is only available for information collected on XML forms It cannot find information in XHTML content See Also e User vs Developer Selected Search Criteria on page 150 e Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed on page 153 e Search Dialog Setup on page 155 e Editing the Search Labels on page 157 User vs Developer Selected Search Criteria There are two ways to use XML Indexing feature to make your Web site more robust e Present a screen of search criteria A visitor to your site uses the screen to select the kind of information he is looking for For example if your site sells outdoor clothing the user might want to see all wool hats for men under 20 00 A custom function determines the format of the results page e Determine the search and display criteria programmatically using a custom function Your Web developer inserts a function on a Web page that specifies search and display criteria For example if your site sells books a visitor to your site sees a Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 150 XML IndexingManaging XML navigation link Find books under 5 00 When he clicks that link the function searches your site and returns a Web page possibly a navigation sidebar displaying all books in your database whose price is less than 5 00
165. a aiii 89 Editing the Approval Order siisscicacecnxtinciteaticiiaaninkenedinaies 89 Deleting AD DIOV CNS rcce aaa EEEE 90 Editing an Approval Chain For Content ecccseseeeneees 91 Viewing an Approval Chain for Content ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 The Approval MethOG sisscscccscssccnccstesseiccectesstistccentectsectencatiseecanees 91 Managing Library IteMs cccceeeeeeeeee sees eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 Library Folders and Permissions ccsseccccesseeeeneeeeeeeneees 94 Folder PrOP tles scasccisicsissccnnscetescccncentosssenvastabecnnsunnsonceassansonacsese 95 Accessing the Library Properties Screen ececcceeeeesteeeeeeeeeeees 95 Editing Library PiVOpGHlGS assanis 97 Performing Actions on Library temS sssssnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnne 98 Deleting LDA NOMS nsueds tne ameatintinennantomestite 99 Load Balancing cies ciccestcrescetectstectecesectastecensscenteccnesantediatetacuedixe 100 Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 Adding a New Load Balancing Folder c csscccceeeeceeeeereeeeees 101 Editing a Library Load Balance Path scsiississceestiisidacesssxtedeteacteviasaae 102 Deleting a Library Load Balance Path eseeeseeneeeeereeeeeees 103 If You Have an Ektron WeblmageFX License Key 103 Managing Users amp User Groups eeeeees 105 Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders
166. able English 3 not available English 4 not available French After Upgrade Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 English English 2 English English 3 English English 4 English French Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 345 Multi Language Support After Following Procedure Listed Below Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 English English 2 English English 3 English English 3 French French 4 deleted pa na Procedure for Scenario 2 To solve the language conversion issue explained in scenario 2 follow these steps NOTE Before beginning this procedure make sure e the correct language for the content is enabled See Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 e metadata was defined for the new language See Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 1 Within Ektron CMS400 NET navigate to the View Content screen of content id 3 2 From the Add drop down list select French Add selectlanguage select language Danish German Standard 3 Ektron CMS400 NET creates a French edition of content id 3 4 Translate the title into French Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 346 Multi Language Support Delete the English elements of content id 3 content summary metadata schedule and comments Check in the French edition of content id 3 Copy a
167. actions changed the task s state by whom and when Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 277 Managing Tasks User Assigned versus System Assigned States Some states can only be assigned by users while others are only assigned when an event occurs to the associated content For example when content is first submitted for approval the associated task s state changes to Not Started IMPORTANT The administrator user can always change a task s state to any other state The following graphic illustrates the sequence of user and system actions that change a task s state E Check out 4 Task state changes content block KW to Active User waiting for gt A User changes task information or WY state to Awaiting unable to work Data or On Hold on content B Submit for A Task state changes pees _ to Pending Content is Task state changes declined m amp to Reopened Content is a Task state changes approved Sy to Completed Admin changes task state to archived and when no longer needed to deleted Progression of Task States State Description Not Started Assigned when task is created Assigned by User Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 278 Managing Tasks State Description Assigned by Active The task s content is checked out System Awaiting The task is started
168. add new items to it For details about translating menus see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Working with Menus Managing Menus Working with Menus in a Multi Language System Creating an External Link to a Page of Foreign Content If another Web site links to a multilingual page on your site the URL must include the language ID parameter For example www ektron com web content management solutions aspx LangType 1036 Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site Ektron CMS400 NET supports content in several languages This section lists the steps to follow when setting up such a site Step For details see 1 In web config make sure multilin Enabling Disabling Support for Multiple Language gual support is enabled Content on page 314 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 338 Multi Language Support Step For details see 2 Seta default content language to be the one used by the majority of your site s content If you had a previous version of Ektron CMS400 NET and selected a default language on the Database Upgrade Utility be sure that default language matches the one in web config The Default Language on page 318 3 Enable languages your site will support Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 4 Add language selection function to templates Viewing Your Site in Another Language on page 315
169. add the user to the system To create a new user follow these steps 1 Access the User folder as described in Accessing the User Folder on page 105 2 Click the Add User button 3 The Add a New User to the System screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 106 Managing Users amp User Groups 4 Enter the following information about the user Field Description Username Insert a username for the user you want to create First Name Enter the first name of the user Last Name Enter the last name of the user Password Enter a password for the user Confirm Password Confirm the password by typing it again User Language Select the language in which the user will view Ektron CMS400 NET screens and messages The language also determines the default value whenever a drop down list of languages appears within Ektron CMS400 NET The dropdown list of choices at this field is derived from the Language Settings screen available from the Settings gt Configuration folder Do not confuse the system language with the user s ability to create and edit foreign editions of content This field does not prevent a user from working with multiple language content See Also Multi Language Support on page 312 Note If the selected language is not English French or German it is only supported after you download the Ektron CMS400 NET Language Suppor
170. age Content Overview Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Ektron CMS400 NET supports the creation of content in any language supported by the Unicode standard This section explains how to create and work with content in any language First determine the languages in which your site s content should appear see Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 Then for any content you can provide editions in each supported language To provide multi language content you can either create new content or copy and edit existing content For example you can begin the creation of German content by copying English content into it then translating that content into German and deleting the English content All editions of content have the same ID number but are differentiated by the language attribute As a result your Web 312 Multi Language Support page template can link to a single content item but what is displayed is determined by the selected language There are two ways that content s language can be selected e alanguage cookie which is created when a visitor enters your site and selects a language e the link to another page includes the language 1angtype parameter For example mytemplate aspx LangType 1033 NOTE For a list of the decimal values for each supported language see Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 The View Contents of Folder scre
171. al Version 5 0 Revision 6 61 Metadata Two kinds of metadata can be added to Ektron CMS400 NET content e Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data helps search engines find your Web page illustrated below NOTE To learn how to display on your Web site the metadata that resides in the source code see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom Functions for your server platform gt Metadata Function gt MetaData Server Control and MetaDataList Server Control T Welcome to RC International Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back oa i index 1 Notepad ee Address File Edit Format View Help lt Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site Al information in the sample site is fictional gt lt html gt kTitle gt welcome to RC International lt Title gt lt meta name Keywords content RC International RC racing remote cont airplanes cars gt years RC i 1ink rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt to th o the SPCl lt HEAD gt striving tc lt BoDY topmargin 0 leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 New FeEg ightmargin 0 bottommargin 0 gt J lt TARIC WTATH 1NNX RAPNCR N Celt DANNTNG N cert CDACTNA N e Metadata that appears on your Web site s search page below the standa
172. al versions of content in a folder When purging your options are specify a date before which historical versions are purged indicate whether the purge includes a folder s subfolders purge published as well as checked in versions of content To purge the history for a content folder follow these steps 1 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Access the View Folder Properties screen for the content folder you want to purge the history for as described in Accessing the Folder Properties Screen on page 32 Click the Purge History button Ha The Purge History screen appears 35 Managing Content Folders 4 Use the following table to modify the Purge History options as Published in versions Field Description Required Select Date Specify a date to limit the number of historical versions to Yes purge When specified only historical versions with a date before this date are purged Recursive Purges historical records for content in this folder s No subfolders Purge versions marked Purges published versions of content as well as checked No Click the Purge History button GR A confirmation message is displayed Click OK to continue ono confirmation when complete Adding Subfolders To further organize content on your Web site create subfolders to store related content To add a sub folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET executes the p
173. alendar in Calendar the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars z Manage Add edit and delete Event Types to and Calendar Event Types Event from a calendar on page 300 Types tal Add Access Add Calendar Event screen in Adding a Calendar Calendar the Workarea Event in the Ektron Event CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars E Edit Edit calendar or event name Editing Calendars on Cy page 299 Editing the Event Type Name on page 302 A Delete Delete calendar or calendar event Deleting Calendars on 0 page 300 E Delete all Delete all events in a recurring series Deleting All Events in a i recurring Recurring Series in the events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars E Add Access the Add Calendar Event screen Adding a Calendar Calendar from calendar on Web page Event in the Ektron Event CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars View Date View calendar events for selected day Viewing a Calendar Event in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 293 Calendars Button Name Lets you More Information Add Library Select a library Quicklink for an event Hyperlink field description in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars Accessi
174. ally suffice for business numbers NOTE Your system administrator may customize the choices e The field value has one of the following relationships with another field a number or an expression the default expressions are between two values either another field or a number that you specify less than Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 220 Using the Data Designer equal to not equal to maximum length usually for text responses NOTE Your system administrator may customize the choices If the user s response fails to meet the criteria you can compose an error message that appears when the data does not satisfy the criterion Your system administrator determines if a user can save the invalid data When the Custom Validation button is clicked the Custom Validation dialog appears Custom Yalidation x m Data Type Data Type whole number bd Validation Condition Select Field Examples Error Message OK e The Data Type field is the value s basic type for example text number or URL e The Condition field displays the validation logic e The Examples drop down list shows validation expressions that the data design creator can apply to the field e Any Error Message displays in Data Entry mode when the user inserts an invalid value When the Select Field button is clicked the Select a Field or Group
175. alog s Extension field enter the correct characters to indicate you want to allow all extensions Server Platform Your entry in the Extension field Windows 2000 TX Windows XP ka Windows 2003 server a wildcard handler 423 URL Aliasing 13 Under Verbs check Limit to Then enter GET HEAD POST DEBUG 14 Uncheck Check or Verify that file exists IMPORTANT Uncheck Check or Verify that file exists is an important step Don t skip this step 15 Click OK NOTE If the OK button is grayed out click the cursor inside the Executable field to activate the OK button The lt httpHandlers gt Tags in Web config The lt httpHandlers gt tags handle the URL Aliasing Contained in the tags are how to handle various types of extensions The only reasons to edit information in this section are e When you are enabling manual URL aliasing by uncommenting the lt httpHandlers gt tags Uncomment the tags by removing all dashes and the exclamation point lt httpHandlers gt lt httpHandlers gt or e When adding an item to your library that has an extension not already on this list For example to add a Microsoft Visio drawing to your library you add the following line lt add verb path vsd type URLRewrite StaticFileHandler Ektron Cms URLRewriter gt Pp Add this line before the last line between the tags In the following example the last line is in re
176. ample editors planets com and editors saturn com Otherwise user group names must be unique The following diagram illustrates the components of the Active Directory feature Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 441 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature User is authenticated based on Authenticate AD administrator mig user adds users and domain groups and in AD assigns users to groups All updates to 7 user Active information Directory must be performed in User the AD information within 4D is compared Compare user with user and group information in information CMS User information consists of users groups and a user s membership CMS administrator can in a group import groups change email settings and set appropriate permissions CMS user and group data reflects replicated subset of information stored within AD database is updated information Logged in Overview of Active Directory Integration Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 442 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature A key component of this feature is keeping information in the AD consistent with Ektron CMS400 NET The next sections explain e logging into a system that uses Active Directory integration e associating user information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET e how user group information is maintained betwee
177. an only search for users within that domain After Integration is Enabled User information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400 NET whenever either of these events occurs e the user logs in Ca e someone clicks the Refresh button on the user s View User Information screen See Also The View User Information Screen on page 463 If a user s last name first name email field or group membership changed in the AD those changes are copied to Ektron CMS400 NET However if a user s logon name changed in the AD that change is not copied to Ektron CMS400 NET because Ektron CMS400 NET uses that field to identify the user Instead that discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens You should proceed to the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Users to Active Directory Users screen where you can update the AD user who is associated with the Ektron CMS400 NET user See Also Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users on page 460 Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400 NET Because Ektron CMS400 NET does not write to the AD you can only change the User Language and Disable email Notifications fields within the Ektron CMS400 NET Edit User screen You must edit all other user fields from the AD Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 446 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Deleting Users lf a user is dele
178. and expand the CMS400 NET Content settings The Content Web Part Settings page is displayed Change the value in the ContentID field to the ID number of the content you want to be displayed Click the Apply button for the changes to take effect The screen is refreshed with the updated content displayed Make additional changes to the Content Web Part or click OK to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Content As stated earlier when logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint you may manage content displayed by the content Web Part assuming you have permissions to do so within the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content related actions you may perform include Editing existing content summaries and metadata Creating new content Deleting content Viewing historical versions of content and restoring them Managing collections To manage the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site content within SharePoint follow these steps 1 Log in to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via the Login Web Part see Login Web Part on page 380 for more information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 372 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration NOTE If the content Web Part is in a different zone than the login Web Part it may be necessary to refresh the zone the content Web Part is in 2 The content displayed by the
179. and the last extension must be followed by a comma 4 Enable the httpHandlers element To do so uncomment the following tags by removing all dashes and the exclamation point lt httpHandlers gt lt httpHandlers gt The tags are separated by several lines that look like this lt add verb path gif type URLRewrite StaticFileHandler Ektron Cms URLRewriter gt Pp NOTE For more information on the lt httpHandlers gt tags see The lt httpHandlers gt Tags in Web config on page 424 5 Save web config NOTE If you are using aspx pages you do not need to install the ISAPI filter The following steps do not need to be performed 6 Open IIS go to the Web site and right click Properties 7 Click the Directory tab 8 Click the Configuration button 9 On the App Mappings tab click Add On Windows 2003 Server click Insert Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 420 CMS400Sample Properties Directory Documents Directory Security HTTP Headers Custom Errors When connecting to this resource the content should come from The designated directory Application Configuration App Mappings App Options App Debugging M Cache ISAP applications Application Mappings htw C AAWINNT System32 webhits dll ida CAWINNT System32 idq dll idg C AWINNTSSystem32 idq dll asp C AWINNT System32 inetsrv asp dll Cer C AWINNT
180. approval chain for a specific content item Use the Approvals button on the View Content screen to change a content item s approval chain Viewing an Approval Chain for Content To view the approval chain for content follow these steps 1 Select the content Click the View Permissions button 3 Uncheck the checkbox next to Allow this object to inherit permissions 4 Return to the View Content screen 5 Click the Approvals button 6 The contents approvals table appears View Approvals for the Folder Content Approval Method Force All Approvers User or Group Name ID Approval jedit 2 After viewing the content s approval chain you can perform the same actions on it as you can perform on a folder This list of actions is available from Actions You can Perform from the Approvals Screen on page 88 The Approval Method The Approval Method determines if content must be approved by all users in the chain or only users higher up in the chain than the user making the edits The approval method only affects the approval process if the person submitting content for publishing is a member of the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 91 Setting Approval Chains Two approval methods are available Approval Method Description Force All Approvers All users in approval chain must approve the content beginning with the first Do Not F
181. ars when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter that Value value here The default value appears in Data Entry mode where the user can accept change or delete it For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 186 Using the Data Designer Field Description Options Invisible Check here to make this field hidden in Data Entry mode This option lets you store unseen information in each XML document An example might be putting a version number for the data design so that XML documents can be upgraded to newer versions using an XSL transform Allow multiple lines Check here to let this text box expand to accommodate the user s input If you do not check this box a single line input box appears on the data entry screen to accept user input A field can be either invisible or cannot be changed it cannot be both Cannot be changed Check here to make this field read only That is the user cannot insert data into it in Data Entry mode You might use this option to provide user instructions for completing the screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 187 Using the Data
182. as follow these steps 1 Go to Workarea gt Settings gt Configuration gt URL Aliasing Click the Page Name Maintenance button On Page Name Maintenance screen click the link you want to edit 4 The Edit Alias screen appears CMS400 Edit Alias Alias Name CMS400Example Ti Content Block m htm Link CMS400Example contacts aspx id 35 amp LangType 1033 Primary E Library Quicklink Overwrite Existing Quicklink NOTE When editing an Alias you can only change the Alias Name and Primary fields 5 Make any changes To learn about the fields see Adding a Manual Alias via the Page Name Maintenance Screen on page 427 6 Click the Save button g Removing a Manual URL Alias To remove a Manual URL Alias follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 430 URL Aliasing 1 Go to Workarea gt Settings gt Configuration gt URL Aliasing 2 Click the Page Name Maintenance button 3 On Page Name Maintenance screen click the Remove button 5 4 Check the boxes of the aliases you would like to remove 5 Click the Delete button 0 6 Click OK to confirm Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 431 email Features email Features Configuring SMTP Server For information about configuring Microsofts SMTP service for your Ektron CMS400 NET Web server please refer to Configuri
183. ask task task assigned Not Started all tasks in only tasks specified state assigned to Active user in specified Awaiting state data On hold Pending Reopened Completed V Archived Deleted V user can only view open tasks that is not started active awaiting data on hold pending or reopened Email Notification email notification is sent on these occasions e A task is assigned to a user e A task is redirected to a user e A task is submitted for content approval Sent to the first user in the approval chain e The approval process moves on to the next approver e The content is declined at an approval stage This is sent to the assigned user e The content is published This goes to the creator assigned user and the approvers Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 284 Managing Tasks See Also Configuring E Mail Notifications in the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual Archiving a Task After a task is completed you may want to change its state to Archived Archiving moves selected tasks from the Completed tasks list to the archived list This change cleans up the completed tasks list and makes it and easier to use Archived tasks are typically kept for a predetermined time period at which point an administrator deletes them depending on your organization s policies To archive a task follow these steps 1 From the Smart Desktop open th
184. assign them to calendar events This is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual chapter Working with Calendars After users assign Event Types to a calendar event visitors can filter the calendar view by them Displaying Calendars on Web Pages After a calendar is created it can easily be inserted onto a Web page For information about inserting calendars into your Web site refer to the Ektron CMS400 NET Developers Reference Manual Creating a Foreign Language Calendar As part of the comprehensive multi language features of Ektron CMS400 NET calendars can be created in any supported language Exception Microsoft s NET platform supports most languages If a language is not supported by NET for example Welsh an English calendar appears instead Once you enter the calendar and event information in the foreign language the calendar display that is day and month names automatically appears in that language Also regional conventions for first last days of the week and date and time formats are maintained As an example see the French calendar below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 303 Calendars Notice that the days and months are translated and that the week begins on Monday instead of Sunday as in American English And in the daily detail below note that date and time format follows French conventions WARNING In order to see foreign characters and acc
185. aster 3 To edit the approval order follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 89 ae O N Setting Approval Chains Access the approval table as described in Viewing a Folder s Approval Chain on page 87 Select the language Click the Reorder button 24 The Edit Approval Order screen appears Click the user or group whose approval order you want to change He Using the arrows keys to the right move the highlighted user or group within the approval order First Approver joqit a aT v Approval Order Click the Up a or Down W arrow to move the user or group to the desired order Click the Save button E Deleting Approvers NOTE If a user in an approval chain is deleted from the permissions table he or she is automatically deleted from the approval chain To delete a user or user group from an approval chain follow these steps 1 woe o N D Access the approval table as described in Viewing a Folder s Approval Chain on page 87 Select the language Click the Remove button The Remove Approval screen appears Click the user or group that you want to remove from the approval chain A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 90 Setting Approval Chains Editing an Approval Chain For Content At times you may need to change the
186. ate button i Now all content and folders that use the XML configuration take their properties from the updated configuration See Also XML File Verification on page 135 Creating XML Configurations Based on Existing Configurations Whenever major changes must be made to an XML configuration Ektron recommends creating a copy of it and modifying the copy In this way you do not affect the content controlled by the original configuration To create a new XML configuration based on an existing one follow these steps 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 Click the XML Configuration you want to view 3 The View XML Configuration screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration 4 Click the Create New XML Configuration button D 5 The Add XML Configuration screen is displayed View XML Configuration Add new xml configuration Enter the title of the new xml configuration type then press the continue icon Title 6 Enter a Title for the new configuration 7 Click the Add XML Configuration button D4 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 146 Managing XML 8 The View XML Configuration screen for the new XML configuration is displayed From here you can perform the necessary actions on the XML configuration Viewing Data Designer XSLTs When an XML configuration is created u
187. ate file declare each menu option a variable For example Dim t_search t_products t_support t_news t_careers t_calendar t_home t_login t_site_lang t_contact t_copyright calendar_id 2 Enter case statements that provide the value of each variable in each language 1031 is the decimal code for German 1036 for French The following illustrates how to do this for the search menu option Select Case ContentLanguage Case 1031 tsearch Suche Case 1036 t_search Recherche Case else t_search Search End Select Now when a user visits a page controlled by this template and selects French or German as the site language the page is refreshed and the translated values appear on the template Modifying Images Based on Language Selection Many Web page templates also include images that require translation You can set up templates to invoke images in the user selected language by following these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 341 Multi Language Support 1 For each supported language create a folder within your Web site s images folder Name each folder according to the language s decimal id value for example German is 1031 See Also Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 If your site supports English don t forget to create a folder named 1033 Copy all images to each language specific folder Within each folder translate the t
188. atically By setting a folder s properties to allow PDF generation all Office documents published in that folder have a PDF created for them For an introduction to PDF generation see PDF Generation on page 495 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 507 Asset Management Administration The steps below explain how to change the folder property for PDF generation NOTE Existing subfolders do not inherit PDF generation Each subfolder needs to be set individually However when creating a new subfolder it inherits the PDF generation setting from the parent folder Administrators can change the setting while creating a new subfolder In the Workarea click the Content folder button Click the folder for which you want to enable PDF generation Click the Edit Properties button L 2 3 Click the View Properties button E 4 5 Click the Publish Office Documents as PDF checkbox Should Office documents added to this folder be published as PDF Publish Office documents as PDF 6 Click the Save button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 508 Additional Information Additional Information Supporting Documents Support Sales Information You can find more detailed information about Ektron CMS400 NET in the following manuals e Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Reference Manual e Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual e Ektron CMS400 NET Quick S
189. ation and is in the approval chain Grey Pending Go Live Content was approved but the go live date hasn t occurred yet The Floating Toolbar When content s border is visible you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar an example in the green box below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 10 Getting Started Our Camnanyv LY Edit Ory View History 0 Delete Add Task Title Corporate Published d our customers to conduct ssion is to develop talability flexibility 3ng affordable amp ees o ill Rogers founded Workarea for Application Administrator sed on the amp Logout that creating and managing Web e SR iA content should be simple and s affordable Today Ektron is based on the same principle Toolbar buttons let you act on the displayed content and display important information about it For example one toolbar button lets you edit the content while another displays previous versions of it The toolbar buttons change depending on the content s status or your permissions for the content Each button is described in Floating Toolbar Buttons on page 13 Floating Toolbar Display Type You can change the floating toolbar display type The choices are vertical and horizontal Vertical is the default Below are examples of each Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision
190. ationActive Directory Feature e Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users e Associating Ektron CMS400 NET User Group Membership with Active Directory User Group Membership e Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Groups with Active Directory Groups Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users If you click CMS users need to be associated with Active Directory users on the Active Directory Status screen the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users screen appears illustrated below Use this screen to associate Ektron CMS400 NET users with AD users Associate CMS Users with Active Directory Users ese CMS Username AD Username 4D Domain Search Delete Multiples Found bbolt bbolt gt Search O jedit of Search D DanO Neil Search D If a user with the same username exists in the AD that name and domain appear by default in the AD Username and AD Domain fields If the user exists in the more than one AD domain as illustrated in the first example above select a domain from the pull down list If there is no default and you know the AD user name to associate with an Ektron CMS400 NET user enter that in the AD Username and AD Domain fields If you do not know the AD username click Search to find the user in the AD If you decide to change the username in AD to match the Ektron CMS400 NET username make the change in the AD Then click Ektron CMS400 NET
191. ations After creating an XML configuration you can modify it when files defined in the configuration have changed Since there are two ways to create an XML configuration there are two ways to edit one e Editing Data Design Packages on page 143 e Editing an XML Configuration Created with External Files on page 145 Editing Data Design Packages After you create an XML configuration you can modify it Before You Edit the Data Package Before editing an XML configuration data package it is important to realize the effects of the modifications If an XML data package is edited all content to which the configuration is applied is updated Information that was originally created may be lost depending on the changes you make to the package To ensure that information is not lost use the Create New XML Configuration Based on Existing XML Configuration option on the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 143 Managing XML view XML configuration screen See Creating XML Configurations Based on Existing Configurations on page 146 for more information Editing a Data Design Package To edit a data design package follow these steps 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 Click the XML configuration you want to edit 3 The View XML Configuration screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration 4 Clic
192. ator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 447 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature is first enabled and then on an ongoing basis Once assigned to a group the user automatically receives all Ektron CMS400 NET privileges and workflow responsibilities associated with it NOTE The Active Directory has two kinds of user groups security and distribution Ektron CMS400 NET does not distinguish between them as long as a user is a member of either kind of group group information is imported to Ektron CMS400 NET This section explains the following topics Copying user group information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Associating a user s AD group information with Ektron CMS400 NET Mapping the administrator group User belongs to AD group that does not exist in Ektron CMS400 NET User belongs to Ektron CMS400 NET group that does not exist in AD Removing users from a group Adding user groups Adding a user to a group Replacing a user group Deleting a user group Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Before using the AD integration feature you should copy all AD groups that you will use in your Web site into Ektron CMS400 NET To copy an AD group into Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 2 From the left side of the Workarea Click the User Groups folder Click the Add Groups button ER Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 448 Active Directory Integrat
193. ayed out If the text box does not contain the full path IIS cannot validate the path To remedy this click in the Executable field The full path appears and the OK button is active Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 422 Look in My Recent Documents 3 Desktop My Documents I aspne er d a aspnet_isapi dll URL Aliasing 9 alink dl a ij asp re d 8 c_g18030 dll X CORPerfMonExt dl v1 1 4322 O eea 1033 X CustomMarshalers dll 45P NETClientFiles a diasymreader dll conr S envdte dll mul S EventLogMessages dll Temporary ASP NET Files a Fusion dll Updates X IEExecRemote dl 9 Accessibility dll 3 IEHost dll X IEHost dil 9 InstallUtilLib dil a ISymWrapper dll a Microsoft JScript dll a Microsoft VisualBasic Compatibility a Microsoft VisualBasic Compatibility 3 cscomp dll a Microsoft VisualBasic dll a cscompmad dll 3 Microsoft VisualBasic Ysa dll My Computer ee es gt My Network Files of type Dynamic Link libraries dll Executable files exe Dynamic Link libraries All files NOTE When browsing to the aspnet_isapi dll folder you may need to change the Files Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 of Type dropdown to dil or all files It is set to exe by default 12 In the Add Edit Application Extension Mapping di
194. b Part appears to be logged into Refresh each zone or the entire screen for the changes to take effect Profile Web Part Every user of an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site has access to their user profile which allows them to view and modify information about themselves When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET via SharePoint each user can access his profile information NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for additional information about logging in Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 381 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Here is the profile Web Part displayed in the SharePoint portal server logged in as the user John Edit User Profile Web Part Profile View User Information jedit Ly Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit User Language App Default E Mail Address None Specified E Mail Notifications E Mail Disabled This User currently belongs to these User Groups e Everyone Although you cannot modify the profile Web Part you can update your Ektron CMS400 NET user profile information see Editing Profile Information on page 382 for additional information Profile Web Part Settings The profile Web Part includes no configurable settings Editing Profile Information All Ektron CMS400 NET users can update their profile information directly from SharePoint To update Ektron CMS400 NET profile information follow these steps NOTE Before upda
195. b root ek_sitepath uploadedimages The ek_sitepath value is set in the Web config file Note You must create the directory in your Web root manually before adding it in CMS400 NET See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual section Managing the web config File Physical Path Path to file upload folder Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and you need to set up that folder on the file server File Extensions Specify the types of non image files that a content contributor can upload to the library You can add as many non image file extensions as you want or have none If no extensions appear no one can upload non image files to the specified folder File Upload Directory Specifies where the uploaded files are saved on the Web server By default the file upload directory is Web root ek_sitepath uploadedfiles The ek_sitepath value is set in the Web config file Note You must create the directory in your Web root manually before adding it in CMS400 NET See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual section Managing the web config File Physical Path Path to file upload folder Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and you need to set up that folder on the file server Ektron CMS400 NET Adm
196. brary folder properties contains library related information including load balance settings image and file types that are allowed to be uploaded as well as other settings The following buttons indicate actions you can perform on a library al folder Button Description For more information see re Folder properties Accessing the Library Properties Screen on page 95 Search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Library Folder gt Searching the Library Back to previous screen Accessing the Library Properties Screen As an administrator you have permission to change the library properties To view the properties of the library folder follow these steps 1 Access a library folder as explained in Folder Properties on page 95 Click the Properties button 8 The Library Management window appears displaying the following settings Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 95 Managing Library Items The Library Management Settings Field Description Image Extensions The types of image files that a content contributor can upload to the library You can add as many image file extensions as you want or have none If no extensions appear no one can upload image files to the specified folder Image Upload Directory Specifies where the uploaded images are saved on the Web server By default the image upload directory is we
197. but the assigned to user is awaiting User Data data from an external source You can use comments to indicate the data being waited for On Hold Task cannot be worked on at this time User Pending The content is submitted for approval System A task remains pending while its content is in the approval process When the last person in the approval chain approves the content the task s state changes to Completed If any approver declines the content the task s state changes to Reopened If an editor edits the content and then checks it back in the task s state changes to Reopened Reopened Content is declined by an approver in the approval System process Also if someone edits content whose task state is pending the tasks s state changes to Reopened Completed The last user in the approval chain approves the System content and it is being published Archived After a task is completed administrators can assign User this state It no longer appears on open task lists but is kept for reviews and reports Only the administrator can view Archived tasks See Also Archiving a Task on page 285 Deleted When an archived task is no longer needed for User user reporting or reviewing administrators can assign this with delete state While in this state the task remains in the permission database See Also Deleting a Task on page 286 can delete When you purge the task it and all of its transacti
198. button 17 window 56 hosting and syndication 392 HTML editor 126 image extensions library folder property 96 97 image only field data designer 212 image upload path library folder property 96 97 images login changing 5 indexing XML see XML indexing inheritance breaking 79 restoring 79 J Javascript syndication introduction 389 setting up template 393 L landing page after login setting 23 language export feature see multi language content language foreign see multi language content languages supported list 511 library folders creating 94 properties 95 items actions that can be performed 98 permissions 94 using with WeblmageFX 103 license key emergency user for login 26 modifying 21 links broken finding 55 load balancing 100 accessing screen 100 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 ii adding new folder 101 configuring 395 two machines 396 introduction 395 library path deleting 103 entering 102 setting up load balance paths 406 setting up multiple sites 397 setting up virtual directories 397 three machines 409 login images changing 5 login determining page that appears after 23 mail messages enabling 22 maximum content size setting 21 maximum summary size setting 21 membership module accessing 118 membership user groups 121 adding 121 adding users 122 deleting 123 deleting users 123 introduction 117 name editing 122 viewi
199. c here Text Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes No longer Use this field to indicate that an item can no longer be available selected by a user in data entry mode For example you have a list of team members If one member leaves check No longer available rather than removing the item If checked the only appears in data entry mode ifa document already contained the item s when the check is applied This field lets you render a value obsolete without invalidating an existing XML document Exception If multiple selections are allowed in a Choices Field and the item is selected in design mode it appears in data entry mode but is disabled grayed out This lets you force an item s value into the XML document First item is Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value not a valid but instead text that prompts the user to respond to the selection field An example of such text for a list of states would For be Select a state example If you check this box and the user selects the first value Select on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 197 Using the Data Designer Field Descriptio
200. ces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may or may not appear depending on how your administrator has set up your system Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 213 Using the Data Designer Field Description Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Default If desired you can insert a default image which might Image be the most common image or simply a reminder that an Location image needs to be inserted To help find the image click the From File button and navigate to image file You can only insert an image file whose extension appears between the lt validext gt tags in the configdatadesign xml file For example lt validext gt gif jpg png jpeg jpe doc txt lt validext gt Cannot be If you want to require the user completing this field to blank enter a response click inside this check box Caption Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWeb
201. checked X Y number Z2 true number 2 true X is a numeric field Y is another numeric field to multiply by X if a checkbox is checked Z is the checkbox For example X 2 and Y 3 e if the checkbox is checked the result is 2 3 which is 6 e If the checkbox is not checked the result is 2 Round a decimal number round X Rounds the number to the nearest integer For example round 3 14 The result is 3 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 205 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Round up a decimal number ceiling X Returns the smallest integer that is greater than the number For example ceiling 3 14 The result is 4 For negative numbers ceiling 3 14 3 Round down a decimal number floor X Returns the largest integer that is not greater than the number argument For example floor 3 14 The result is 3 For negative numbers floor 3 14 4 Format decimal number 0 00 format number X 0 00 Rounds a value either up or down to the hundredth place As examples 100 becomes 100 00 and 3 14159265 becomes 3 14 Total numeric values from multiple fields sum X text Y text Z text Add the values in all referenced fields Only elements that contain a value are summed Empty elements are ex
202. ck off the Event Types Available box If desired you can also check the Event Types Required box This forces the user to specify an event type when adding a calendar event See Also Adding a New Calendar on page 295 Once event types are enabled the Manage Event Types button appears on the toolbar Viewing Event Types To view available Event Types follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar whose event types you want to view 2 Click Event Types button 5 NOTE If the Event Types button does not appear in the toolbar you must make Event Types available See Enabling Event Types on page 301 for more information 3 The View Event Types for Calendar Name screen is displayed with a list of Event Types From this screen you can add edit and delete Event Types Adding Event Types 1 Access the Event Types screen as described in Viewing Event Types on page 301 Click the Add button HP The Add or Edit an Event Type screen is displayed Type an Event Type name in the displayed field A a Click the Save button E Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 301 Calendars After you add an Event Type to a calendar it can be assigned to a calendar event by users See Assigning an Event Type to an Event on page 303 for more information Editing the Event Type Name To edit the name of an event type follow these steps 1 w
203. cked Out 1 Tasks 0 E Content To Expire 0 To learn more about the Workarea see the section of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual titled Understanding the Smart Desktop Recognizing Content After you sign in notice that as you move the cursor colored borders appears around areas of the page as illustrated below The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area See Also Returning to the Classic CMS Interface on page 12 NOTE The colored borders only appear when you are not in site preview mode To learn about Site Preview mode see Logging In and Out gt Site Preview in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Site Preview on page 11 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 9 Getting Started Click here to proceed to the demo site XML Content Show Calendar Or a This is private content Only users and members that have read permissions can view it CMS300 Membership allows non CMS users to login to view private content To see this feature login as member member Each surrounded area is a content item that can be edited independently Meaning of Border Color The table below describes the meaning of each border color Color Meaning Description Green Active Content is active and ready to be edited Red Checked Out Another user is editing the content Yellow Approval Process Content has been submitted for public
204. click the check box on the top left corner to select all mM himin Pauma MLO Tarl Next to the Change to State field click the down arrow to display the drop down list and select Deleted Click the Set button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 286 Managing Tasks Purging a Task If you want to remove deleted tasks from the system you purge them Upon purging a task and its history are removed from the database To purge one or more tasks follow these steps From the Smart Desktop click the Tasks folder Click the Deleted view option Select tasks one at a time or click the check box on the top left corner to select all 4 Click the Purge button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 287 Collections Ektron CMS400 NET s Collection feature lets users create a list of content that can be placed on a Web page to offer readers links to them In the following illustration the circled content is an example of a collection on a Web page RG internavonal Home Products Support News Careers RC Sportster RC Cheetah RC Lilly RC Redstar RC Cars Product Name RC Ghe Description RC Internationals most entry in to the competit racing world is the RC C RC Cheetah is designed core RC enthusiast The Collections can also be used to display listings such as job postings press releases and Knowledge Bas
205. cluded Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 206 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Total a list of numeric values sum X text Total all values in a single repeating field Here s an example Plain Text Field properties Name Miles Allow more than one Validation non negative whole number XML Data lt root gt lt Miles gt 89 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 12 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 23 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 19 lt Miles gt lt root gt sum Miles equals 894 124 234 19 143 Only elements that contain a value are summed Empty elements are excluded Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 207 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Average a list of numeric values format number sum X text div count X 0 4 Calculate the average of all values in a single repeating field To continue the example from the Total a list of numeric values field above Plain Text Field properties Name Miles Allow more than one Validation non negative whole number XML Data lt root gt lt Miles gt 89 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 12 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 23 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 19 lt Miles gt lt root gt Average 89 12 23 19 143 divided by the number of values 4 35 75 Only eleme
206. collections or other page elements You specify content s template in its folder The folder can have a unique template or inherit a template from its parent folder The following illustration specifies where to identify a template in the Folder Properties screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 38 Managing Content Edit Properties for the folder Content Foldername Content Description pe ooo Style Sheet filename for this folder leave blank to inherit foms300sample detault css emplate filename for this folder leave blank to inherit Select an existing template here XML Configuration T Inherit XML Configuration None HTML gt A Adding Content There are two types of content folders HTML and XML An XML folder has an XML configuration assigned to it If a folder does not the content folder creates HTML content See Also Creating New Content on page 319 Translating Content on page 319 Adding HTML Content As an administrator you can add content to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site by creating new content To add HTML content follow these steps 1 In your Workarea browse to the content folder where you want to create the new content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 39 Managing Content NOTE When selecting the folder keep in mind the permissions that are set on it and which use
207. contains display information schema validation and other advanced XML data Validation Information XML Schema The xsd file used to validate the XML content Target Namespace The default namespace used for outgoing XML Display Information XSLT1 XSLT 1 applied to XML data when viewed on a device XSLT2 XSLT 2 applied to XML data when viewed on a device XSLT3 XSLT 3 applied to XML data when viewed on a device XSLT Packaged XSLT package applied to XML data when viewed on a device NOTE When an XML configuration is created using the Data Designer a default display XSLT is created which resembles the edit XSLT created in the editor This default XSLT can be applied to the XML content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 134 Managing XML 12 Specify the default display XSLT for the configuration by clicking the corresponding radio button Default C XSLT 1 xsltfrc_jobs_display xsl O XSLT 2 xsltfrc_jobs_display2 xsl 0 XSLT 3 xsltfrc_jobs_display3 xsl 0 XSLT Packaged O 90O 13 Click the Save button E XML File Verification A verification button appears to the right of some fields on the Add XML Configuration screen After you identify an XSLT or schema you can click this button to verify that the file e exists in the location specified e contains well formed XML NOTE The XML Verification feature does not val
208. content Web Part is surrounded by a colored border rouy snared rage vy Content Web Part Welcome to RC International Content iL RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing in three shart years RC International has become one of the leading manufactures af RC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who pilay it has endeared our products to the RC community We 3 Perform actions by using the floating toolbar or by clicking the Workarea button to access your Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea As you can see Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server can be your single location for managing Ektron CMS400 NET content Form Content Web Part A form content Web Part is used to display Ektron CMS400 NET form content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 373 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Here is an example of form content displayed in SharePoint as a Web Part SharepointMain Pill This topic v Edit Ektron Integration Sharad Form Content Block a Web Part Paige e First Name Last Name Email Ektron Product CMS300 v Comments If you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint server you may also manage the form content see Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Form Content on page 375 for more informati
209. ctory other than the default Click Next to proceed The CMS Host Path screen is displayed CMS300 Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup SharePoint Portal Site Location Setup needs the location of your SharePointPortal web config file Pleas to your SharePoint Portal site Destination Folder cumntnn 10 Enter the fully qualified path of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site s root directory For example http www yourEktronwebsite com CMS400Example Click Next to proceed The installation performs the Web Part registrations When complete the Installation Complete screen is displayed CMS300 Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup CMS Host Path Setup needs your hast path to your CMS300 site http localhost CMS 3005 ample p 5 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 351 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Action Setup Screen 11 Click Finish to exit the installation program The necessary Ektron CMS400 NET integration files and settings are installed and configured on your SharePoint Portal Server Testing the Installation MS300 Integration for SharePoint Portal 2003 Setup InstallShield Wizard Complete ly installed CMS300 Integration fc Once the installation has been successfully completed you can perform a simple test to be certain To test the installation access your SharePoint Portal
210. d lt add verb path vsd type URLRewrite StaticFileHandler Ektron Cms URLRewriter gt lt add verb path type URLRewrite URLRewriter Ektron Cms URLRewriter gt Pp lt httpHandlers gt For more information on adding library extensions see Accessing the Library Properties Screen on page 95 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 424 URL Aliasing Activating Deactivating Manual Aliasing To activate the aliasing feature follow this path to the URL Aliasing Configuration screen Settings gt Configuration gt URL Aliasing NOTE If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Configuration see Enabling Manual Aliasing on page 419 The screen indicates if Manual Aliasing is currently on or off To change its state click the Edit button CH check or uncheck the box and click the Save button CMS400 URL Aliasing Configuration Automatic URL Aliasing Off Manual URL Aliasing off If Aliasing is turned on and you uncheck it your page URLs return to their original format see Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned Off on page 417 Permissions for Manual Aliasing To enable content editors to see the Alias tab in the Content folder enable permissions for URL Aliasing on the View User Groups screen circled below View Users in Group Administrators Username Lastname Firstname Language admin Administrator Application App De
211. d The default file types are doc xls ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg txt log vsd dot zip Steps to Add or Remove a File Type Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 486 Asset Management Administration To add or remove a file type from the list follow these steps 1 Open the AssetManagement config file The default location iS webroot AssetManagement 2 Find the lt FileTypes gt Tags All file types must appear between the two tags For example lt FileTypes gt doc xls lt FileTypes gt 3 Add or remove any file type NOTE Commas must separate the file types Also file types must be formatted as wildcard extension For example adding an mp3 file type to the list after zip looks like this zip mp3 4 Save and close the assetManagement config file Setting the View Type Users in the CMS400 NET Workarea can preview an Office document by clicking its link The following is an example of an Office document preview See Also Steps to Change Automatic Preview Setting on page 489 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 487 Asset Management Administration View Content Test Asset Management Test Word Doc for Asset Management You might not want the preview to appear when a user clicks an Office document s link Some reasons for this are Web page load speed and lowering bandwidth usage on your network By setting Vie
212. d enter the most common response to this definition The default value is automatically applied to all existing content within folders to which this definition is assigned While editing content that uses this definition a user can accept the default value or change it See Also Effect of a Default Value on Required Metadata on page 76 Select from a List Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 68 Metadata Appearance on Edit Content Screen gt Metadata Tab Search Data City of origi Editor s name No Selection Top Stories Appearance on Search Screen C Match Partial Words archive Any City of origin Editor s name Top Stories Multiple Selections Appearance on Edit Content Screen gt Metadata Tab Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Metadata Not Included Included Ford Chevrolet gt Mazda All gt gt Auto manufacturer E All lt lt Appearance on Search Screen archive Auto manufacturer City of origin Ford Editor s name Chevrolet Top Stories Mazda Converting the Style of a Metadata Definition This section explains how Ektron CMS400 NET handles changing the style of a searchable property type of metadata For example you create a definition to collect Part Number Originally the style is text but you later decide its style should be number When you change the style of
213. data Adding a Metadata Definition Use the Add Metadata Properties screen to define metadata such as keywords and title You can define as many instances of metadata as you wish Add Meta Data definition Name Type Searchable Property gt Editable V Style Default IMPORTANT m Searchable Property Publicly viewable Vv Text current character count O 500 max To define one instance of metadata follow these steps After creating a definition you must assign it to all folders whose content should use it You assign a metadata definition to a folder in the folder s properties See Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 From the Workarea s left frame click the Settings folder Click the Configuration folder to expand the tree Click the Metadata Definition folder The View Metadata Definitions screen appears Select the language for the metadata you are about to define This metadata will only be available to content in this language 6 Click the Add Metadata definition button MA D amp S iS Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 65 Metadata 7 The Add Metadata Definition screen appears Using the following table add the needed information Metadata Definition Fields Field Description Name Enter a name to identify this metadata Type From the drop down list select whether this tag is e a searchable property when inser
214. dd or Edit Calendars screen appears The following table explains each field on the screen Section Description Title Enter a calendar title which identifies the calendar in the Workarea Description Enter a calendar description which appears on the Calendar Modules screen to help identify the calendar Location Label Specify the label text for the location field The location appears with the detail of a calendar event uvoudgy rruwtr Bal O 1 Pal Company meeting Location New York conf room Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 295 Calendars Section Description Start Time Label Specify a label for the start time A calendar event can display the start time End Time Label Specify a label for the end time A calendar event can display the end time Display Weekends Forward Only Place a check in this box if you want the calendar to display Saturdays and Sundays along with weekdays To display weekdays only remove the check See Also Display Weekends on page 298 To have the calendar display only events from the date when someone views the calendar forward but no past events place a check in the box next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day However a logged in user can view past calendar events Event Type Label One section of the Add Calendar Events screen display
215. ded to an aliased page pass to the ASPX page and may be used if necessary If you have a static Web site for example all HTML pages that is indexed in a search engine you can alias your whole site and gain complete content management without affecting your ranking in the search engine You can increase your rankings in a search engine by naming pages according to the context of a specific search term Enabling Manual Aliasing If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Settings gt Configuration follow these steps to enable it Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 419 URL Aliasing NOTE Before editing your web config file you should close all open browsers In some instances you may need to do an IIS reset 1 Open the web config file located in your Web site s root folder 2 Change the value of ek_RedirectorInstallea to True NOTE You only need to perform step 3 if you want add content with an extension other than those already registered such as aspx The App Mappings tab on the Application Configuration screen illustrated below indicates which extensions are registered on your server 3 After ek_RedirectorManualzxt set a comma delimited list of Web page extensions for which you will want to create aliased pages For example aspx htm html By default aspx is in the list NOTE You can enter one or more extensions Each extension must begin with a period
216. dedim ages LB_Files2 Computer3 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es Computer3 Virtual Directory Points to Uploadedimages C MnetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedimages UploadedFiles C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFiles LB_Images1 Computer1 C lInetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedim ages Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Load Balancing Computer3 Virtual Directory Points to LB Files1 Computer1 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es LB_Images2 Computer2 C lInetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedim ages LB Files2 Computer2 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es Setting Up Load Balance Paths in Ektron CMS400 NET What Now Refer to Setting Up Load Balance Paths in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 407 for information about how to configure Ektron CMS400 NET for load balancing After you configure your load balancing model for your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site you are ready to use it Now each time an image or file gets uploaded in your Web site regardless of the Web server the user is working on assets are replicated in all folders specified in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 413 URL Aliasing URL Aliasing Aliasing is an Ektron CMS400 NET feature that lets you change the name of your
217. dia 1095 Hebrew 1037 Hindi India 1081 Hungarian 1038 Icelandic 1039 Indonesian 1057 Italian Standard 1040 Italian Switzerland 2064 Japanese 1041 Kannada India 1099 Kashmiri India 2144 Kazakh 1087 Korean 1042 Korean Johab 2066 Latvian 1062 Lithuanian 1063 Lithuanian Classic 2087 Macedonian 1071 Malay Brunei Darussalam 2110 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 514 Appendix A List of Supported Languages Malay Malaysian 1086 Manipuri 1112 Marathi 1102 Norwegian Bokmal 1044 Norwegian Nynorsk 2068 Polish 1045 Portuguese Brazil 1046 Portuguese Standard 2070 Punjabi Gurmukhi India 1094 Romanian 1048 Russian 1049 Serbian Cyrillic 3098 Serbian Latin 2074 Sindhi 1113 Slovak 1051 Slovenian 1060 Spanish Argentina 11274 Spanish Bolivia 16394 Spanish Chile 13322 Spanish Columbia 9218 Spanish Costa Rica 5130 Spanish Dominican Republic 7178 Spanish Ecuador 12298 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 515 Appendix A List of Supported Languages Spanish El Salvador 17418 Spanish Guatemala 4106 Spanish Honduras 18442 Spanish Mexican 2058 Spanish Modern Sort 3082 Spanish Nicaragua 19466 Spanish Panama 6154 Spanish Peru 10250 Spanish Puerto Rico 20490 Spanish
218. dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 221 Using the Data Designer Select a Field or Group ioj x Select a Field or Group book Books 1 or more ab title Insert the title of the book CS genre authors ab price Paperback fm Field1 CH Field2 ab Field3 fm 4_B AB 12 A A 12 B B mee F ield4 current field Cancel This dialog displays fields that can be inserted into the Condition field Some field types like the RichArea field are not listed See Also Referencing Other Calculated Fields on page 203 Validation Condition book Example of Creating Custom Validation As an example of custom validation assume that a field collects telephone numbers and you want to make sure the user enters 10 digits To accomplish this follow these steps 1 Click the Plain Text Field dialog and complete the screen 2 Inthe validation section click Custom Validation The Custom validation screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 222 Using the Data Designer Custom Validation 3 In the Data Type field select Whole Number from the drop down list This ensures that the user can only enter digits Floating p al number 4 Click the down arrow to the right of the Examples field to see sample logic Number
219. directory specified by Ektron CMS400 NET How Do Configure Load Balancing Setting up Ektron CMS400 NET for load balancing requires additional setting up outside of Ektron CMS400 NET Actions you need to perform include e Setting up Ektron CMS400 NET on multiple Web servers and sharing one database e Creating virtual directories pointing to the folders where images and files will be uploaded to e Setting up load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET as described in Load Balancing on page 100 This chapter explains the configurations that must be made to your Web servers for load balancing to work efficiently and properly Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 395 Load Balancing Ektron CMS400 NET on Two Machines The following diagram illustrates how IIS consoles are set up for load balancing on two Ektron CMS400 NET Web servers C databases E graphics E uploadedfiles E uploadedimages 2 3 H H E As you can see both servers are set up to point to the same database Also four virtual directories are set up in each Web server s IIS console This section looks at a Web site driven by Ektron CMS400 NET and two Web server machines See Also e Setting Up Multiple Ektron CMS400 NET Web Sites on page 397 e Setting Up Virtual Directories on page 397 e Setting Up Ektron CMS
220. dministrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 122 Private Content amp Memberships 5 Click the Update button I See Also Membership User Groups on page 121 Deleting User from Membership User Group To remove a user from a membership user group follow these steps 1 Daa ON Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group that contains the membership user you want to delete as described in Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group on page 121 Click the name of the membership user you want to remove The View User Information screen is displayed Click the Delete button 1 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Deleting Membership User Groups To delete a membership user group follow these steps 1 Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group you want to delete as described in Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group on page 121 Click the Delete button iO A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Assigning Permissions for Memberships After you create membership users and groups you can assign them permissions to content folders To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 123 Private Content amp Memberships 1 Access the permissions table for the content or folder you want to assign membership permissions for For See
221. e 35 Click OK to close the Options box 36 Exit OmniFormat 37 Navigate to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 38 Right click the OmniFormat from Pdf995 service and choose Properties Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 504 Asset Management Administration 39 On the General tab make sure the Startup type is Automatic and that the Service status is not disabled Do not click Start now OmniFormat from Pdf995 Properties Local Computer AE General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name OmniFormat from Pdf995 Display name OMES EEE Description Start parameters Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 505 Asset Management Administration 40 On the Log On tab check the Allow Service to interact with desktop checkbox OmniFormat from Pdf995 Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Log on as Local System account You can enable or disable this service for the hardware profiles listed below Hardware Profile Service Profile 1 Enabled 41 Return to the General tab and click Start service 42 Click OK 43 Drag and drop a test word file on the C omniformat watch folder A PDF file appears in C pdfoutput NOTE This might take a few minutes depending on the size of the document and the speed of the
222. e and post it on your Web site When the content gets updated on the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site it is updated on the static HTML page as well Syndication Example This example uses the sample Ektron CMS400 NET Web site and a blank static HTML page to display syndicated content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 389 JavaScript Syndication Let s begin by creating new content in Ektron CMS400 NET and entering information about the weather for New Hampshire Eo Ba E X Title Current Weather in New Hampshire Comment M Add to Quicklin Start Date End Date S le Apply Style Normal Verdana 2 10 pt x A hs B S BBAS vco yk 280 ES nmpoeM HOME FEF llle e y 18 F Partly Cloudy Feels Like 50 F UV Index 1 Minimal Dew Point 0 F Humidity 37 Visibility Unlimited Pressure 30 05 inches and falling Wind From the Northwest at 12 mph After we create content we can publish it so that it is live on the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site RG international Home Products Support Nevs Careers Search Login O t i a eS g 2 18 F Partly Cloudy Feels Like 5 F 1 Minimal Dew Point O F idi 37 Unlimited 30 05 inches and falling From the Northwest at 12 mph After the content is published and we know its ID number in this case ID 19 we can create a static HTML page to display this content Below is the code for the HTML page that we wi
223. e 286 e Purging a Task on page 287 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 265 Managing Tasks The Tasks Folder The tasks folder in the Smart Desktop contains all tasks in the Web site 3 Tasks All Open Tasks Assigned To Me Assigned By Me Created By Me Assigned To Use Not Started Active Awaiting Data On Hold Pending Reopened Completed Archived Deleted oo0o0ng0noo0o0n00000 Task Permissions You can assign the following task related permissions in the Edit Users and Edit User Groups screens e Create task e Redirect task that is assign to another user e Delete task Users can only perform these functions as specified in the Edit Users and Edit User Groups screens Only administrator level users can edit these fields in the User profile Non administrative users can see but not edit them Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 266 Managing Tasks I Inherit Task Permissions From User Groups Username Create Task Redirect Task Delete Task admin v 7 7 Assigning Group Permissions A user can either inherit permissions from all groups of which he is a member or can be granted task permissions uniquely without regard to his groups Inheriting Task Permissions from User Groups To have a user inherit task permissions from all groups of which he is amember check the Inherit Task Permissions From User Groups box on the Edit User scree
224. e AD and assign the user to the group Then return to this screen and click the Refresh button 5 to update the user group information in Ektron CMS400 NET e To remove the user s group membership in Ektron CMS400 NET check the box under the Delete column and click the Save button E Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups If you click CMS groups need to be associated with Active Directory groups on the Active Directory Status screen the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET User Groups with Active Directory Groups screen appears illustrated below Use this screen to associate Ektron CMS400 NET groups with AD groups Associate CMS Groups with Active Directory Groups Hse CMS Group Name AD Group Name 4D Domain Search Delete Editors Editors planets com Search D If a group with the same groupname exists in the AD that name appears by default in the AD Group Name field If the group exists in the more than one domain within the AD select a domain from the pull down list If there is no default and you know the AD group name to associate with an Ektron CMS400 NET group enter that in the AD Group Name and AD Domain fields If you do not know the AD groupname click Search to find the group in the AD Finally if this group should not exist in the Ektron CMS400 NET database click the box under the Delete column to delete the group from Ektron CMS400 NET After you make all necessary changes click the Save button
225. e Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 e Form Module Toolbar on page 232 e Creating a New Form on page 234 e Creating a Form s Content on page 236 e Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 243 e Sending Data as XML on page 244 e Form Validation on page 251 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 226 Working with HTML Forms e Viewing Form Reports on page 254 e Exporting Form Reports on page 255 e Viewing Form Information on page 256 e Editing a Form on page 258 e Deleting a Form on page 259 Overview of Form Processing Step For more information see 1 Navigate to a Forms folder Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 2 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 234 3 Create a form content item Creating a Form s Content on page 236 4 Insert fields into the content Inserting Form Elements on page 237 5 Assign a template to the content Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 243 6 User visits your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved to a database or both 7 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 254 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data Each form resides within the Forms folder a standard subfolder of it or a custom subfolder such as RC Car Forms below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Ma
226. e Tasks folder 2 Click the view option corresponding to the state of tasks you want to archive Typically you would archive completed tasks Smart Desktop l o3 Tasks All Assigned To Me Assigned By Me Created By Me Assigned To User Not Started Active Awaiting Data On Hold Pending Reopened Archived Deleted eoo000n000000 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 285 Deleting a Task Managing Tasks A list of Completed tasks appears Select tasks one at a time or click the check box on the top left corner to select all Pm himin Pee MEZA Tarl Next to the Change to State field click the down arrow to display the drop down list and select Archived Click the Set button You can easily delete tasks no longer needed on the Web site Although an administrator can change a task s state to deleted at any time you typically do so after it is completed or archived depending on your organization s policies Note that a deleted task remains in the system until you purge it It is only visible on the View Deleted Tasks option See Also Deleted on page 279 Tasks can be deleted either one at a time or several at once To delete tasks follow these steps 1 2 From the Smart Desktop click the Tasks folder Click the view option corresponding to the state of tasks you want to delete Typically you would delete archived tasks Select tasks one at a time or
227. e articles The following graphic illustrates the use of a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Highlighted Knowledge Base Articles INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Release notes for eWebEditPro XML v4 2 Release notes for eWebEditPro 4 2 eWebEditPro 3 amp 4 JavaScript Object Model eWebEditPro error messages Windows XP Service Pack 2 Version 5 0 Revision 6 288 Collections This section only describes managing permissions to use the Collections feature For more information about the Collections feature see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Working with Collections Working with Collections on page 163 Collection Permissions Permissions for collections are set in the content folder permissions table in the advanced permissions section See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 View Permissions for Folder Content I The content in this folder is private and can only be viewed by authorized users and members j View MemberShip users 94dd Folders Edit Folders Delete Folders Traverse Folder jedit E Everyone x Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 289 Menu Feature Menu Feature Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu navigation system for your Web site Like Collections the Menu feature gives you the flexibility to display links to content
228. e only in delivered code form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats see product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS100 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS200 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS300 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron DMS400 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance
229. e report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Choose to display the report horizontally or vertically Data Type Specify the data type to filter the report by 9 Click the Get Result button to display the report Exporting Form Reports After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 254 2 Click the Export Reports button C 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 255 Working with HTML Forms Viewing Form Information You can view e information about a form e information about a form s content Viewing a Form s Properties After a form is created you can view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps 1 Access the Forms folder as described in Accessing the Forms Folder on page 231 Click the form you want to view The View Form screen displays The following table explains the information on
230. e screen provides three methods of filtering content before it is copied to the translation files e Selecting content and folders see The Select All and Recursive Fields on page 327 e Only if target language is older or does not exist see The Only if target language is older or does not exist Field on page 328 e Last published date range Only content with published date from No Start Date to No End Date Field on page 329 IMPORTANT Content must satisfy all criteria to be converted to translation files The Select All and Recursive Fields Use the Select All and Recursive fields to help choose content by folder The initial screen displays all folders in the root folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 327 Multi Language Support followed by all content in that folder To choose all files in a folder check Select All To select all files in a folder s subfolders check Recursive If you check Recursive Select All is automatically checked for the current folder Here are some tips on using these fields e To select all content in your CMS click Select All and and Recursive while viewing the root folder e f you check Select All then uncheck one file Select All becomes unchecked e To select files in another folder click that folder then check its files as needed e If you are not using Select All you can only select content from one folder at a time To
231. e that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 215 Using the Data Designer Field Description Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The indexed field may or may not appear depending on how your administrator has set up your system Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Default File If desired you can insert a default link which can be the Location most common link or simply an example To help find the link click the From File button and navigate to file You can only insert a file whose extension appears between the lt validext gt element of the configdatadesign xml file For example lt validext gt gif jpg png jpeg jpe pdf doc lt validext gt Cannot be If you want to require the user completing this field to blank enter a response click inside this check box Default File If desired enter text that the user will be able to click on Description to access the linked file Caption Enter text to describe this i
232. e to follow operating instructions iii negligence or accident or iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Misce
233. e your single location for managing Ektron CMS400 NET collections Content Web Part The content Web Part is used to display any content created in the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Here is an example of one displayed in the SharePoint Portal Server W Modity Shared Page CER Content Web Part PATES amp Welcome to RC International RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing in three short years RC International has became one of the leading manufactures af RC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the spori and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RC community We If you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint server you may also manage the content see Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Content on page 372 for more information NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for information about adding a login Web Part and logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 371 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Content Web Part Settings The content Web Part can be configured to display any content from your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site To do so follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the content Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 Minimize the Appearance Settings
234. ePath gt lt appSettings gt Where tcms4oositePath is a fully qualified path to the directory in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web server that contains the Ektron CMS400 NET display files for SharePoint For example http www yourEktronwebsite com cms400Example cms400scripts portals sharepoint2003 3 Save and close your Web config file Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 356 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Overview SharePoint Portal Server 2003 enables enterprises to develop an intelligent portal that seamlessly connects users teams and knowledge so that people can take advantage of relevant information across business processes to help them work more efficiently SharePoint Portal Server 2003 provides an enterprise business solution that integrates information from various systems into one solution through single sign on and enterprise application integration capabilities with flexible deployment options and management tools The portal facilitates end to end collaboration by enabling aggregation organization and search capabilities for people teams and information Users can find relevant information quickly through customization and personalization of portal content and layout as well as by audience targeting Organizations can target information programs and updates to audiences based on their organizational role team membership inter
235. earch field appears on the Workarea s Search Content Folder screen to help Ektron CMS400 NET users find content Only logged in users can access the Workarea Style Select the style of the response field from these choices available in a dropdown list You are specifying the kind of information that a user adding searchable properties to content will enter to describe the data Later anyone using the search can search on that information See Also Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 e Text The user enters free text to describe the content e Number The user enters a number to describe the content e Date The user enters a date to describe the content e Yes or No The user answers yes or no to describe the content For example if the content describes automobile parts the user could answer yes to include new and used parts or no to search for new parts only e Select from a list The user picks a from a list to describe the content For an illustration of this style on the Edit Content screen Searchable Properties tab and the Site Search screen see Select from a List on page 68 e Multiple selections The user selects an item from a dropdown list For an illustration of this style on the Edit Content screen Searchable Properties tab and the Site Search screen see Multiple Selections on page 69 See Also Converting the Style of a Metadata Definition on page 70 Default If desire
236. ears circled in red below The user must click the arrow to display all items and select one Dialog Box Name Fieid1 F Indexed Display name Field 1 Allow selection Appearance Only one Vertical List More than one Horizontal List J A selection is required Item Value fi Caption Value 1 J No longer available Add Change ltem List Check item to be selected by default Move Up Data Style Fields on the Choices Dialog Move Down Remove OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 192 Using the Data Designer Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Indexed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may or may not appear depending on how your administrator set up your system Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this choice list Allow Click More than one to allow the data entry user to selection select more than one item on the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one For example if you click M
237. ebEditPro XML provides several options that let you insert or edit fields in the editor Each field type is described below Field type Icon Description For more information see Group Box Ea Groups related fields which can be Group Box on page 170 fet surrounded by a box and have a caption Tabular ace Inserts a table into which you can place Tabular Data on page 174 See other types of fields Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 162 Using the Data Designer Field type Icon Description For more information see Checkbox IV User s response is either checked or Checkbox on page 183 unchecked Plain Text lab Free text field user cannot format text Plain Text on page 184 ab Rich Area zal Free text field user can format text using Rich Area on page 189 the editor Choices Several choices appear on screen User Choices on page 191 e checks appropriate boxes All user choices are inserted as values within single XML tag List ars Same as Choices except options appear Select List on page 195 Ek in a drop down box Calculated Performs calculations using other fields Calculated Field on on the screen page 198 Calendar Lets user insert a date by clicking a Calendar Field on page 209 calendar Image Only Lets user insert an image Image Only Field
238. eck the Move Converted Files to Output Folder checkbox OmniFormat Options Modulation 100 is unchanged r Size V Same as original Brightness fi 00 Saturation fi oo f 00 Hue Output Folder Contrast Normal v Install OmniFormat as a Service Rotation fo v M Normalize Resolution of files converted from PDF 72 PDF Rights Management V Convert 1 image file per page when converting from PDF Image to PDF output page size Letter v Memory Usage OK Help 31 When the Open dialog box appears select the C pdfoutput folder Directories c pdfoutput JE mer pdfoutput _ Cancel Network 32 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 503 Asset Management Administration 33 On the OmniFormat Options dialog box click Install OmniFormat as a Service OmniFormat Options Modulation 100 is unchanged Size x V Same as original Brightness f 00 Saturation f oo ae Hue f 00 Output Folder C pdfoutput Contrast Normal X Install OmniFormat as a Service Rotation fo X Normalize Resolution of files converted from PDF 72 PDF Rights Management V Convert 1 image file per page when converting from PDF Image to PDF output page size Letter X Memory Usage OK Help 34 If the Install is successful the following dialog box appears Click OK OmniFormat A OmniFormat has been installed as a Servic
239. ed in the Ektron CMS400 NET s sample site If your Web master changed the variable names in your site s template use the name of the corresponding variable in each template rather than the one above The Language Identifier This part of the URL identifies the language selected by a visitor to your site It only appears if your site supports multiple languages To learn more see Multi Language Support on page 312 Viewing Content You can preview all content that has been created in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Previewing lets you see the content summaries and other information about the content Navigating to Ektron CMS400 NET content is similar to navigating to a file using Windows Explorer The window has two frames The left frame contains the top level folders You drill down through the folders until you find the desired content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 46 Managing Content To view content in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the content you want to view A list of content that belongs to that folder is displayed Select the language of the content you want to view Click the content you want to view The View Content screen is displayed View Content ASP NET Unleashed y ty Gey view English U S Content t Comment Title ASP NET Unleashed Subject Computer Programming ISBN 067232542 Gen
240. eeeeteeeeeeees 338 Creating Web Pages that Support Several Languages 340 Resolving Conversion ISSUGS esiacematceiatieireonencunnnes 342 Set the Language of Spell Checking ccsssseccceseeeeeteneeeees 347 Chatacter EnNCO ding jsccsscisscssesccssicccetensssneaccctataecnienccnncceeneccsnads 347 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 348 PIEOQUISNOS ii itis eterna A nse asennad 348 Configuring Your SharePoint Portal Server sessen 349 Whats Next o22ctcacie cates tuac tates ia a 353 Installation TroubleShOoting ccceseccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 353 Updating Web contig Manually ccccsciccs seccetceccecssescectcaanceesvatene 354 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Overview ssssese 357 SharePoint Portal Web Page Layout cescceeeseeeeeettteeeeeees 357 Whatis a WED PANU oisinn nei aAa an Ear 358 veo PAn LONO iaa Ra 359 SharePoint Server PermiSSiON Sirisiri niesi 360 Personal vs Shared VEW cect sd etcttt nena ae antes 360 Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts ccccssssetccessesseeeeesseeeeeeees 361 Modiiying Web PANS cassee aieiaa 364 Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts 365 WED SOIC S iinccscsntsinntnneitiniicmim maa 387 Syndicating Web Content aS RSS eeccceseseeeeeeeneeeeneees 388 JavaScript Syndication ssssssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 389 What IS SYNGiGatlonn cscsicsccscsccscvecsensnpssxaecasepsnncecnseceunconcennncaee 389
241. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 72 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 ii Editing a Metadata Definition cccccssssseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 72 Deleting a Metadata Definition cccccessseeceeeeeeeeeeseeetneneees 73 Assigning Metadata to a Folder ccccsseccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 74 Adding Metadata to Content ccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenseeees 77 Setting PPCPEVUIS SONU S iain cs access cewecccescenoseeecmatenntweencee 78 WAG PAIIGG vi sccicnisanicnasinswsinansnnsanseriabncaciiaatoncesecsesatianansennantes 79 Standard amp Advanced Permissions csscseeeeeeseeeeteeenseeeees 80 Setting Permissions for a Content Folder cccceeeseees 81 Adding a User or User Group to the Permissions Table 0 83 Editing User or User Group PermisSions cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Deleting Users or User Groups from the Permissions Table 84 Setting Permissions for Content csscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 84 Setting Approval ChalinS cccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 Examples of Approval Chain ccccsesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 87 Inheritance and the Approval Chain ccccssseeeeeeeetteneees 87 Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder 87 Viewing a Folder s Approval Chain ccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Adding APOYOS siccin ieaiaia aai ad
242. eeing content s border you can get a more detailed status by hovering your cursor over the properties button E When you do the content s title and current status appear as shown below RC International Ya Title Support Request Form Published Below are the content statuses and their abbreviations Letter Border Meaning Content state Color A green Approved Through workflow and published on the Web site O red Checked Out Currently being edited Has not been checked in l green Checked In Checked in for others to edit S yellow Submitted for Approval Saved and submitted into approval chain See Also Setting Approval Chains on page 86 M yellow Marked For Deletion Requested for deletion Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 14 Getting Started Letter Border Meaning Content state Color T Awaiting Completion of Task s assigned to content are Associated Tasks not complete P grey Pending Go Live Date Approved but Go Live date hasn t occurred yet D Pending Deletion Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only remains until the start date is reached At that point the content is deleted Edit L NOTE For more information about e content statuses see Appendix A of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual e content activities see Managing Content
243. een Disabling AD Integration If you decide to disable AD authentication or integration edit the Active Directory Setup screen and uncheck the box next to Enable Active Directory Authentication or Enable Active Directory Integration See Also The Active Directory Setup Screen on page 454 If you do this and any users or groups share the same name within different domains the following message appears on the screen Active Directory Authentication is disabled but needs further configuration For example two users are named JJackson saturn com and JJackson planets com When AD was enabled the domain names made the two users unique However when you disable integration the domain names are dropped so the user names are now identical You need to make the users unique If you click the message above on the Active Directory Setup screen you move to the Active Directory Status screen The following messages may appear Active Directory Status e Active Directory Authentication is disabled but needs futher configuration CMS users need to be made unique because they have the same usernames as other users CMS groups need to be made unique because they have the same names as other groups Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 470 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Click the message to proceed to the Make Ektron CMS400 NET Users Unique screen illustrated below
244. en s View field lets you choose a language then view and create content in that language You can also view all content in the folder regardless of language This field makes to easy to find and work on content editions in a selected language View Contents of Folder Content Contact Ektron Greeting 1 03 PM Home Page Content l U De 3 20 AM Teed al alo m eI MA Me dee T MA Pee AMMA AM MS ARA The View Contents of Folder screen also displays the language of each content item This helps you distinguish them when viewing all content Finally you can set up a separate approval chain for each edition of acontent and can assign collections and tasks in any supported language This section describes how to work with a multiple language Web site through the following topics e Enabling Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content on page 314 e Viewing Your Site in Another Language on page 315 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 313 Multi Language Support e Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 e The Default Language on page 318 e Creating New Content on page 319 e Translating Content on page 319 e Multi Language Approval Chains on page 336 e Working with Tasks in a Multi Language System on page 337 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 337 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page
245. ent Content Properties The content properties screen shows which XML configuration if any is applied to the content and whether a search will find the content To view the Content Properties screen follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 57 Managing Content 1 Access the View Content screen for the content whose properties you want to view as described in Viewing Content on page 46 2 Click the Properties button w The View Properties for the Content screen appears 1 xX View Properties for the Content Contact Ektron Content a a Human Resources H XML Configuration S Marketing I Inherit XML Configuration Products None HTML R 4 Make any necessary changes For more information see e Assigning XML Configurations on page 136 e Content Searchable on page 41 5 Click the Update button NOTE If you click the Properties button for content that is displayed on a Web page the View Content screen opens in the Workarea window Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 58 Content Reports Content Reports The Reports folder contains various content reports For information about them see the Content Workflow Reports section of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 59 Adding Content Programmatically Content can be created using a spec
246. ents the client PC must have support enabled for that language in Windows For more information see http www microsoft com globaldev handson user 2kintlsupp mspx Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 304 Calendars lt lt 31 03 200 vendredi 1 avril 2005 02 04 2005 gt gt Using Existing Calendar ID or Creating a New One When you create a calendar in a foreign language you can either use an existing calendar ID or create a new one Type Use when For more information see Foreign language You want one Web page that Creating a Multi lingual Calendar version of existing displays a calendar in the language Using the Same ID on page 307 calendar ID selected by the site visitor New calendar ID The foreign calendar will be placed Creating a Multilingual Calendar on its own Web page there is no Using a New ID on page 308 equivalent calendar in the default language For example the following is the English language version of the sample calendar provided with the intranet The URL of the following calendar is http localhost CMS400EXAMPLE intranet calendar aspx menu_id 15 amp calendar_id 3 amp TitleLabel Company 20Calendar LangType 1033 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 305 Calendars Show All Company Holiday If you create a French version of that calendar and a user navigates to the same page but views it i
247. erts an email address into the field you inserted in Step 5 that field value is used in the email Creating a Form s Content When you create a form Ektron CMS400 NET automatically creates content with the same name as the form For example if you Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 236 Working with HTML Forms create a form called New Form content named New Form is created for that form Use this content to insert the form s elements This content is only available after you identify the form Unlike regular content it is not accessible from the Content folder it is only available from its form Creating a form content item is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 39 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to facilitate the insertion of form elements lt a La Le Bi pasig f fh El owe ey Inserting Form Elements To create a form s content follow these steps 1 Access the form you created in Creating a New Form on page 234 2 lick the Edit button Cy 3 The Edit Content window opens Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 237 Working with HTML Forms Edit Content in Folder Forms Title Vacation Request English U S Form Post back message Meta Data Schedule Comment Ei Apply Style Normal x gt 3 12 pt du BZ U A
248. est security group or any other membership criteria that can be defined See Also e SharePoint Portal Web Page Layout on page 357 e What is a Web Part on page 358 e Web Part Zones on page 359 e SharePoint Server Permissions on page 360 e Personal vs Shared View on page 360 e Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts on page 361 SharePoint Portal Web Page Layout All Web pages in SharePoint have the same layout characteristics Each Web page is comprised of the following e Web Part page e Web Part zone e Web Part Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 357 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration The following graphic shows the relationship of these components on a Web page in SharePoint tegration modify Shai Web Part Zone Welcome to RC International Web Part RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing In three short years international has become one of the leading manufactures af RC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the spori and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RC community We will continue striving to improve affordable products and hope you will become an RC International member Collection Trh RC Sportster What is a Web Part Components of a SharePoint Portal page are called Web Parts Microsoft defines a Web Part as A modular unit
249. et information about that screen View Contents of Folder Content Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor S cms Developer 1033 12 OQ 3 7 2005 10 25 30 AM Administrator Applicatior A 1n22 277 A SIIGIINNG 11 47 10 AM Admminictratar Annlieatior From that help topic you can browse through nearby topics or use the table of contents index and search to find answers to your questions about Ektron CMS400 NET e The Ektron Explorer gives users an alternative way to access CMS content See Also Ektron Explorer on page 476 e The content and site search now include any searchable properties defined in the Searchable Properties screen formerly limited to metadata The properties can be assigned on a folder level See Also Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 e You can now assign categories and types to tasks See Also Task Categories and Types on page 267 e Ektron CMS400 NET now offers support for Ektron s Asset Management System AMS See Also Asset Management Administration on page 484 e Metadata can now be assigned on a folder level See Also Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 i Summary Table of Contents What s New in the 5 0 Release c cecceceecescecceceecneeeseeees i Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET cseceeceeeeeeeeees G tting Started sccpeastrciisnsesctnacnaan
250. evels XML Content Folder What is Moved When content is moved it inherits permissions and workflows from the destination folder Also the Quicklink for the content is moved in the library to the destination folder However the Quicklink remains the same that is the default template doesn t change You can update this by editing the Quicklink This procedure in described in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks Moving Content To move content to another folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to move as described in Viewing Content on page 46 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 51 Managing Content 2 Click the Move Content button 3 The Move Content screen is displayed 4 From the drop down list choose the content folder into which to move the content Move Contents of Folder Content Move to Folder p gt Human_Resources V Title danish Greeting V Home Page 04 Dec i 04 Dec V Private Cont 03 Mar TS Cinnart Dana m A 97 Min Click the Move Content button G3 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK to continue The content is moved to the specified content folder and the destination folder is displayed with the content that was moved Ono Moving Several Content Items at Once To move multiple content ite
251. ew foreign language content with content from a source language then translate the content manually This copying should facilitate the translation For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained After signing in to Ektron CMS400 NET you copy content into new content of a different language by either e navigating the Web site or e accessing the Workarea and navigating the folder structure After copying the original content translate it into the new language then delete the original text Both procedures are described below Accessing Content via the Web Site 1 Navigate to a page on which you can select the site language See Also Viewing Your Site in Another Language on page 315 2 Select the language into which you want to translate the content 3 Navigate to content that you want to translate You must have privileges to add content to this folder See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 320 Multi Language Support Right click within the content s border and a small menu appears Click the Add New Language option CS The original language content appea
252. experience Our support department is available to help you in all collecting We invite you to review all of our extensive online docu questions and inquiries can be answered using this information All repairs and returns must have a Return Authorization Number f RC International To obtain an RMA number or if you require inform please contact our support department at support cms300samplesite com response within 24hrs or phone 1 800 555 5555 9am to Spm EST Copyright 2003 Ektron Inc Sample Site Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 116 Private Content amp Memberships Making a Folder Private NOTE You can only set content to private when inheritance is broken To make a content folder private follow these steps 1 Access the permissions table for a content folder or content in your Workarea as described in Setting Permissions on page 78 2 Check the box that says This content in this folder is private and is NOT viewable on the public Web site 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK The content or folder is now private Memberships What are Membership Users or User Groups Users and user groups who can view private content after log in are given membership status When a membership user logs in he can only view content all other functionality is disabled Once logged in only a logout button is displayed Membership groups are used to group sim
253. ext on each image but do not change its name WARNING If you change an image s name this procedure will not work 4 Wherever the image is referenced in your template or Web page replace the current reference with this img src images lt Contentlanguage gt image name For example img src images lt Contentlanguage gt companylogo jpg When a visitor to your Web site selects a language then navigates to the page with the image the content language variable comes into play It uses the visitor s language selection value to identify the folder that contains images in that language That image then appears on the page To continue the above example if a user views the site in German the code that invokes the image translates to this img src images 1031 companylogo jpg Resolving Conversion Issues IMPORTANT This section is only relevant to Web sites that upgrade to Ektron CMS400 NET Release 4 7 or higher and which prior to the upgrade had content in more than one language If your site does not meet both criteria you can ignore this section When you upgrade to 4 7 or higher the Database Upgrade utility prompts you to select a language All content in your site is then assigned that language Prior to Release 4 7 content did not have a language attribute If all content is not in the selected language you must resolve that discrepancy For example assume for the sake of simplicity
254. fault Delete Task e User Group Name Create Task Redirect Task Edit Aliases Administrators Iv lv Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 425 URL Aliasing For more information on setting permissions for user groups see Viewing the Users in a User Group on page 111 Adding a Base Reference to a Template When aliasing a Web page you must add a reference to the base URL into the lt Heaa gt section of the template Otherwise any relative links on the page use the alias as the base URL For example you have the file winners gif on a Web page The page s URL is nttp www ekexample com baseball team aspx id 37 The alias for this page S http www ekexample com 2004 worldchamps aspx When the page tries to find winners gif it looks in the 2004 directory The page should look in the paseba11 directory because that is where the file is located Here is the syntax used in the lt eaa gt lt BASE HREF baseURL TARGET WindowName gt Here is an example lt HEAD gt lt BASE HREF http www ekexample com baseball gt lt HEAD gt Assigning a Manual URL Alias There are two ways to manually assign an alias e Use the Page Name Maintenance screen This method is for administrators only e Use the Alias tab in View Content area of the content This method can be used by content editors or administrators Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revis
255. fault Web page after sign in The default values are automatically applied to all new users and to all existing users when you You can also force these values on all users removing their ability to personalize them Width If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a higher resolution such as 1280 x 1024 The default value for this setting is 790 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 22 Modifying the Application Setup Screen Field Description Height If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a higher resolution such as 1280 x 1024 The default value for this setting is 580 Display button text in the Check this box if you want any button s caption text to appear in the title bar screen title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after login If you want one page in your Web site
256. fficeDocuments gt lt add key PdfDirectory value C omniformat watch gt lt add key OutputDirectory value C pdfoutput gt NOTE These are the default key and value settings If you change any folder locations during installation you need to change the corresponding values 5 Navigate to the Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Internet Information Services 6 Click Web Sites gt Default Web Site gt Internet Information Services Internet Information Services comnts a ue loca J Web Sites bate ri Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 498 Asset Management Administration 7 Right click the EktronPDFGenerator folder and choose Properties gt Internet Information Services File lt Action View Help S r gt eau CMS300Sample_OLD Name 8 CMS400Example F 1SHelp Byte xtronPcicenerato ppoe h 5 ewebeditpro4 Bi Open Dil Br nin WebApplication1 ANNS tart _private New bU _vti_cnf All Tasks gt a _vtilog i _vti_pvt Delete 2Download _vti_script Rename _dient GQ _vti_txt Refresh lanagement 2 Default SMTP Virtual Serve Properties o Opens property sheet for the current se Click the Directory Security tab In the Anonymous access and authentication control area click edit 10 Verify that Anonymous access is checked
257. for the folder you want to edit as described in Accessing the Folder Properties Screen on page 32 2 Click the Edit button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 33 Managing Content Folders 3 The Edit Properties screen for the content folder is displayed Edit Properties for the folder Content We m Foldername Content Description ee o oO Style Sheet filename for this folder leave blank to inherit CMS300Sample lefault css Template filename for this folder leave blank to inherit CMS300Sample index asp Select an existing template here gt XML Configuration T Inherit XML Configuration None HTML A 4 Make the necessary changes to the content folder s properties Use the following table to assist you Fields on the Edit Content Folder Screen Field Description Folder name Edit the name of the content folder Note You cannot change the root folder name Description Edit the description of the content folder Style Sheet filename for this folder leave blank to inherit Specify a style sheet that defines the styles of the content within the content folder Or leave this field blank to inherit the style sheet from the parent content folder This style sheet affects content while being edited but has no effect on how the content appears on your Web site To set or edit the style sheet that determines how y
258. fore beginning this procedure make sure e the correct language for the content is enabled See Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 e metadata has been defined for the new language See Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 1 Within Ektron CMS400 NET navigate to the View Content screen on content item 4 2 From the Add drop down list select French Danish German Standard 3 Ektron CMS400 NET creates a French edition of the content 4 Check in that edition of the content 5 Delete the English edition of the content Scenario 2 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 344 Multi Language Support Prior to 4 7 your site had English and French content id numbers 3 and 4 that presented the same content in each language You want to leave the English content alone create a French edition of that content with the same id number then delete the French content The advantage of this solution is that both editions of the content have a single id number So when a site visitor selects a language and navigates to that page Ektron CMS400 NET displays the edition of the content for the selected language To resolve this create a French edition of the English content copy the French content then delete the French content Before Upgrade Conient id Language Actual attribute language 1 not available English 2 not avail
259. found in a regular Ektron CMS400 NET URL such as id 43 With Automatic URL Aliasing you can alias all content at once For more information on Automatic URL Aliasing see Automatic URL Aliasing on page 415 Manual URL Aliasing lets you choose the URL and extension that you would like to use With Manual URL Aliasing you must assign an alias to each content item individually You can also assign several aliases to any content item then pick one to be the primary alias For more information on Manual URL Aliasing see Manual Aliasing on page 418 Automatic URL Aliasing People looking for information on your Web site typically use search engines such as Google com to find pages with the desired content On rare occasions some older search engines work better without the URL parameters that make up an Ektron CMS400 NET Web page name If this becomes a problem use the Automatic URL Aliasing feature which creates a page name that search engines easily recognize The new name includes the template and the page s ID values When you use the Automatic URL Aliasing feature Ektron CMS400 NET makes the following changes e A delimiter of ext indicates the start of each parameter e URL parameters follow each delimiter Here is an example of aliasing content Original URL 400Intranet mycalendars aspx id 2 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 415 URL Aliasing Aliased version 400Intranet
260. fresh the user on these screens to copy AD group information into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups on page 462 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 452 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Removing Users from a Group If you delete a user from an AD group the user is automatically removed from the associated Ektron CMS400 NET group the next time the user s information is updated as explained in After Integration is Enabled on page 446 Adding User Groups Once AD integration is enabled you can only add new user groups in the AD In Ektron CMS400 NET use the Search Active Directory for Groups screen to copy an AD user group to Ektron CMS400 NET You can only add groups that do not already exist in Ektron CMS400 NET This procedure is described in Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 448 Adding a User to a Group You cannot add a user to a user group within Ektron CMS400 NET you must do so in the Active Directory Replacing a User Group If you realize that you have associated the wrong AD user group with an Ektron CMS400 NET user group you can replace the user group Follow these steps to do so 1 From the left side of the Workarea click User Groups Click the user group that you want to replace Click the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Group with Different AD Group button 9 4 Select a grou
261. g on page 425 To learn about the task fields in the lower section of the screen see Task Permissions on page 266 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 111 Managing Users amp User Groups View Users in Group Administrators a Username Lastname Firstname Language admin Administrator Application App Default E Group Name Create Task Redirect Task Delete Task Edit Aliases Administrators M M M E Editing a User Group When editing a User Group you can only change its name NOTE You cannot edit the default Administrators and Everyone user groups To edit a user group follow these steps 1 Access the View Users in Group screen for the user group you want to edit as described in Viewing the Users in a User Group on page 111 Click the User Group you want to edit The View Users In Group screen is displayed Click the Edit button C The Edit User Group screen is displayed Make the necessary changes Click the Update button E DW o oe Ie Deleting a User Group When you do not need a User Group anymore you can delete it from the system NOTE The default Administrators and Everyone user groups cannot be deleted To delete a user group follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 112 Managing Users amp User Groups 1 Access the View Users in Group screen for the user group you want
262. g run Net Stop IISAdmin and Net Start W3SVC from the DOS prompt before trying to save the settings again Ektron strongly recommends configuring a secure socket layer SSL especially if you are using Active Directory Integration SSL encrypts passwords that are otherwise sent as clear text to the Ektron CMS400 NET server See SSL Support in the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual for more information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 439 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Active Directory Integration This chapter covers the following topics How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 440 Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 441 Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration on page 443 Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET on page 443 User Groups on page 447 The Screens of the Active Directory Feature on page 454 Setup Guidelines on page 468 Disabling AD Integration on page 470 How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET does not write to the AD it only reads from it This results in the following changes to how user information is handled within Ektron CMS400 NET Once you enable AD integration all changes to user and user group information must be made in the AD the Ektron CMS400 NET Edit User and User Gro
263. g On Io Last Name a Accountis locked out Password Account options Confirm po I User must change password at next logon Pwd I User cannot change password liebe I Password never expires App Default z I Store password using reversible encryption Language E Mail Account expires smi ektron com Address Never I Disable E Mail Notifications Emails for this application are cur disabled End of Thursday Cancel Apply 4 Determine which users should be in which groups and make sure those relationships exist in both Ektron CMS400 NET and AD If you have multiple domains in your Active Directory Forest decide if you want Ektron CMS400 NET to reference all domains or if you want to choose a specific one You will use this when completing the Domain field of the Active Directory Setup Screen Determine if you want users to automatically be added at log in or if you want to manually add them yourself You will use this when completing the Enable automatic addition of user from AD field of the Active Directory Setup Screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 469 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature 7 Determine if you want user groups to be associated at log in or if you want to manually associate them You will use this when completing the Enable automatic addition of user to groups field of the Active Directory Setup Scr
264. g Which XML Elements are Indexed on indexing capability page 153 3 Setup the search screen Search Dialog Setup on page 155 and Editing the Search Labels on page 157 4 Have your Web developer set up a The Ektron CMS400 Developer s manual section page to display a search screen and Standard ASP NET Methods gt IndexSearch and a results screen IndexSearchDisplay Setting up a Developer defined Search To set up a developer defined search which defines both the criteria and the results page use the ecmIndexSearchCollectionDisplay function This is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s manual section Standard ASP NET Methods gt IndexSearchCollectionDisplay You can also setup a developer defined search using the IndexSearch Server Control For more Information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s manual section Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt List of Server Controls gt IndexSearch Server Control Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed You can index the following types of fields e Checkbox e Plain Text e Choices e List Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 153 XML IndexingManaging XML e Calculated e Calendar To enable indexing for any field on an XML form follow these steps 1 Select an XML configuration that you want to index See Also Accessing XML Configurations on page 130
265. gner DAU le Ee When you begin to create a data entry screen you are in design mode To test the screen as the user will see it click the Data Entry button 2 To switch back to Data Entry mode and modify the data entry screen click the Data Designer button 2 Designing a Screen To design a screen that captures XML data you 1 Ask your system administrator to enable a version of eWebEditPro XML that includes the Data Designer The administrator should refer to the Data Designer chapter of the Developer s Reference Guide 2 For each field on the screen select a field type and place it on the screen Inserting a Field Type on page 162 explains the kind of field that each button represents You can also use eWebEditPro XML s rich formatting capabilities to design the screen For example you can format text and use tables images and hyperlinks to guide the user through the data entry process Below is a sample screen created with the Data Designer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 161 Using the Data Designer Apply Style Normal v Avia Helvetica 2000 89 AW BZ UA 2 sic Information tures of Property cription floor unit w balcony and one deeded garage space and central air S 31710 Bedrooms p ul Baths fi al B rar Built Lot Size Sq Ft Interior Size Sq Ft p28 Last Ye i ai Inserting a Field Type eW
266. gt lt table width 100 gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt strong gt Job Title lt strong gt lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select root jobposting job title gt lt td gt You can use this information to create your display XSLT Deleting XML Configurations You can delete XML configurations that are no longer needed To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 2 Click the XML configuration you want to delete 3 The View XML Configuration screen is displayed 4 Click the Delete button I Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 148 Managing XML 5 Aconfirmation message is displayed Microsoft Internet Explorer oe eet 6 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 149 XML IndexingManaging XML XML Indexing XML Indexing makes it easy to search through the XML information collected by your Web site and display the results on a Web page The results appear as a list of topic titles optionally followed by the content summary Collection of information has never been easier The Data Designer lets you choose which XML fields to index You can also validate those fields to be numbers dates Boolean or string values After you identify the information to be indexed a search dialog is automatically created
267. guage Approval Chains on page 336 approval chain Type language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 88 Setting Approval Chains Adding Approvers To add a user or user group to the approval chain follow these steps 1 Access the approval table as described in Viewing a Folder s Approval Chain on page 87 2 Select the language of the approval chain The chain only applies to content in this language 3 Click the Add button EB 4 The Add Approvals screen appears NOTE Only users and user groups with permissions to the folder appear See Adding a User or User Group to the Permissions Table on page 83 for more information 5 Click the user or user group to add to the approval chain 6 A confirmation message appears 7 Click OK NOTE If you assign a user group to an approval chain only one member of the group needs to approve the content not all members Editing the Approval Order After you assign approvers to a folder you may want to adjust the approval order Place the user or group with final review at the end of the approval chain that is the highest number For example if you have a content contributor whose edits must be approved by a department head and the Webmaster has final review of all content the approval order would look like this User or Group Name Approval Order Content contributor 1 Department Head 2 Webm
268. guration Manager on page 479 2 Click the Edit button The Edit Existing Configuration screen appears Use the following table to guide you through each field Fields on the Edit Existing Configuration Screen Field Description Configuration name Update the configuration name You use this name to identify which configuration to log into CMS Location Enter the full path to the Ektron CMS400 NET version that you will access via this configuration For example http bills_computer cms400example The default location is the local PC http localhost CMS400Example Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 480 Ektron Explorer Field Description Authentication default Read Only Access Check this checkbox if when accessing Ektron Explorer via this configuration you want to submit the default user name and password In this case you can view all CMS content but not edit If you want to edit CMS content change the CMS login name and password to that of a user with editing privileges CMS Login Only available if default is not checked Enter your CMS username as entered in the CMS Add Edit User screen See Also Creating a New User on page 106 Within Ektron Explorer you will have the same privileges for working with content that you have in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 CMS Password O
269. hains on page 87 e Inheritance and the Approval Chain on page 87 e Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder on page 87 e Editing an Approval Chain For Content on page 91 e The Approval Method on page 91 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 86 Setting Approval Chains Examples of Approval Chains An approval chain lets you control how and when your Web site is updated For example if your Webmaster needs to approve every new content item or update of an existing item he would be last user in every approval chain and exert total control over the site Alternatively you could set up a less centralized organization where each department head controls his section To accommodate this set up an approval chain for each department and assign the department head as the last person in the chain On the opposite extreme you can delete the approval chain for a content item or folder In this case every content item in that folder is published as soon as a user submits it for publication Inheritance and the Approval Chain By default every content folder and item inherits the approval chain from its parent folder To modify an approval chain either modify the parent s approval chain or break inheritance This procedure is described in Inheritance on page 79 Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder Before you can edit an approval chain you first have to view it View
270. he Allow Field on page 217 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 173 Using the Data Designer Field Description Appearance Click Show border and caption if you want to surround the fields in this group with a box You can also create a caption to appear in the top line of the box Click No border if you do not want to surround the fields in this group with a box Caption If desired enter text to describe this group of fields on the data entry screen For example y Address After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Group Box field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Tabular Data 222 The Tabular data button inserts a table into which you can place other types of fields It s similar to a group box Tabular data s main advantage over a group box is that it lets you place fields in columns see below items o c In i ipti r unit Cost Description stock Qty Price pe 1 O Yes Ono n m r Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 174 Using the Data Designer NOTE Group Box on page 170 describes many features that also ap
271. he maximum number of results you want to display 0 unlimited Note Enter zero 0 to display unlimited or all results Click the Apply button for the changes to take effect 6 The screen is refreshed with the updated summary list is displayed 7 Make additional changes to the List Summary Web Part or click the OK button to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Managing the Summary List NOTE When logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint you may manage the summary list displayed by the list summary Web Part To do so follow these steps 1 Log in to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via the Login Web Part see Login Web Part on page 380 for more information If the summary list Web Part is in a different zone than the login Web Part it may be necessary to refresh the summary list Web Part s zone Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 379 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 2 The summary list displayed by the summary list Web Part is surrounded by a colored border TistSunnnary List Summary Web Part Contact Ektron Greeting Home Page Content Introducing the RC Redstar Login Information Support Page Trinity In Line Pipe 3 Perform actions by using the floating toolbar or by clicking the Workarea button to access the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Login Web Part The Login Web Pa
272. he search form illustrated below NOTE You can also edit the field labels using the Edit Index Search screen However on that screen the Dropdown and Multiple checkboxes are not available See Also Editing the Search Labels on page 157 XPath Label froot products product name Product Name M Dropdown M Multiple froot products specifications length length tw froot products specifications mtbf MTBF o M Multiple froot products specifications datemanufactured Date Manufactured The information on this screen is explained below Screen Description section Xpath The xpath to each indexed field Only indexed fields appear Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 155 XML IndexingManaging XML Screen Description section Label Enter the text that describes the field on the search screen Below is an example of how the labels appear on the Search screen No Selection a RC Cheetah Length No Selection gt MTBF No Selection gt Date Manufactured No Selection Submit Search Product Name If the field type is e checkbox a check box appears on the Search screen e choices or list all values appear on the Search screen e calendar the user can choose a specific date any range of dates or beginning and end dates on the Search screen e plain text with a whole number specified in the validation criteria the user can choose a specific number any range
273. he search results search display aspx Text Box Size The size of the search text box when displayed 25 Maximum The maximum number of characters the search text box 200 Characters accepts Button Text The text displayed on the search button Search Font Face The font style of the search box options Verdana Font Color The font color of the search box options 808080 Font Size The font size of the search box options 2 Horizontal The orientation of the search text box and options No e No search options align vertically e Yes search options align horizontally Return Maximum Determines the maximum number of search results displayed 0 Results Note Enter zero 0 to display unlimited or all results Return Style Info An inline style applied to search result hyperlinks For example backgroundcolor cccccc border solid blue lpt Return Show Specify whether the search results will display the date and time No Date they were last edited Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 385 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 5 Click the Apply button 6 The screen is refreshed and the updated search Web Part is displayed 7 Make additional changes to the search Web Part or click the OK button to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Performing a Search When the search Web Part is inserted into your SharePoint Portal page you can perform a search T
274. here you can update the user information Alternatively you could Go to the View User Information screen Select the user whose AD name changed Click the Associate the Ektron CMS400 NET user with Different AD user toolbar button 4 Select the AD user and domain See Also Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users on page 460 Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET does not write to the AD This means that you can only change the Username and Domain fields from the AD You can change the First Name Last Name email Address User Language and Disable email Notifications fields on the Ektron CMS400 NET Edit User screen Deleting Users See Deleting Users on page 447 Replacing a User See Replacing a User on page 447 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 473 User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature IMPORTANT If you replace a user in user authentication only mode the user s first name last name and email address are not overwritten with information in the active directory User Groups User authentication mode has no effect on user groups To learn more about user groups see Managing User Groups on page 110 The Screens of the Active Directory Feature in User Authentication Mode Since the scope of user authentication mode is limited only some fields on the AD screens are used For example on the
275. hich items will be uploaded Adding a New Load Balancing Folder To add a new load balancing folder in the Ektron CMS400 NET library follow these steps 1 Access the view load balance settings screen as described in Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen on page 100 2 Click the Add button EH on View Library Load Balance Settings screen 3 The Add a Library Load Balancing Path screen is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 101 Managing Library Items Add a Library Load Balance Path Images This path is for image assets Files This path is for file assets Load Balance Path oo o M Make Directory Relative to this Web site CMSSample 4 Use the following table to help you complete the form Field Description Images Files Specify if the load balance path folder will be for images or files Load Balance Path Enter the path of the folder Make Relative If the folder or virtual folder resides under your Ektron CMS400 NET site root check off the box to make the path relative to that Otherwise remove the check 5 Click the Save button E Editing a Library Load Balance Path If the Web path for a load balance folder has changed you may edit it at any time To edit a load balance path follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Load Balance Settings screen as described in Accessing Library Load Balancing
276. ial function which lets users add new content without logging in To accomplish this your Web site developer places a form on your Web site which lets users submit content without logging in Here is a sample Add Content form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 60 Adding Content Programmatically Add Content Programatically Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O O BRaG A xe e e B SH DB http 127 0 0 1 cms300samplefaddcontent asp Address Add Content Programmatically To CMS Username admin Password admin Domain when using Active Directory Title This is the content title fas text Comment This is the comment as text Content lt p gt This is the lt strong gt HTML lt strong gt content lt p gt lt p gt fas HML content Summary lt p gt This is the lt strong gt HTML lt strong gt summary lt p gt lt p gt fas HML content Meta Data Title Adda content through asp example as text Meta Data ladd content asp example Keywords separated by Language 1 2 for English 1031 for German 1036 for French Patan IA 11 z ar Your Web site developer can customize this form to better suit your needs See the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual for additional information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manu
277. ich an XML configuration has been applied This feature is designed for HTML forms not XML To learn about XML forms see Using the Data Designer on page 158 4 Click the Add Form button Ea 5 The Add Form screen appears 6 Enter information using the following table as a reference Field Description Required Title Title used to reference form within the Yes Workarea Description Extended description of form No Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 234 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Required Form Data Specify what to do with the form data No Your choices are mailto database or both See Mailto or Database Form on page 229 Mail Properties These fields are used in the email that is generated when a mailto form is submitted To let the user override any value while completing the form see Letting the User Override email Values on page 235 To email address to which the form will be Yes sent From email address to appear in the email s No From field CC email address to which a copy of the No form will be sent Subject Text to appear in email s Subject field No Preamble Beginning text of email could be used No for entire text Send Data as Check off to submit form as XML No XML instead of plain text See Also Sending Data as XML on page 244 7 Click the Save button
278. idate the contents of the XML file The following table explains possible results when clicking the verification button Display Result Description Ly Verified The file passes all verification parameters Fi Not Verified The file either e Does not exist in the location speci fied e Does not contain well formed XML Review current settings Ensure the file is in the proper location and that it contains well formed XML Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 135 Assigning XML Configurations After you create an XML configuration you can assign it to either content or a content folder When assigned to a content folder all content in the folder use that configuration Managing XML Where Can XML Configurations be Assigned An XML configuration can be assigned in three locations Location in Ektron CMS400 NET To assign an XML configuration to a See Also Edit Folder Properties screen folder Folder Properties on page 31 Add Subfolder screen folder Adding Subfolders on page 36 View Properties for Content screen content Content Properties on page 57 Here is the XML Configuration field displayed in all locations XML Configuration Inherit XML Configuration None HTML alc In each location the process of assigning an XML configuration is identical An XML configuration can be inherited from the parent folder o
279. ield Description Display name Enter text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below Check if you are over 65 Default value If you want this field to be checked when the screen first appears click True Otherwise click False Caption Plain Text ab Enter text to guide the user s response to this field To continue the above example the caption would be Check if you are over 65 After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Check Box field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted free text response NOTE If a plain text field tries to perform a numerical calculation with a value that is blank or contains letters Nan appears in the field Naw stands for not a number If a plain text field tries to divide by zero Infinity appears Plain Text Field vs Rich Area Field The following capabilities are available with a plain text field but not a rich area field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 184 Using the Data Designer e You can adjust the field s width by
280. iewing Metadata Definitions on page 72 2 Click the Delete button 1 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 73 Metadata A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Another confirmation message is displayed Click OK oF Oni oe O Assigning Metadata to a Folder After creating a searchable metadata definition see Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 assign it to folders whose content will use it On each folder s properties screen you determine which metadata definitions can be used It may be some all or none of the metadata definitions set up in the Metadata Definitions screen The section of the folder properties screen used to assign metadata appears below Only metadata definitions whose Assigned box is checked can be completed by users working with content in the folder Metadata Custom Fields available for folder Content Assigned Required Name wv E title Iv E keywords Iv O description Iv E page Iv C robots Iv a Part number See Also Metadata on page 62 Then while creating or updating content the user can insert the metadata information via the Metadata tab illustrated below The user can only enter metadata values for the types of metadata assigned to the content s folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 74 Metadata Title cms Developer Englist Content Summary Meta Data Schedule
281. ign to a user a task about the content Managing Tasks on page 246 E Edit Properties Change XML configuration assigned and 9 Content Properties whether content is searchable on page 57 Back Go to previous window E View View If you can view content in more than one language language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current content into new Translating select select content and translate it to selected Content on language language language page 319 Editing Content You can edit content in any of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you e submitted for your approval Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 49 Managing Content Ektron CMS400 NET has two types of content e HTML content no XML configuration assigned to content s folder e XML content XML configuration assigned to content s folder To edit content follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to edit A list of content in the folder is displayed 2 Select the language of the content you want to edit View Contents of Folder Content Title Contact Ektron 1 Greeting 1 Home Page Content 1 v 2 J ate AA MK Hk an rt Oa RR AANA AR ARA 3 Click the content you want to edit 4 Click the Edit button CY 5 The Edit Content
282. ilar membership users See Also Private Content on page 114 Membership User User Group Example A typical membership scenario is a Partners section of your Web site that contains private content for partners only However you don t want partners to perform any Ektron CMS400 NET related activities You can set up a membership user group to include users from your partner s organization The group is given read only permissions to the Partners section which contains private content Any partner can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and view the private content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 117 Private Content amp Memberships Accessing the Membership Module Folder Use the Membership Module folder to enter and edit membership users and user groups To access the folder follow these steps Navigate to the Workarea 2 From the left frame of the Workarea click the Modules folder button 3 The Modules folder hierarchy is displayed Click the Membership folder to view its subfolders Folder Name More Information Users Membership Users on page 118 User Groups Membership User Groups on page 121 Membership Users The following sections explain all actions that may be performed on membership users via the following topics e Adding Membership Users on page 118 e Viewing Membership User Information on page 119 e Editing Membership Users on page 119
283. in Accessing the Workarea on page 6 In the folder tree on the left side of the Workarea follow the path Settings gt Configuration gt XML Configuration The View XML Configurations screen is displayed View XML Configurations Title Job Postings RC Cars RC Planes ID Date Modified 3 1 2002 11 4 08 55 Administrator Application 1 1 2002 11 4 08 19 Administrator Application 2 1 2002 11 4 08 44 Administrator Application Last Editor Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 130 Managing XML From here you can view add edit and delete XML configurations Managing XML on page 128 Adding a New XML Configuration When adding a new XML configuration you have two options Using the WYSIWYG Data Designer recommended Using external XML files for example XSLTs schemas etc NOTE To create a new XML configuration by copying and editing an existing one see Creating XML Configurations Based on Existing Configurations on page 146 The following sections explain both methods Adding an XML Configuration Using the Data Designer To add an XML configuration using the WYSIWYG Data Designer follow these steps 1 a AOUN Access the XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 Click the Add XML Configuration button oa The Add XML Configuration screen is displayed Enter a Title for the XML configuration Click
284. ing a Folder s Approval Chain To view a folder s approval chain follow these steps 1 Select a folder from the left frame of the Workarea 2 Using the View field and languages drop down list select the language of the approval chain you want to view 3 Click the Properties button gf 4 Click the Approvals button 5 The approval chain appears in the lower section of the screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 87 Setting Approval Chains View Approvals for the Folder Content nui English US Approval Method Force All Approvers User or Group Name ID jedit 2 5 Approval Order 1 This screen shows the following information about the approval chain e its language every user and user group in the approval chain e the approval order the approval method See also Changing the Approval Method on page 92 toolbar buttons for modifying the approval chain and method Actions You can Perform from the Approvals Screen From this screen you can perform these actions Action Button See this section for details Add approvers E Adding Approvers on page 89 Remove approvers Deleting Approvers on page 90 Change the order of users in the SJ Editing the Approval Order on page 89 approval chain Z Change the approval method E Changing the Approval Method on page 92 Change the language of the Approval Multi Lan
285. ing form processing information e Creating new form content To manage the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site form content within SharePoint follow these steps 1 Log in to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via the Login Web Part see Login Web Part on page 380 for more information NOTE If the form content Web Part is in a different zone than the login Web Part it may be necessary to refresh the zone that includes the form Web Part Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 375 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 2 The form content displayed by the form content Web Part is surrounded by a colored border Form Content Block Web Part SIS SCPUIILEIGHT Edit Ektron Integration Shared Page First Name Last Name ill Email Ektron Product Comments 3 Perform actions by using the floating toolbar or by clicking on the Workarea button to access your Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Summary List Web Part The summary list or list summary Web Part displays a list of summaries for some or all content in a specified Ektron CMS400 NET content folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 376 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Here is an example of a summary list Web Part being displayed in the SharePoint Portal Server List Summary Web Part CMS 400 ListSummar
286. ing to the page like a business user or access the Workarea From there you can perform all system activities such as configuring and viewing every setting of Ektron CMS400 NET To access the Workarea follow these steps 1 Log in to your Web site as described in Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 2 Click the Workarea button workarea on a login page ora Workarea toolbar button Gp The Workarea has a Windows Explorer like interface Smart Desktop for John Edit D Smart Desktop 3 Tasks Content Awaiting Approval 0 HE Reports L Content Currently Checked Out 1 Z Tasks 0 E Content To Expire 0 When you first access your Workarea your Smart Desktop is displayed The smart desktop contains useful information that pertains to you Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 6 Getting Started NOTE In the Application Setup screen you can determine which screen appears when you access the Workarea See Also Set smart desktop as the start location in the Workarea on page 23 The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major components in relation to the Smart Desktop display Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map Smart Desktop Pi Tasks SE Reports content reports content folders form folders library folders Modules a Collections Ea Menus rn Settings ae Calendars I H
287. ing you to turn your Web site into a two way street Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Ektron lets you create an online dialog with visitors Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Additional form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 225 Working with HTML Forms Title ETE Request Form Jali US e Apply Style Normal TimesNewRoman 3 12 pt e A B Z U gt QRBBE 44 wa Ee els Support Request Form This is a sample support request form for RC International Validation is set for most fields for Name cannot be blank Email format as emal yourcompany x Product Select Product 7 must select product from list Purchase Date format as MMDD YYYY Purchase Price format as DDD CC This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics e Overview of Form Processing on page 227 e The Structure of Form Data on page 227 e Form Permissions on page 230 e Preparing the Server to Send email on page 231
288. inistrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 96 Managing Library Items Editing Library Properties To edit library properties follow these steps Go to the Library Properties screen as explained in Accessing the Library Properties Screen on page 95 2 Click the Edit button Library properties are described in the table below Field Description Image Extensions The types of image files that a content contributor can upload to the library You can add as many image file extensions as you want or have none If no extensions appear no one can upload image files to the specified folder Image Upload Directory Specifies where the uploaded images are saved on the Web server By default the image upload directory is Web root ek_sitepath uploadedimages The ek_sitepath value is set in the Web config file Note You must create the directory in your Web root manually before adding it in CMS400 NET See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual section Managing the web config File Make Directory Relative to this Web site If you want to specify the image upload directory s location as relative to your Web site root check this box Your Web site root s location appears to the right of Make Directory Relative to this Web site Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and you need to set up that fo
289. ion Preview Title Testing using external XML ID 20 Description Editor Information Edit XSLT Save XSLT Advanced Configuration Yalidation Information XML Schema The View XML Configuration screen has three tabs e Properties Tab on page 140 e Display Information Tab on page 142 e Preview Tab on page 142 Each tab is explained below After viewing you can perform the following actions on the XML configuration Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 139 Managing XML Button Name Description More Information Configure Full Text Search Edit search screen labels Editing XML Configurations on page 143 lt Cy Edit Edit an XML configuration Editing XML Configurations on page 143 Pd Edit Data Open the Data Designer Editing Data Design Packages se Design on page 143 rl Add XML Create a new XML configuration or Adding a New XML Configuration create anew XML configuration based Configuration on page 131 on the properties of an existing one E View XSLT Display the XSLT for an XML Viewing Data Designer XSLTs Fe configuration on page 147 n Delete Delete an XML configuration Deleting XML Configurations kaj on page 148 Back Return to previous screen 9 View online help View online help Accessing Online Help on page 275 Properties Tab Field Desc
290. ion 6 426 URL Aliasing View Content Contact Ektron 4d select Aliased Page Not Defined Each method is explained below Adding a Manual Alias via the Page Name Maintenance Screen NOTE Make sure you have enabled URL Aliasing and given the administrator s group permissions for aliasing For information on Enabling URL Aliasing see Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing on page 419 For information on User Group Permissions see Viewing the Users in a User Group on page 111 1 Go to Workarea gt Settings gt Configuration gt URL Aliasing 2 Click the Page Name Maintenance button lt 3 The Page Name Maintenance screen appears CMS400 Aliased Page Name Maintenance Ei a slias Actual Content Title Status ID Lang ID Primary CMS400Sample home htm CMS400Sample sindex aspx id 30 Test A 301033 v CMS400Sample home2 htm CMS400Samplesindex aspx id 31 test 2 A 311033 v CMS400Sample ourcompany htm CMS400Sample home htm Test A 301033 x The following explains the columns on the screen Field Description Alias The URL as it appears aliased Actual The actual URL before aliasing Content Title The title of the content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 427 URL Aliasing Field Description Status The status of the content See Also Content Status on page 14 ID The content s ID number Lang ID The la
291. ion More Information Tab Cy Edit Content Edit the form s content which Editing a Form s contains the form fields Content on page 258 Post Back Edit Summary Edit the summary assigned to a Editing a Form s Message or form s content Summary on page 259 Summary Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 232 Working with HTML Forms Button or Name Description More Information Tab Metadata Edit Metadata Edit the metadata assigned to a Metadata on page 62 form s content oP View Staged Published Content Click View Staged button to view content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site E View History View and possibly restore older versions of a content bock Content History on page 55 Ei View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 85 Edit Form Properties Access Edit Form screen to change Editing a Form on Rel information about the form page 258 Cs Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 259 a Check Links Check for other content that contains Link Checking on a link to this form page 57 wa Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 265 a View Task View task information me Add Form Add a new form Creating a New Form on page 234 Pal
292. ion vnd ms excel ms powerpoint ppt ms powerpoint pot ms powerpoint pps ms project mpp application vnd ms project msaccess mdb application x msaccess mspublisher pub application x mspublisher visio vsd application vnd visio ms works wdb application vnd ms works http localhost AssetManagement ICON http localhost assetmanagement images ms word gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms word gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms excel gif application vnd ms powerpoint http localhost assetmanagement images ms powerpoint gif application vnd ms powerpoint http localhost assetmanagement images ms powerpoint gif application vnd ms powerpoint http localhost assetmanagement images ms powerpoint gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms project gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms access gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms publisher gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms visio gif http localhost assetmanagement images ms word gif ms works wks wks application vnd ms works wks _http localhost assetmanagement images ms word gif ms works wps wps application vnd ms works wps http localhost assetmanagement images ms word gif 1
293. ionActive Directory Feature The Search Active Directory for Groups screen appears Workarea nae meitigsisactive Directory for groups I 292 168 0 156 Ch HC Content Active Directory Group Domain H Library H Approvals All Domains z HC Reports H Fonts HC Users EY User Groups AY Haln Intemet 3 From the Domain pull down list select the domain from which you want to add a user group NOTE The Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain If it does you can only search for groups within that domain 4 Enter as much information as you know into the Active Directory Group field Click the Search button A new screen displays all groups that satisfy the search criteria 7 Click the check box under the Add column to add users to Ektron CMS400 NET 8 Click the Save button B Associating a User s AD Group Information with Ektron CMS400 NET When Integration is First Enabled Ektron CMS400 NET User Database Already Exists If Auto Add User To Group is checked on the Active Directory Setup screen a user s group membership is first copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400 NET or when a user logs in or is added At this time any AD group memberships overwrite Ektron CMS400 NET group memberships except the Everyone group to which all users belong Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 449 Active Director
294. irstName the user s last name in Ektron CMS400 NET By above default this is set to sn but you can change it to any AD property EmailAdadr1 Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to same reference as FirstName above Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 456 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature groups to one AD domain select that domain If you do the Search Active Directory for Users and Search Active Directory for Groups screens let you search in the selected domain only Also if any Ektron CMS400 NET user or group names include a domain for example admin saturn planets com that is excluded by your selection those users groups are flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens because the names now include an invalid domain Field Description For more information see AD Group Enter the Active Directory user group and domain Mapping the Administrator Name AD name that maps to the hard coded Ektron Group on page 451 Domain CMS400 NET administrator group If you do not have an AD user group that includes all Ektron CMS400 NET administrators you should create one and enter its name and domain here Domain If you want to restrict the search of new users and Messages Near the Top of the Active Directory Setup Screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 457 Active Directory In
295. is copied the AD information overwrites all Ektron CMS400 NET information To learn how information is updated from then on see After Integration is Enabled on page 446 If two or more AD users have the same Ektron CMS400 NET user logon name but different domains for example JDoe in Eng Acme com and JDoe in Mkt Acme com and that username JDoe also exists in Ektron CMS400 NET the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens highlight this discrepancy using the following message CMS users need to be associated with Active Directory users Click the message to proceed to the Associate Ektron CMS400 NET Users to Active Directory Users screen and associate an AD user with the Ektron CMS400 NET user See Also Associating Ektron CMS400 NET Users with Active Directory Users on page 460 Ektron CMS400 NET is Being Installed so No User Database Exists Go to the Search Active Directory for Users Screen and select AD users that will use Ektron CMS400 NET When you add a user the user information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 445 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature See Also The Search Active Directory for Users Screen on page 464 NOTE You can only select AD users that do not already exist in Ektron CMS400 NET Also the Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain If it does you c
296. is cut and pasted into the editor the editor by default removes some MS Word styles Preserving MS Word styles prevents the editor from removing them Ektron does not recommend enabling this feature Preserve MS Word Classes Similar to styles when content from MS Word is cut and pasted into the editor the editor by default removes some MS Word classes Checking this box prevents the editor from removing them Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 27 Modifying the Application Setup Screen Enable Font Buttons Here is the editor with font related buttons enabled Stam Vae ESA tna Vate a Apply Style gt Normal mete ET oa hare Disable Font Buttons Here is the editor with the font buttons disabled stam Vate ma ENa VATE Apply Style Normal X B Z U 2BRBRRAA Soo cle 5 7 e eee amp x nbsp TM Ej awh Tiate Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 28 Managing Content Folders Managing Content Folders An administrator can control every aspect of the content and the folders that hold them The controls include setting permissions approvals and adding editing publishing and deleting content Below is the content folder View Contents of Folder Content D Content F FA 4 Human Resources 3 Marketing Title Contact Ektron 1033 15 O 26
297. istrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 110 Managing Users amp User Groups Assigning Users To User Groups To add a user to a user group follow these steps 1 Access the User Groups folder in the Workarea Click the user group to which you want to add a user 3 The View Users in Group screen appears with all current members of the group NOTE When you create a new user group no user assigned to it initially Click the Add User button Users who do not belong to the group appear Click the user you want to add 4 5 6 7 Aconfirmation message is displayed 8 Click OK 9 The selected user is now a member of the selected group 0 Continue this process until you add all users into User Groups Viewing the Users in a User Group To view a list of users who are members of a user group follow these steps 1 Access the User Group folder in the administrator Workarea as described in Accessing the User Group Folder on page 106 2 Click the user group whose members you want to view 3 The View Users in Group screen appears with a list of users who are members of the group From this screen you can edit or delete user groups as well as add and remove users to and from the user group You can also assign to the group members task permissions and the ability to edit aliases by checking the boxes illustrated below For more information about editing aliases see Permissions for Manual Aliasin
298. it Since that information is not repeated here you should read that before reading this section This section consists of the following topics e Providing the Ektron Explorer Installation File to Users on page 476 e Access to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 476 e Configuring the Ektron Explorer on page 477 Providing the Ektron Explorer Installation File to Users To install Ektron Explorer users need a copy of the EktronExplorer exe file This is installed to the utilities folder within the folder to which Ektron CMS400 NET is installed By default the path to EktronExplorer exe is c program Files Ektron CMS400v50 Utilities Access to Ektron CMS400 NET By default when someone signs on to Ektron Explorer the sign in uses a special membership user EkExplorerUser This user has read only access to every folder as a membership Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 476 Ektron Explorer user So he can view all published content both public and private but not edit content To change the user who is signing in use the Configuration Manager See Also Configuring the Ektron Explorer on page 477 Configuring the Ektron Explorer When the Ektron Explorer is installed to a client PC it assumes the following information e location of Ektron CMS400 NET specified during installation e username and password a default user is created in Ektron CMS400 NET for the purpose of viewing CM
299. ity 432 blocks recognizing 9 border color meaning 10 comment adding 41 deleting 54 editing 49 folder see folder content history 55 moving one content block 51 several blocks at once 52 moving move content 50 multi language see multi language content private see private content properties tab 47 purging historical versions 35 reports 59 restoring historical versions 53 scheduling 54 searchable property 41 searching 309 options 310 setting permissions private content 114 status 14 summary inserting 41 syndication RSS 388 tasks assigning 57 toolbar buttons 48 viewing 46 XML content block adding 42 content block deleting 54 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 i custom validation data designer 220 D data design package editing 143 data designer calculated field 198 calendar field 209 checkbox field 183 choices field 191 custom validation 220 deleting a field from screen 164 design mode vs data entry m ode 160 field types 162 File Link Field 214 group box field 170 how eWebEditPro XML changes when using 159 image only field 212 plain text field 184 rich area field 189 select list field 195 steps for designing a screen 161 using 158 walkthrough of screen design 164 default application language setup information 21 difference view content toolbar button 16 display button text in title bar 23 Do Not Force All Approvers 92 E edit toolbar button 15 editor
300. iving to improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC International member Managing Historical Version For information about managing historical versions of content including e Viewing historical versions e Comparing versions e Restoring historical version see the Ektron CMS400 NET user manual section Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 56 Managing Content Content Permissions See Setting Permissions on page 78 Content Approvals See Setting Approval Chains on page 86 Link Checking The link checker button allows you to locate all content that has a link to the displayed content This feature is very useful if you decide to delete content You can use this to remove those links which will no longer work after the deletion To display all content that links to the selected content follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to execute the link checker for as described in Viewing Content on page 46 2 Click the Check Links button a 3 A search results screen displays each content item with a link to the current content 4 Click the content title to access the View Content screen for the selected content and perform the necessary actions on it Assigning Tasks to Content See the Ektron CMS400 NET Users Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Creating Tasks via Cont
301. ize similar membership users reducing the effort required to assign identical permissions to many users The following section explains membership user group management via the following topics Adding Membership User Groups on page 121 Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group on page 121 Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group on page 122 Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User Groups on page 122 Editing Membership User Group Name on page 122 Deleting User from Membership User Group on page 123 Deleting Membership User Groups on page 123 Adding Membership User Groups To create a new membership user group follow these steps 1 Access the membership user group folder as described in Accessing the Membership Module Folder on page 118 Click the Add Membership User Group button ER 2 3 The Add a New User Group screen is displayed 4 5 Enter a unique name for the group Click the Save button fj See Also Membership User Groups on page 121 Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group To view the information about a membership user group follow these steps 1 2 Access the membership user group folder as described in Accessing the Membership Module Folder on page 118 Click the membership user group you want to view Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 121 P
302. just the field width as desired Use a rich area field to let a user enter a free text response that can be formatted using the editor buttons See Also Plain Text Field vs Rich Area Field on page 184 Tip Unlike many other fields the Rich Area dialog box does not prompt for a field caption You can still enter text describing the field on the editor screen before or after you insert a Rich Area field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 189 Using the Data Designer Adjusting the Width of a Rich Area Field Dialog Box Note that unlike a plain text field the width of a rich area field cannot be adjusted It occupies the entire screen width If a user enters more text than fits on one line the rich area field automatically adds more lines To limit the width of a rich area field place it in a table cell In this case the field is as wide as the cell If you want to insert default text into a rich area field insert it after you place the field in the editor Rich Area Field x Name Field1 P Indeved Display name Field 1 Use Allow May not be removed Only one May be removed More than one Cannot be blank Cancel Fields on the Rich Area Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field See Also The Name
303. k the Data Design Mode button 2 at the top of the screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 144 Managing XML 5 The Edit Data Design Package screen displays the current package itle Job Postings Select a style sheet that you wish to apply for this design Select a style sheet v S BARB Ma S ooa aa we uc AA A fil fa E nbsp TM 2 pel Syel Normal TimesNewRoman 3 12 pt g A B Z U a 2 wi J t i 7 Het ER iii E E o Job Title Job Number Description mamo The successful candidate must possess following attributes 6 Make the necessary changes to the Data Design package in the editor See Using the Data Designer on page 158 for information about creating XSLTs using the Data Designer 7 Click the Update button E Editing an XML Configuration Created with External Files 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 Click the XML configuration you want to edit The View XML configuration screen is displayed Click the Edit button C The Edit XML Configuration screen is displayed ae VN Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 145 Managing XML 6 Edit the necessary fields to update the XML configuration See XML Configuration Fields on page 134 7 Click the Upd
304. ke additional changes to the Calendar Web Part Or click OK to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Managing Calendars and Calendar Events When you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server you can manage your calendars and calendar events Actions that you can perform from the SharePoint server include Adding new event calendars Editing and deleting existing event calendars Adding new calendar events Editing viewing and deleting existing calendar events as well as other actions Collection Web Part Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 368 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration The collection Web Part displays a collection that has been created in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Here is an example of a collection Web Part displayed in the SharePoint Portal Server Collection Web Part Collection Plastic Molder 123 Oct 30 2002 RC International is looking for an experienced plastics molder GV WON Servo Control Engineer 124 Oct 29 2002 RC International is looked for a highly skilled servo control engineer to join our team In addition to displaying the collection in the portal if you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint you can perform all actions related to collections NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for information about adding a login Web Part and
305. klink for this alias 11 Click the Save button 8 Adding a Manual URL Alias via the Alias Tab NOTE Make sure you have enabled URL Aliasing and given the administrator s group permissions for aliasing For information on Enabling URL Aliasing see Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing on page 419 For information on User Group Permissions see Viewing the Users in a User Group on page 111 On the Alias tab Alias Name has the message Not Defined There are two reasons this message appears e No alias is defined e An alias is defined in Page Name Maintenance but it is not set to be a primary alias 1 In the Workarea click the content you want to work with 2 Click the Edit button L The Edit Content screen appears Edit Content Title test 2 English U S Content Summary Alias Comment Alias Name CMS400Sample htm 3 Click the Alias tab 4 Inthe Alias Name field enter the name you want to use for an alias Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 429 URL Aliasing 5 Save and publish the content NOTE An alias goes live only after content is published Editing a Manual URL Alias You can edit an alias by going to the Page Name Maintenance screen This lets you change the alias name and Quicklink properties You can also change the primary alias if you have more than one for a content item To edit a Manual URL Ali
306. ktron CMS400 NET what s next This chapter explains several resources supplied by Ektron to help get your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site up and running Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site See Logging In and Out in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Changing Images Used for Logging In and Out You can change the images used for the login and logout buttons To do so follow these steps 1 Move the new images to the following folder webroot your site s root directory Workarea images application 2 Open the web config file in your Web site s root directory 3 Change the images referenced in this section of the file lt add key ek_Image_1 value btn_close gif gt lt add key ek_Image_2 value btn_login gif gt lt add key ek_Image_3 value btn_login_big gif gt NOTE You must update the images and web config each time your system is updated Editing Content Within Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron is the recognized leader of in context editing This means that the Web site is the primary user interface for a business user Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 5 Getting Started From the Web site the user can navigate to any page and as long as he has permission perform all system activities such as edit content add content report on forms view calendars etc Accessing the Workarea Once logged into Ektron CMS400 NET as an administrator you can edit content by navigat
307. l Calendar Using a New ID To create a multi lingual calendar using a unique ID number follow these steps 1 Within the Workarea select Modules gt Calendars 2 From the Calendar Modules screen click to open the View In dropdown box Calendar modules Czech English U S French Standard German Standard Spani raditional Sort Title ID LangID Description CalendarExample 1 1033 Century Medical Training And 2 1033 Events Intranet Company Palanan 3 1033 3 Select the language for the calendar 4 The Calendar Modules screen reappears showing only calendars in the selected language if any exist Complete the calendar information as explained in Adding a New Calendar on page 295 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 308 Searching Content on the Web Site Searching Content on the Web Site NOTE This section explains how to use the search function on a browser page For information about inserting the search function into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web template refer to the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual NOTE This section describes the search on your Web site To learn about searching through the folders of your Content Management System see Search Content Folder on page 37 Ektron CMS400 NET has a search function that can be easily integrated into any Ektron CMS400 NET template The search command looks through your XHTML Web site co
308. language is English Use the following procedure to change the default language for your multi language Web site 1 Open the folder webroot yourwebsite Within that folder open web config Set the value of ek_DefaultContentLanguage tO the locale id of the default language For example 1031 for German NOTE For a list of locale ids see Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 4 Save and close web config Disabling a Language To disable any language uncheck the accompanying checkbox on the Edit Language Setting screen For more information see Determining Which Languages are Available on page 316 If you want to disable the default language you must first assign a new default language The Default Language on page 318 explains what a default language is and how to assign one What Happens to Content When You Disable Its Language If you disable a language for which content exists that content remains in the database but no one can access it either from within Ektron CMS400 NET or when visiting your site Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 318 Multi Language Support If you later enable that language the content is once again available Creating New Content To create content in a non English language follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder in which you want to create the content You must have permission to add content to the folder
309. lder on the file server File Extensions Specify the types of non image files that a content contributor can upload to the library You can add as many non image file extensions as you want or have none If no extensions appear no one can upload non image files to the specified folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 97 Managing Library Items Field Description File Upload Directory Specifies where the uploaded files are saved on the Web server By default the file upload directory is Web root ek_sitepath uploadedfiles The ek_sitepath value is set in the Web config file Note You must create the directory in your Web root manually before adding it in CMS400 NET See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual section Managing the web config File Make Directory Relative If you want to specify the file upload directory s location as relative to your to this Web site Web site root check this box Your Web site root s location appears to the right of Make Directory Relative to this Web site Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and you need to set up that folder on the file server Performing Actions on Library Items The library is made up of images files form Quicklinks hyperlinks and regular Quicklinks that were added by Ektron CMS400 NET
310. lds For example if you know that the user s last name is Jackson and the user is in the planets domain enter those criteria and you will get many fewer hits When the Active Directory Users screen appears click the box next to users that you want to create in Ektron CMS400 NET Then click the Save button m to copy their information into Ektron CMS400 NET The View User Groups Screen The View User Groups Screen displays all AD user groups that have been copied into Ektron CMS400 NET See Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 448 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 465 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature To access the screen click User Groups from the left panel of the Workarea View User Groups Livers User Group Name Number of Users 4 Account Operators planets com As Account Operators saturn planets com e Account Operators venus planets com Cc Administrators planets com 4 Administrators saturn planets com 4 Administrators venus planets com e Backup Operators planets com 0 oo oon oa To view more information for a group click that group to move to the View Users in Group screen The View User Groups screen also provides a toolbar button amp that lets you add AD groups to the Ektron CMS400 NET database When you click it the Search Active Directory for Groups screen appears View Users in Group Screen
311. library assets external hyperlink and submenus This section only describes managing permissions to use the Menus Feature and suggestion for implementing it For more information about using the Menus feature see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Permission to Use the Menus Feature Only users with permission to use the Collections feature illustrated below can work with menus If user does not have permission to Collections the menus toolbar button does not appear View Permissions for Folder Content I The content in this folder is private and can only be viewed by authi members View Standard Permissions ___ View User or Group Name Collections Add Folders Edit Folders Delete Folder admin a a x x x jedit Also if a user has permission to Collections but Read Only permission for content and the library he cannot add content from a navigation link Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 290 Menu Feature Implementation of the Menus Feature In order for a menu to appear on your Web site your Web developer must modify a page template to display it This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt List of Server Controls gt Menu Server Control Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 291 Calendars The Calendars feature allows you to crea
312. lick the title to access the View Content page for the selected content From there you can remove or change the Quicklink Content History Whenever a new version of content is published or checked in the previous version is stored Old versions of content may be viewed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 55 Managing Content on the View History screen and if desired restored to the Web site Accessing the View History Window To access the View History window follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to view the history of as described in Viewing Content on page 46 2 Click the View History button Tap 3 The Content History screen opens Published Date pb 04 Dec 2003 10 20 AM 04 Dec 2003 10 20 AM pb 04 Dec 2003 09 45 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 44 AM p 04 Dec 2003 09 44 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 44 AM p 04 Dec 2003 09 42 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 42 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 41 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 37 AM View Content History Home Page Content Content Summary Comment Content Welcome to RC International RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing In three short years RC International has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RC community We will continue str
313. ll AD users that you will use in your Web site into Ektron CMS400 NET To copy an AD user into Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 From the left side of the Workarea click Users 2 Click the Add Users button amp 3 The Search Active Directory for Users screen appears Search Active Directory for Users e Username Firstname Lastname Domain planets com gt Search 4 From the Domain pull down list select the domain from which you want to add a user 5 Enter as much information as you know into the other fields 6 Click the Search button A new screen displays all users that satisfy the search criteria you entered 7 Click the check box under the Add column to add users to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 444 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature 8 Click the Save button to add AD users to Ektron CMS400 NET The View Users in Group Everyone screen appears displaying the new user and the other Ektron CMS400 NET users When Integration is First Enabled Ektron CMS400 NET Database Already Implemented If Enable automatic addition of user from AD is checked on the Active Directory Setup screen user information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400 NET when that user logs in or when the user is added to Ektron CMS400 NET See Also The Active Directory Setup Screen on page 454 The first time the user information
314. ll create Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 390 JavaScript Syndication lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Weather lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt script language javascript srce http 192 168 0 156 CMS400 NETSample CMS400 NETscripts jsyndication aspx id 19 gt lt script gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt In this code the source src of the script is made up of three parts e The path of the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site http 1 92 168 0 111 CMS400 NETSample CMS400 NETscripts e The syndication template Jsyndication aspx e The content ID number to be displayed ID 19 NOTE Each page that displays syndicated content must have all three parts of the JavaScript to display properly Once the script is inserted into the HTML page you can view the syndicated content on the page via your browser T Weather Microsoft Internet Explorer ol Bile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Back A 2 A search s Favorites Media 7 Address http 192 168 0 167 weather html Eco Links Yt 18 F Partly Cloudy Feels Like 5 F UV Index 1 Minimal Dew Point O F Humidity 37 Visibility Unlimited Pressure 30 05 inches and falling Wind From the Northwest at 12 mph Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 391 JavaScript Syndication When this content gets changed on the Ektron CMS400 NET Web si
315. llaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDG
316. llow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item screen for the item you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button 0 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed 4 If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button Oi Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 99 Managing Library Items Load Balancing This section explains how to create load balancing paths in Ektron CMS400 NET For further information about the steps needed to set up load balancing outside of Ektron CMS400 NET see Load Balancing on page 395 Definition Load balance is used for two important reasons e Provides the redundancy for the Web site if one server fails a second server handles all requests e Balances requests to the server distributes the load request across two or more machines In both cases the client browser is not aware that several servers are involved All URLs point to a single Web site The load balance software resolves them Load Balancing and Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET does not need to be aware that load balancing is taking place However the library items on all servers must be identical Therefore when a user uploads a new item to the Ektron CMS400 NET library it must be replicated on all other servers in your load balancing model To achieve this Ektron CMS400 NET uploads the items to default upload directory and any
317. lly To delete a Task Type click the check box next to the Task Type then click the Delete 7 button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 275 Managing Tasks When you delete a Task Type the following appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure you want to delete the selected task type s i oJ Note After deletion all tasks assigned to the deleted task type will be assigned the Not Specified task type To delete all Task Types check the Delete all check box The following example shows which check boxes on the screen are associated with All Task Types Task Categories and individual Task Types Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 276 Managing Tasks View Categorization a Administration Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability Fj Add New User Email Available g Set Up Email Accounts For New Users Available a Docs Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability Edit Available F Review Available a Moving Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability Fj Move Available Fj Prep Available Task States During the life of a task assigned to content it normally progresses through a series of states The state helps track a task s progress from creation to completion and even removal from the database When reviewing the history of a task the state can be used to review which
318. low dashed border and the modify Web Part menu appears on the right side of the screen Modify the Web Part NOTE Information about modifying Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts can be found in Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts on page 365 10 Click Apply for the changes to take effect without closing the menu Or click OK to save and close the menu Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts Ektron created Web Parts for all display functions in Ektron CMS400 NET as well as two others The following table lists each Web Part and its functionality Web Part Displays More Information Approvals A list of content awaiting approval by the logged in Ektron Approvals Web Part CMS400 NET user on page 366 Calendar A calendar created for the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Calendar Web Part site on page 367 Collection A collection as well as its display function for a collection Collection Web Part created in the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site on page 368 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 365 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Web Part Displays More Information Content Content created for the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Content Web Part on page 371 Form A form content item created for the Ektron CMS400 NET Form Content Web Web site Part on page 373 Summary List A summary list for a specified content folder in the Ektron CMS400
319. lue For example if the referenced field s value is Hello string length 5 Insert a calendar field when you want the end user to enter a date The user must click a date from an online interactive calendar Select Date x January 2006 x Because users cannot enter digits a standard date format is ensured Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 209 Using the Data Designer The date is stored as a standard XML date in the format yyyy mm dd and localized to the computer of the user viewing it Moving a Calendar Field Unlike other Data Designer fields you cannot drag and drop a calendar field between table cells Instead you must select the field cut it then move the cursor to the new cell and paste it Dialog Box x Name Fean PT Indexed Display name fFiedt s SSS Default value es by Use Allow May not be removed Only one C May be removed More than one Validation Validation No vaidina Caption Date Data Sye x Cee Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 210 Using the Data Designer Field Description Name Enter the name of the field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field See Also The Name Field s Default Value on page 173 Inde
320. m content from the corresponding content folder However you use the corresponding content folder to assign permissions and an approval chain See Also Form Permissions on page 230 Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you re creating The options are e Send it via email e Store it in a database e Send it via email and store in a database See Creating a New Form on page 234 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 229 Working with HTML Forms By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Form Permissions Folder Permissions By default form permissions are inherited from the form s folder To customize permissions for any folder that contains forms access the corresponding folder under Content and assign permission as described in Setting Permissions for a Content Folder on page 81 Adminis
321. matically on page 507 PDF Conversion Process The PDF conversion of an Office document starts when it is published At that point a copy of the file is sent to an Ektron server for PDF generation After the server generates the PDF it returns the PDF to your Asset Management server When the PDF returns it doesn t appear in the CMS400 NET Workarea only the original published Office document appears Asset Management stores the PDF file in its secure location Subsequent editing is done in the original Office document and each time it s published a new PDF is generated h 9 F The Ektron server Office Publish the sends the Office converts the Office document in Office document to an document to PDF Ektron CMS Document Ektron PDF Server The PDF is sent back The PDF is stored in the When the office document to your DMS400 secure asset location on is added to a Web page it Server your DMS400 Server appears in PDF format Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 496 Asset Management Administration Once the Office document is added to a Web page the Web page shows the PDF version of the it This means visitors of the site only need a PDF viewer installed to view any Office document on your site Local PDF Generation If you purchase software from a PDF generation software vendor you can create PDF documents on a local network Reasons for generating a PDF locally include e Speed
322. mbers should have the privileges of Ektron CMS400 NET administrators assign that group to Administrators on the Active Directory Setup screen If such a group does not exist in AD yet you should create it and then assign it on the Active Directory Setup screen Note that only one AD group can be mapped to the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator group you cannot have an AD administrator group within each AD domain See Also The Active Directory Setup Screen on page 454 User Belongs to AD Group that Does Not Exist in Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE If user is assigned to an AD user group that does not exist in Ektron CMS400 NET nothing happens The AD integration feature assumes that an Ektron CMS400 NET administrator only maintains user groups that are meaningful to Ektron CMS400 NET and not all AD groups may be meaningful to Ektron CMS400 NET If a user belongs to a user group that is given Membership permissions but also to a group that has CMS permissions the user will only receive Membership permissions if logged into Ektron CMS400 NET User Belongs to Ektron CMS400 NET Group that Does Not Exist in AD If a user was a member of a user group in Ektron CMS400 NET before integration was enabled but does not belong to that group in the AD this discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens If the user should belong to the AD group add the group membership within the AD Then re
323. me initial content name mycontent gt e Value e Size the number of charac Note See Letting the User Override ters in the field If a user s email Values on page 235 for p En entry exceeds the size the information about overriding default A s field scrolls to the right Forms settings T Password lt input type password size 5 e Name he value name mypassword gt e Size the number of charac ters in the field If a user s entry exceeds the size the field scrolls to the right 1 Test Area lt textarea name mycontent e Name Bi rows 5 cols 4 type textarea gt This is initial e Value content lt textarea gt e Rows e Columns G Radio Button lt input type radio e Name z checked checked value This is a radio button name mybutton gt e Value Default is Checked Vv Check Box lt input type checkbox e Name checked checked value This is a check box name mycheckbox gt e Value Default is Checked Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 239 Working with HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 field Button Inserts this Example of HTML inserted Prompts on dialog box that kind of field appears EE Select lt select multiple multiple e Name size 25 name myselectbox gt lt option value optionl gt optionl lt e Size the number of charac option gt ters i
324. me and domain first and last name language email address and whether the user receives email notifications user groups If you are using user authentication mode username and domain can only be edited in the AD You can edit all other fields on this screen If you are using full AD Integration mode you can only edit language and whether the user receives email notifications You must edit the other fields in the AD The screen also displays the following buttons Button Description Cy Edit information on screen T Delete user See Also Deleting Users on page 447 Ca Retrieve latest information from AD into Ektron E3 CMS400 NET See Also After Integration is Enabled on page 446 This toolbar button does not appear if you are using user authentication mode 5 Replace user See Also Replacing a User on page 447 Return to previous screen E The Search Active Directory for Users Screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 464 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Use this screen to add AD users to Ektron CMS400 NET To access the screen click Users from the left panel of the Workarea then click the Add button amp Search Active Directory for Users lt e Username Firstname Lastname Domain planets com Search Enter as much search criteria as you know to reduce the number of users that the search yie
325. ministrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 436 email Features Field Source of Default Information Editable From User who signed on to Ektron CMS400 NET No Subject If the email message is linked to content its title Yes appears The screen section below provides an example of content Trinity In Line Pipe that is linked to a message rovals Title Request Type Start Date Submitted by Trinity In Line Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John Body of If the email message is linked to content a link to the Yes message content appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 437 Active Directory Feature Active Directory Feature The Active Directory feature allows you to retrieve user and user group information from the Microsoft Windows Active Directory AD into Ektron CMS400 NET As a result you can administer user information from one place only and users need to remember only one password username combination to sign on to the network and Ektron CMS400 NET The Active Directory feature has two implementation modes described in the following table Choose the mode that best meets your needs Mode Information Shared How to Implement For more between AD and information see CMS user e user logon name On the Active Directory Setup User Authentication authentication screen check Enable Active Only Mode on only e
326. mission to a Membership user or user group See Also Private Content amp Memberships on page 114 1 Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content as described in Accessing the Permissions Table on page 81 2 Click the Add button d 3 The Add Permissions screen appears Only users and groups not assigned to the Permissions Table appear Click a user or group to add to the Permissions Table The Add Permissions screen appears Check the standard and advanced permissions for the user or group Refer to Standard amp Advanced Permissions on page 80 for a description of permission options Check Enable All to assign all standard permissions If you do you still must assign advanced permissions by hand 7 Click the Save button Gl Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 83 Setting Permissions Editing User or User Group Permissions To add or remove permissions for a user or group editing the user or group in the Permissions Table To do so follow these steps 1 Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content as described in Accessing the Permissions Table on page 81 Click the user or group for which you want to edit permissions The Edit Permissions screen appears To assign any permission check the box To remove any permission uncheck the box NOTE Remember to toggle between standard and advanced permissions 5
327. ms at once follow these steps NOTE Only published and expired content can be moved 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to move 2 Click the Move Content button L The Move Contents of Folder screen is displayed Check the boxes next to the content that you want to move NOTE Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 52 Managing Content 5 Choose the content folder to move the selected content from the drop down list Move Contents of Folder Content Move to Folder p gt V Title Human_Resources Date Modified danish 17 Sep 2004 Greeting 04 Dec 2003 V Home Page Products RC_Cars 04 Dec 2003 i 04 Dec 2003 V Private Conte aati 03 Mar 2004 V Sunnort Pane a A 27 Aun0 2002 6 Click the Move Content button GS to move the selected content 7 Aconfirmation message is displayed Click OK 9 The content moves to the destination folder Viewing and Restoring Historical Versions of Content Each time a new version of content is published or checked in the previous version is stored in a history table Old versions of content may be accessed in the view history table and if desired restored to the Web site For more information see the Viewing and Restoring Previous Content section of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Purging Historical Ver
328. n Caption Enter text to guide the user s selection For example if the user needs to select an area of interest the caption could be Choose your interests Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Select List field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Calculated Field Use a calculated field to perform a calculation based on values in other fields For example if your screen collects mortgage information you could create one field to collect the mortgage and interest payment and another to collect taxes and insurance The calculated field could sum those two numbers and display the monthly payment You can validate a calculated field For example you can require a positive number between 100 and 1 000 Calculated fields are display only users cannot edit them IMPORTANT If a field will be referenced in a calculation use the validation feature to require a value for that field This forces the user to enter a number to be used in the calculation Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 198 Using the Data Designer Calculated Field k 3 x Name Fie J Indeved Display name Field 1 r Calculation Formula Select Field Examples x Validation Validation No
329. n Belonging to More Than One Group If a user inherits task permissions from groups and is a member of more than one group the user inherits permissions assigned to all groups So for example if Group A is allowed to create tasks and Group B is only allowed to delete them a member of both groups can create and delete Assign Unique Task Permissions To assign unique task permissions to a user regardless of permissions assigned to groups of which he is a member uncheck the Inherit Task Permissions From User Groups box on the Edit User screen Task Categories and Types Tasks can be assigned a Task Category then a Task Type This gives users an additional way to filter their tasks Task Categories and Task Types have a hierarchical relationship the Task Category is the parent and the Task Type is the child So several types can be assigned to each category Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 267 Managing Tasks Some examples of Task Categories might be Engineering Sales Documentation or Web Design Examples of Task Types might be Edit Content Update Documents or Contact Customer You can create Task Categories and Task Types from three locations e When adding a task See Also Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Managing Tasks gt Creating a Task via the Task Folder e When editing a task e When working in the View Categorization screen See Also View Categoriza
330. n CMS400 NET user needs to be associated with an AD user e an Ektron CMS400 NET user group needs to be associated with an AD user group e an Ektron CMS400 NET user s group membership need to be associated with the same AD user s group membership To access the screen click Configuration gt Active Directory gt Status from the left panel of the Workarea Active Directory Status E Active Directory is Enabled and Requires More Configuration CMS users need to be associated with Active Directory users CMS groups need to be associated with Active Directory groups CMS relationships need to be associated with Active Directory relationships There are several reasons why such discrepancies may occur To learn more about why e an Ektron CMS400 NET user is not associated with an AD user read Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET on page 443 e an Ektron CMS400 NET user s group membership is not associated with the user s AD group membership read Associating a User s AD Group Information with Ektron CMS400 NET on page 449 e an Ektron CMS400 NET group is not associated with an AD group read User Groups on page 447 If you click any link on the Active Directory Status screen a new screen appears that allows you to resolve the discrepancy For information on how to use these screens see Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 459 Active Directory Integr
331. n French he sees the French version of the calendar below Note that they are separate calendars with separate event listings they only share the ID number The URL of the following calendar is http localhost CMS400EXAMPLE intranet calendar aspx menu_id 15 calendar_id 3 amp TitleLabel Company 20Calendar LangType 1036 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 306 Calendars lt lt mars avril mai gt gt lundi mardi mercredi jeudi vendredi samedi dimanche 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Creating a Multi lingual Calendar Using the Same ID To create a multi lingual calendar using the same ID number but a different language follow these steps 1 Within the Workarea select Modules gt Calendars 2 Select the calendar for which you want to create a version in another language 3 When the View Calendar Screen appears pull down the Add In box and select the new language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 307 Calendars View Calendar Intranet Company Calendar n Select a Language Select a Language rae Czech Title Intranet Company Calendar German Standard ID 3 Spanish iti Description Location Label Location Start Time Label Start End Time Label End 4 Complete the calendar information as explained in Adding a New Calendar on page 295 Creating a Multilingua
332. n systems e the screens of the Active Directory Feature Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration Because usernames and passwords are stored in the AD by domain the AD sign in procedure requires you to select a domain name So if AD integration is enabled the sign in screen includes a pull down list that the user clicks to select a domain F Ektron CMS Login Microsoft 1f m 4 NOTE Your organization determines AD domain names For more information about logging in see Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET A key component of the Active Directory Integration feature is to maintain consistent information between the AD and Ektron CMS400 NET systems This section explains how user information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 443 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature is transmitted between AD and Ektron CMS400 NET when integration is first enabled and on an ongoing basis This section covers the following topics e Adding user information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET e Associating user information when integration is first enabled e Associating user information after integration is enabled e Editing user information in Ektron CMS400 NET e Deleting Users e Replacing a User Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Before using the AD integration feature you should add a
333. n the field If a user s lt option value option2 gt option2 lt entry exceeds the size the option field scrolls to the right lt select gt e Allow multiple e Option name e Display value g Form Applies a validation rule to selected form Validation element See Also Form Validation on page 251 6 Move the cursor to the screen position where you want the first field 7 Click the button corresponding to the kind of field you want to insert 8 Complete the dialog box that collects information about the Here is an example of form content that you can create 240 Working with HTML Forms a Apply Style gt Normal gt Verdana gt 2 10 pt X A oh B Z EEEL oo ace u eeee amp x Eee Iq gt H E i s S fiz E i EE wW bdl ae First Name Last Name Company name Address asp net solution Expiration month Apr x year 2007 x Submit Form Note that the first four fields use plain text while the fifth uses a select box You can apply validation criteria to any field by selecting the field then clicking the Form Validation button For more information see Form Validation on page 251 9 After you complete the form you have the following options Button or Tab Description Postback Message Edit the summary for the content If you want to customize the post back message click the Summary tab A postback message info
334. nable application mail m essages 22 license key 21 maximum summary size 21 modifying 20 system email address 21 viewing 20 work page size 22 approval chain approvers adding 89 deleting 90 creating 87 editing approval order 89 editing for content block 91 examples 87 inheritance from parent folder 87 introduction 86 multi language content 336 viewing for content 91 for folder 87 approval method changing 92 description 91 approve toolbar button 17 archiving tasks 285 border color meaning 10 broken links finding 55 browser save when closing 126 builtin user 26 button text display in title bar 23 C calculated field data designer 198 calendar field data designer 209 calendars accessing Workarea after viewing 294 content folder assignment 298 creating 295 foreign language 303 deleting 300 display weekends 298 displaying on Web page 303 editing 299 event type label 296 event types adding 301 available 296 deleting 302 editing name 302 enabling 301 introduction 300 required 296 viewing 301 introduction 292 location label 295 permissions 294 start and end time labels 296 toolbar buttons 292 character encoding 347 choices field data designer 191 collections introduction 288 permissions 289 comment adding to content 41 content adding HTML content block 39 programmatically 60 XML content block 44 approval chain editing 91 assigning permissions 84 automatic notification of activ
335. national has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehicies Our dedication to the spori and the w CMS300 Login CMS300 Profile TETEE ET ETETEN in Ju Taaa 28 CMS300 Search 1to 9 fof 9 4 Continue to insert all desired Web Parts onto your shared or personal Web page Modifying Web Parts All Web Parts have three properties that you can modify Property Lets you Appearance Adjust appearance settings such as height width and title Layout Adjust location order and other layout information Advanced Set advanced options NOTE Refer to your Microsoft SharePoint documentation for information about configuring these properties Some Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts have additional configuration settings Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 364 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Modifying a Web Part To modify a Web Part that has been inserted into a Web Part zone follow these steps 1 2 9 Log into your SharePoint Portal Server Navigate to a Web Part zone that contains an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Part that you want to modify Click Edit Page at the bottom of the left navigation menu You are in Edit Page Mode Click the Down Arrow at the top right corner of the Web Part you want to modify The Web Part Menu is displayed Click Modify Shared Web Part The Web Part is surrounded by a yel
336. nd city fields accept text while the state field accepts a pre defined value a state The samples installed with eWebEditPro XML provide a good example of using the Data Designer To try them out click the Windows Start button lower left Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 158 Using the Data Designer corner of the screen and follow this path Start gt Programs gt Ektron gt eWebEditPro4 gt Samples gt ASP gt Data Design gt ASP Data Design Sample This section explains how to use the Data Designer feature through the following topics e Differences in eWebEditPro XML on page 159 e Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 160 e Designing a Screen on page 161 e Inserting a Field Type on page 162 e Sample Screen Design on page 164 e Data Designer Field Types on page 170 Differences in eWebEditPro XML When you use the Data Designer eWebEditPro XML changes in the following ways NOTE The design toolbar and the design mode and Data Entry mode buttons appear only if your site administrator has defined them in the configuration data e two toolbars appear illustrated below The toolbar buttons let you design the data entry screen Each button represents a different kind of field feo E i ER ee Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 159 Using the Data Designer Both toolbars provide mostly the same buttons The major
337. nd paste all relevant elements of the French content id 4 into the French edition of content id 3 content summary metadata schedule and comments Delete content id 4 See Also Deleting Content on page 54 Set the Language of Spell Checking To specify which dictionary to reference when checking spelling specify a language in Microsoft Word version 2000 or later To do this open Word and select Tools gt Language gt Set Language Character Encoding The following Ektron Knowledge Base articles describe issues surrounding the display of special characters within Ektron CMS400 NET Note that these articles refer to eWebEditPro Ektron s WYSIWYG editor embedded within Ektron CMS400 NET Wherever these articles contain references to eWebEditPro s configuration data or file config xml you should instead update the web config file located in your site s root folder HOWTO produce UTF 8 www ektron com developers ewebeditpro_tutorials cfm id 403 INFO Character Encoding www ektron com developers ewebeditprokb cfm id 1807 INFO Encoding special characters www ektron com developers ewebeditprokb cfm id 384 HOWTO store unicode characters so they are searchable www ektron com developers cms300_developers cfm Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 347 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Before you begin using the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts it is recommended tha
338. ng Email Notifications in the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual Automatic eMail Notification Ektron CMS400 NET has an automated email system that sends emails to the proper users when an action has been or needs to be performed Emails are generated when any of the following actions takes place email sent to When content is Next approver Submitted to be published Next approver Submitted to be deleted Author Published to Web site Author Declined to be published or deleted In order for users to be notified of these actions the following criteria must be met e Valid system email address e Enabled email notification e User email address e User email notification enabled These values are set in the Edit User screen See Also Managing Users on page 106 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 432 email Features The Tasks feature also has automatic email notification For more information see Email Notification on page 284 Content of Automatic email The automatic emails are stored in and received from the database Each email consists of one string for the subject and one for the body Ektron CMS400 NET does not currently support HTML emails but the messages are fully customizable To learn about customizing them see Customizing Ektron CMS400 NET emails in the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual Instant eMail In addition to automatic email Ektron CMS400 NET le
339. ng the Workarea Using Calendars To access the Workarea after viewing a calendar you cannot right click the mouse then choose Workarea from the context sensitive menu as you can with content Instead after logging in click either the Add Events or View Events icon circled below to access the Workarea Calendar Permissions NOTE Calendar permissions are derived from the content folder assigned to the calendar The following section explains the permissions you can set for a calendar See Setting Permissions for a Content Folder on page 81 for more information Administrator Permissions Members of the administrator user group have full control over all calendar features as they do for content You must be a member of the administrator group to add edit or delete a calendar Administrators may also add edit and delete calendar events Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 294 User Permissions Calendars Users who are not in the administrator user group cannot add edit or delete calendars Non administrator users can add edit or delete calendar events if they have add edit and delete permissions for the calendar s content folder See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 Adding a New Calendar To add a new calendar follow these steps See Also Calendar Permissions on page 294 1 Access the Calendars screen Click the Add Calendar button A The A
340. ng users 121 membership users adding 118 deleting 120 editing 119 introduction 117 permissions assigning 123 viewing 119 menus implementing 291 introduction 290 permissions 290 metadata inheritance from parent folder 76 metadata properties definitions viewing 72 multi language content approval chains 336 creating new content 319 creating Web pages in several languages 340 default language 318 determining available languages 316 disabling a language 318 enabling disabling 314 introduction 312 language export creating XLIFF or XHTML file 326 introduction 325 translation files creating 332 previewing 330 setting up Web site 338 spell checking 347 translating content 320 by machine 322 translation files importing 335 submitting to agency 335 viewing site in another language 315 working with calendars 337 working with menus 338 working with tasks 337 P password setting for user 107 permissions advanced 81 assigning to content block 84 assigning to membership users 123 calendars 294 collections 289 inheritance breaking 79 restoring 79 list of 80 manual URL aliasing 425 menus 290 setting 78 setting for folder 81 standard 80 table accessing 81 adding user or group 83 deleting user or group 84 editing user or group 84 task 266 preferences force on all users 24 preserve MS Word classes 27 styles 27 preview toolbar button 18 private content 114 introduction 114 purge history 35 Q
341. nguage System on page 338 After you create these items have the page invoke that item dynamically using an appropriate function such as ecmContentBlock When Ektron CMS400 NET receives a request to display an item that includes a language and item id number it returns the language specific edition To learn about letting the user select a language from a Web page see Viewing Your Site in Another Language on page 315 Adjust template content to user Modifying Page Content Based on Language language Selection on page 340 Translate text in images Modifying Images Based on Language Selection on page 341 Modifying Page Content Based on Language Selection If a template s text should change according to a user s language selection use a case statement to provide the language specific content A good example of this is the template used on the RC international sample site Illustrated below RG international Home Products Support Latest News Careers Search Calendar Login Cor Assume you want to create editions of the menu that runs across the header Home Products etc in three languages Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 340 Multi Language Support e English e French e German To do so follow these steps NOTE This procedure uses the header asp file delivered with the RC international sample site as an example 1 In the templ
342. nguage code for the content See Also Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 Primary The alias a content editor sees when editing an alias via the Alias tab See Also Adding a Manual URL Alias via the Alias Tab on page 429 v Primary Alias for that URL 4 Click the Add Alias button 5P The Add a New Alias screen appears Add a new Alias Alias Name CMS400Example htm Content Block Select A Content Block Link CMS400Example Primary oO Library Quicklink Overwrite Existing Quicklink Do not add Quicklink 5 Inthe Alias Name field choose the name you want to use for an alias Click on Select a Content Block to choose content The QuickLink Select window appears Choose content Check the Primary box if you want to make this the primary alias o ON Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 428 WARNING URL Aliasing 10 Choose a Quicklink option e Overwrite Existing Quicklink overwrites the existing Quicklink for the content When you choose to overwrite an existing Quicklink you permanently delete it There is no way to revert back to the old Quicklink If you want to use the old Quicklink again you need to add a new one For more information on creating Quicklinks see Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual gt Library Folder gt Quicklinks e Do not add Quicklink does not create a Quic
343. nly available if default is not checked Enter your CMS password as entered in the CMS Add Edit User screen See Also Creating a New User on page 106 Within Ektron Explorer you will have the same privileges for working with content that you have in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Setting Permissions on page 78 Creating a New Configuration You might want to create a new configuration to e sign in to a different instance of Ektron CMS400 NET for example one on a different computer e signin as a different user To create a new configuration follow these steps 1 Access the Configuration Manager as described in Accessing the Configuration Manager on page 479 2 Click Create New Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 481 Ektron Explorer 3 Complete the fields on the screen See Fields on the Edit Existing Configuration Screen on page 480 4 Press the Test Connection button When you do the CMS location username and password are tested for validity 5 Click the Add New button Switching Between Configurations If you have two or more configurations and want to sign off one and sign on to the other follow these steps 1 Click the small X on the top right corner of the Ektron Explorer frame illustrated below at Ektron Explorer Search Results File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt amp At Qsearch GaFavorites media C4 E
344. nt 3 192 168 0 156 CMS dd User logon name 0 Content planets com H 20 Library Username jsmith User logon name pre Windows 2000 1 Approvals Domain planets com PLANETS smith a Reports First Name John eatin Log OnT 0 Fonts ogon Hours og On Io Lees Last Name Smith ao Users J Accountis lockediout 4 u jons C User Groups ser App Default Account options fi Help Language T User must change password at next logon ay Configuration E Mail o I User cannot change password ay Active Director Address I Password never expires 20 Sety Disable E Mail Notificatio I Store password using reversible encryption 8 Status Emails for this application a Account expires 15 Setu disabled ie Metadata Defin C End of Thursday February 06 2003 z Cancel Apply a So 4 Done S O E nene 37 3 If you have multiple domains in your Active Directory Forest decide if you want Ektron CMS400 NET to reference all domains or if you want to choose a specific one You will use this when completing the Domain field of the Active Directory Setup Screen Disabling AD Authentication See Disabling AD Integration on page 470 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 475 Ektron Explorer The Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Using Ektron Explorer provides the following information e general description e installation directions e how to view
345. nt publish date of the source edition of the content Trg date The most recent publish date of the target edition of the content FolderID The content s folder ID number Target Language The language into which the source content will be translated See Also Appendix A List of Supported Languages on page 511 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 331 Multi Language Support Column Description Header File Status The status of the target language edition of the content Possible values are e Does not exist there is no target language edition of that content e Up to date the last published date of the target lan guage edition matches the last published date of the source language edition e Older than source a target language edition of that content exists its last published date precedes the last published date of the source language edition Once you are satisfied with the content on the report proceed to Creating Translation Files on page 332 Creating Translation Files To create translation files follow these steps 1 Complete the criteria on the Select Content To Translate screen See Also Selecting Content To Translate on page 326 Click the Save button Qj 3 A screen displays the XLIFF and XHTML files that were created An example is below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 332
346. ntact On the Tabular Data Box dialog the Row Name field defines the XML tag that groups information for each contact For example the Row Name field value is Contact Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 177 Using the Data Designer Tabular Data Box Name AddressBook Display name AddressBook Use l Allow May not be removed C Only one C May be removed More than one Rows Row Name Contact Row Display Name Contact lt Contact gt lt Name gt John Doe lt Name gt lt Phone gt 555 1212 lt Phone gt lt Email gt john doe email com lt Email gt lt Contact gt lt Contact gt lt Name gt Mary Smith lt Name gt lt Phone gt 555 8765 lt Phone gt lt Email gt msmith mymail net lt Email gt lt Contact gt How XML Tags are Assigned to the Entire Table When you create a table the name you give it in the Name field of the Tabular Data Box dialog defines the XML tag that groups all contacts on the table In this example the name is AddressBook Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 178 Using the Data Designer Tabular Data Box Name AddressBook Display name AddressBook Use Allow j _ May not be removed i C Only one C May be removed More than one ES i Row Name Contact j Row Display Name Contact s SS lt AddressBook gt lt Contact gt lt
347. ntent Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task x Cancel Close the editor without saving changes 10 Click the Save and Submit or Publish button E The form only appears on your Web site after it is published Next the form may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template The next section explains that procedure Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 242 Working with HTML Forms Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create a form the next step is to implement it on a Web Page To do that follow these steps NOTE The use of functions to manage templates is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Manual 1 Open the Web template on which you want the Form content to appear This example uses support aspx 2 Place the custom function for a Form content within the body of the template lt ecmFormBlock 31 gt This function calls the specified Form content in this example ia 31 to display the form within the support aspx template Home Products Support News Careers Search Calendar Login Support Request Form This is a sample support request form for RC International Validation is set for most fields for the typ Name cannot be
348. ntent and assets then displays links to the content found by the search IMPORTANT Each content item and asset includes a Content Searchable field The search only considers content if this field is checked When you insert the search function onto a template it looks something like this on the Web site ee Search All the words C Any of the words Exact Phrase Match Partial Words When performing a search the user enters one or more words into the text box selects the necessary search preferences then clicks the Search button Your system administrator can add custom search fields that only appear if a user is logged in For more information see Metadata on page 62 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 309 Searching Content on the Web Site Search Options Before you select the search preferences you should understand the difference among them The explanations below assume you entered these words into the search text field e partners e content e Monday e employee e green All the Words All the Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green Any of the Words Any of the Words is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all content that have at least one of the words en
349. nto it You can access a good sample by navigating to Start gt Programs gt Ektron gt eWebEditPro gt Samples gt ASP gt Data Design gt ASP Data Design Sample When you are ready to create an actual screen ask your system administrator to Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 164 Using the Data Designer help determine a method for saving the screen and making it available to users for data entry To create such a screen follow these steps 1 Sign on to eWebEditPro XML in Data Designer mode Ask your system administrator how to do this The Developer s Reference Guide version 4 0 and higher provides details 2 Since you want to surround the data entry fields with a box and ae a caption drag the Group Box button from the drag and drop toolbar onto the screen Then complete the dialog as shown below Group Box Ea fe x Creat NOTE Later in the section documentation is supplied for each field on the dialog box Since this section is providing an overview it does not delve into those details At this point the screen looks like this Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 165 Using the Data Designer s BORA Boom i AE 4B Zz HEE El Apply Style gt Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt A J nbsp TM e i g leE H FAQ ini We e lt 1 LG 3 Select Address then
350. nts that contain a value are summed Empty elements are excluded Count the number of values in a list count X Calculate the number of values in a single repeating field To continue the example from the Total a list of numeric values field above Plain Text Field properties Name Miles Allow more than one Validation non negative whole number XML Data lt root gt lt Miles gt 89 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 12 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 23 lt Miles gt lt Miles gt 19 lt Miles gt lt root gt Count 4 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 208 Using the Data Designer Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description Lowercase text translate X ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrs tuvwxyz Replace all uppercase characters with the lowercase version of that character Uppercase text translate X abcdefghijkimnopaqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU VWXYZ Replace all lowercase characters with the uppercase version of that character Remove extra spaces normalize space X Remove extra space characters from content Concatenate text concat X Y Link text strings together into a single string For example concat The xmL yields The XML Size of a text string string length X Count the number of characters in a selected field s va
351. nual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Access the XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 Click the Add XML Configuration button Dal The Add XML Configuration screen is displayed Enter a Title for the XML configuration Click the Save button j The XML Configuration Data Designer screen is displayed Click the Back arrow to exit The View XML Configuration screen for the new XML configuration is displayed View XML Configuration Testing using external XML files Properties Display Information Preview Title Testing using external XML files ID 20 Description Editor Information Edit XSLT Save XSLT Advanced Configuration Yalidation Information XML Schema Target Namespace Click the Edit button L The Edit XML Configuration screen is displayed Enter the necessary information using the following table as a reference 133 XML Configuration Fields Managing XML Section Field Description Generic Information Title Name given to XML configuration ID display only ID number assigned when configuration is created Description Detailed description given to configuration by its creator or last editor Editor Information Edit XSLT XSLT applied to content while being edited Save XSLT XSLT used to transform the XML when saved to the database Advanced Configuration XML file that
352. nual Version 5 0 Revision 6 227 Working with HTML Forms 4 Human Resources 21 Marketing J Products 3 RC Cars 1 RC Planes 2 Support 0 Syndication A form consists of the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc Content information title start and or end date status summary which contains the form s postback message etc within the content form fields text field password field hidden field radio button checkbox select list submit button etc Form Folders and Content Before creating a form select the Forms folder then select an existing folder or create a new folder The ability to create a new folder is a permission If you create a new subfolder a corresponding folder is automatically created in the Content folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 228 Working with HTML Forms view Forms of folder Support Forms Le 4 E view English US Dal POPEO O IPEA ENEA 4 Human Resources Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor 4 Marketing SS _ qx a Support Products Reguest 1033 26 4 21 Jul 2004 12 21 PM Application Administ 34 Support Form 24 Syndication Within the folder you create the form and then content within it To work with the form later return to the Forms folder and select it You cannot see or work with the for
353. o do so follow these steps 1 Access the SharePoint portal page that contains the Ektron CMS400 NET search Web Part 4 Search Web Part Search All the words O Any of the words O Exact Phras El match Partial Words Enter search criteria in the search text box Click Search 4 The search is performed and all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site that matches the criteria appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 386 Web Services Web Services are reusable software components that can be consumed over the Web by means of standard Internet technologies Mechanisms exist to publish and discover Web Services on the Web allowing users to locate and integrate them into their applications A Web Service is comprised of one or more methods that expose functionality A Web Service can be thought of as an Application Program ming Interface API the one big difference being consumers can access the service using Simple Object Access Protocol SOAP over HTTP SOAP is an XML based lightweight protocol that defines the message format for Web Services which allows heterogeneous systems to communicate with each other ina standard way Seeing Web Services are based on ubiquitous technologies they have been quickly accepted for the interchange of data For information about implementing Ektron CMS400 NET s Web services support for your Web site refer to Web Services in
354. o your SharePoint documentation for information about giving SharePoint users Member permissions Personal vs Shared View When adding Web Parts to a SharePoint Portal page you may either insert them into a shared or personal Web page The following table contrasts the views Web Page View Description Shared A view of a list document library or Web Part Page that every user with appropriate permissions for a site can see The shared view of a Web Part Page uses shared property values Changes made to a shared view apply to the list library or page as it appears to all users Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 360 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Web Page View Description Personal A view of a list SharePoint document library or Web Part Page that is available only to a particular user The personal view of a Web Part Page uses a combination of shared property values and personalized property values Changes made to a personal view apply only to the list library or page in that view and are therefore visible to that user only Keep this information in mind when inserting Web Parts Toggling Between Shared and Personal View When logged in and in Edit Page mode you can toggle between shared view and personal view by following these steps 1 Click Modify Shared Page or Modify My Page depending on your current settings 2 A sub menu is di
355. oadedFiles Default UploadedFiles folder installed by Ektron CMS400 NET on the Web server LB_Images1 Uploadedimages folder installed on the second Ektron CMS400 NET Web server Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 397 Load Balancing Virtual Directory Points to LB _Files1 UploadedFiles folder installed on the second Ektron CMS400 NET Web server These four identical virtual directories must exist in the IIS console for each Web server machine used in your load balancing model Displayed below is how the machines should be configured IIS on Computer1 Internet Information Services File Action View Help e5 Gimif RBl 2 gt i Internet Information Services DONEIL2 local computer Web Sites Default Web Site amp Uploadedimages C Inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedimages UploadedFiles C Inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedfiles 5 Files 1 Server2 C drive inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedfiles LB _Images1 Server2 C drive jnetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedimag oof 9 Application cfm IIS on Computer2 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 398 Load Balancing Internet Information Services 0 Ea Action view e gt Glm xX weit Alg i
356. oe Modifying the Application Setup Screen Managing Content Folders sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Managing CONTE sasiiiescsscsssesssersdonicteratsveerieerserasseiniaidansseis Gontemt RepOriS sssaaa naaa aeaaea Adding Content Programmatically ccccscsseeceeeeeeeeeeeees Metadata isisisi Setting PermisSsioOnS sssssssssunssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna Setting Approval Chaiins ccccccccssssssseeessseseeeeseeeeeees Managing Library tems sssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Managing Users amp User Groups cccccceeeeesseesseeeeeees Private Content amp Memberships eeceeeseeeeeeeeeeees Using CWEDE CIPI ice cin sic spice cc secnnsentcesecccssbacnniteciccennneeene Managing X ME iseseisana EESE Eara XML nde xih Griss Using the Data DeSigne cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Working with HTML FOrmMS ssssssssssssssnnnsnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Font aN AOC siscesssticsasscnccaenncamancmernamnammmaonaenss Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Managing TASKS icc cecinccciieeriincmnnmnnens 265 CONE CUONG mciincsisssiznceivarsdncciiacenrmusennusaiasnieaeiniennais 288 M nu POANUNG aooiccaccsccctncanctettee tdi caceectitenicacetereattccetscainte 290 ANON GANS seene eene EEEE EENAA EErEE 292 Searching Content on the Web Site ccccccsseeeeees 309 Multi Language SUpport ssssss
357. of each collection For information about doing this see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Working with Collections Working with Calendars in a Multi Language System Calendars can be created in any supported language Once you enter the calendar and event information in the foreign language the calendar display that is day and month names automatically appears in that language Also regional conventions for first last days of the week and date and time formats are maintained Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 337 Multi Language Support For more information see Creating a Foreign Language Calendar on page 303 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE If you are not familiar with the Ektron CMS400 NET s menus feature please read Menu Feature on page 276 and the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Working with Menus You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu it s a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link these content items to the new menu However after creating a menu you can always
358. of information that consists of a title bar a frame and content Web Parts are the basic building blocks of a Web Part Page A Web Part is the combination of a Web Part Description file dwp and a Web Part assembly file dll All Web Parts are based on Web Custom Controls Ektron has created a Web Part for each Ektron CMS400 NET display function as well as Web Parts for other useful Ektron CMS400 NET information Three Types of Web Parts Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 358 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration There are three types of Web Parts Type Description Available to Shared A Web Part added to a Web Part Page by a user who is creating or making changes to the Web Part Page in shared view All users of a Web Part Page with appropriate permissions Personalized A shared Web Part with one or more property values modified by a user who has made changes to the Web Part in personal view The user who made the changes Other users continue to see the shared Web Part Private A Web Part that a user has e added to a Web Part Page from a Web Part gallery or e imported from a computer while creating or making changes to the Web Part Page in per sonal view The user who added or imported the Web Part Other users cannot see private Web Parts When properly configured Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts are shared Web Parts that can be per
359. ollowing table displays the resulting email depending on the method used Form Generated email sent as Plain F z 7 Text File Edit View Tools Message Help a x 7 8 fF si a XI O Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From Ektron User Date Wednesday July 23 2003 3 19 PM To support ektron com Subject Sample Site inquiry This form was submitted from the Ektron CMS Sample Web site 7 23 2003 3 19 08 PM Name John Doe Email john doe yourcompany com PhoneNumber 555 555 1234 problem This feature is great Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 245 Working with HTML Forms Form Generated email sent as XML F 3 7 File Edit View Tools Message Help Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From Ektron User Date Wednesday July 23 2003 3 11 PM To support ektron com Subject Sample Site inquiry lt cmsMail gt lt FormTitle gt Contact Ektron Support lt FormTitle gt lt FormDescription gt Contact Ektron Support Form lt FormDescriptio lt date gt 7 23 2003 3 11 24 PM lt date gt lt MailTo gt support ektron com lt MailTo gt lt MailFrom gt Ektron User lt MailFrom gt lt MailCc gt lt MailSubject gt Sample Site inquiry lt MailSubject gt lt MailPreamble gt This form was submitted from the Ektron Sampl lt Data gt lt Name gt John Doe lt Name gt lt EMail gt john doe yourcompany com lt
360. on NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for information about adding a login Web Part and logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server Form Content Web Part Settings The form content Web Part can be configured to display any form content from your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site To configure one follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the form content Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 2 Minimize the Appearance Settings and expand the CMS400 NET Form Content settings 3 The Form Content Web Part Settings information is displayed In the Form Block ID field enter the ID number of the form content you want to display 5 Click the Apply button for the changes to take effect Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 374 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration The screen is refreshed with the updated content displayed 6 Make additional changes to the Form Content Web Part or click the OK button to close the Modify Web Part area Clicking OK returns you to the Edit Page view Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Form Content When logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint you may manage form content displayed by the form content Web Part assuming you have permissions to do so within Ektron CMS400 NET Some form content related actions that you may perform include e Editing form content e Modify
361. on 6 71 Metadata Searchable Property Publicly viewable Style poroms Attention Converting from text to date Data may be lost conversion may be irreversible without loss Use existing data if possible else default Use default value Default None J E Following these choices is a field that lets you define a default value If you want to simply replace any existing data select Use default value and enter the new value in the Default field If the data is convertible according to the table above and you want to maintain existing data if possible select Use existing data if possible else default Then enter a default value below If the existing data cannot be maintained the default value replaces it Viewing Metadata Definitions You may view any metadata definition To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Metadata Definitions screen in the administrator Workarea as described in Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 Select a language from the drop down list Click the Metadata definition you want to view 4 The View Metadata Definition screen appears From here you can edit and delete this definition See Also Metadata Definition Fields on page 66 Editing a Metadata Definition To edit a metadata definition follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 72 Metadata 1 Access the View Metadata Definition screen whose definition
362. on page 38 Ektron CMS400 NET content can be in any of several states e Green border you can check out the content for editing e Yellow border you can edit the content if you submitted it for publishing otherwise you cannot e Red border you cannot edit the content Once you check out content it cannot be checked out or edited by other users until you check it in To edit content follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as described in Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 Browse to content you want to edit Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 15 Getting Started 4 Click the Edit button LY 5 The Edit Content screen is displayed 6 From that screen you can Edit content Save changes Check in content Enter or edit a summary Enter or edit metadata Submit the content for approval Publish content to the Web site Access the Library For more information see Editing Content on page 49 View Content Difference 3 The compare toolbar button appears when the content is in any state other than published Using Ektron CMS400 NET s content comparison utility eWebDiff you can see the changes made to the selected content To compare the currently published version of a content with the currently staged version follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Browse thr
363. onal Home Products Support News Careers Search Calendar Login Contact Ektron oe k RC SAAB RC Internationalsoldest entry in to the competitive RC racing world is the RC SAAB RC Sportster RC Internationals first entry in to the competitive RC racing world was the RC Sportster The RC Sportster is designed for the entry level RC enthusiast RC Cheetah RC Internationals most successful entry in to the competitive RC racing world is the RC Cheetah The RC Cheetah is designed for the hard core RC enthusiast Go Back By setting recursive and filter by folder properties you can segregate the search to selected folders on your Web site The following are examples of industries that can benefit from XML Indexing Industry Use XML indexing to find Health Care A cardiologist whose practice is located in your city Human Resources Sick time policy Real Estate A house with a zip code of 03031 priced under 200 000 Hospitality A hotel in Boston Online Retail Fleece gloves for men Educational A course in NET programming Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 152 XML IndexingManaging XML Setting up a User defined Search To create a user defined search follow these steps Step For more information see 1 Select an XML configuration Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 2 Foreach field to be searched assign Specifyin
364. ons Standard amp Advanced Permissions on page 80 Add user or group to permission table Click EP Adding a User or User Group to the Permissions Table on page 83 Remove user or group from permission table Click g Deleting Users or User Groups from the Permissions Table on page 84 View membership users Click View MemberShip users Private Content amp Memberships on page 114 Have this folder inherit permissions from parent folder Check box next to Allow this object to inherit permissions Inheritance on page 79 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 82 Setting Permissions Action How to perform it For more information see Make content in this folder private Check box next to The content Private Content on page 114 in this folder is private and can only be viewed by authorized users and members Adding a User or User Group to the Permissions Table NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE To add a user or user group to the Permissions Table follow these steps Before adding users or groups you must break inheritance See Inheritance on page 79 If a user and the user group to which that user belongs are both given permission to a folder the user has all permissions to which he she is assigned as well as permissions assigned to the user group You can only assign Read Only per
365. ons only admin are removed from the database See Also Purging a Can purge Task on page 287 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 279 Managing Tasks Restrictions on the Task Flow Process e Only users with archive and delete permissions can set a task s status to archived or deleted This can be done at any stage of the task flow process e Notes can be entered for the task at any time e An administrator can assign a task to any state at any time Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder 14 view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories The categories appear in The Tasks Folder on page 266 After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can redirect your tasks to another user To select all tasks on a screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below View Tasks Assigned To Application Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Tasks Open tasks assigned to yourself and e Create a new task open tasks you have assigned to other users e Delete a task e View a task e Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 280 Managing Tasks Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen All O
366. or root content folder Recursive Specifies whether the summary list includes information from No the starting folder s subfolders e No summary list is not recursive e Yes summary list is recursive Show Summary Used to specify if the summaries for the content in summary list No are displayed e No summaries are not displayed e Yes summaries are displayed Style Information Insert an inline style that is applied to the hyperlinks generated by the summary list Example backgroundcolor cccccc border solid blue ipt Order By Choose how you want to order the summary list by Title e Title title of the content e DateModified date the content was last modified e DateCreated date the content was created e AuthorFname first name of the last editor e AuthorLname last name of the last editor Order By Asc Choose how to sort the summary list Asc Desc e Asc ascending order A gt Z e Desc descending order Z gt A Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 378 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Field Description Default Show Info Maximum Number Additional information to display in the summary list None e None no additional information e DateModified date and time content was last modified e DateCreated date and time content was created e AuthorFname first name of the last editor e AuthorLname last name of the last editor Specify t
367. or file assets Load Balance Path er M Make Directory Relative to this Web site CMSSample 5 Use the following table to help you fill out the form Field Description Images Files Specify if the load balance path folder is for images or files Load Balance Path Enter the folder path Make Relative If the folder or virtual folder resides under your Ektron CMS400 NET site root check off the box to make the path relative to that Otherwise remove the check if the path is not relative to the site path Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 408 Load Balancing 6 Click the Save button E to save and add the new load balance folder to the Ektron CMS400 NET library The screen is refreshed and the View Library Load Balance Settings screen is displayed with the changes reflected Notice the green check It notifies you that IIS on the current Web server successfully resolved the virtual directory and located its physical folder 7 To further verify the load balance path is working successfully look at the View Library Load Balance Setting screen in the Workarea for the other Ektron CMS400 NET Web server machine View Library Load Balance Settings fems300sample uploadedimages images x v c inetpub wwwroot cms300sa Notice that the two Web path names are identical but the physical paths are different This proves that IIS resolved each one differently What Now
368. orce All Approvers Approvers after the user submitting content in the approval chain must approve the content For example assume the approval chain is set as below User or Group Name Approval Order Content contributor 1 Department Head 2 Webmaster 3 If the Approval Method is Force All Approvers and the Department Head submits content the content must be approved by the content contributor then the department head and the Webmaster before it is published If the Approval Method is Do Not Force All Approvers and the Department Head submits content the content must only be approved the Webmaster before it is published Changing the Approval Method By default the approval method is set to Do Not Force All Approvers To change the approval method for a content folder or item follow these steps 1 Access the approval table as described in Viewing a Folder s Approval Chain on page 87 2 Click the Edit button Cy 3 The Edit Approval Method screen appears Select an approval method by clicking the radio button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 92 Setting Approval Chains 5 Click the Save button fm Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 93 Managing Library Items Managing Library Items Before users can insert images and files into their content they must be uploaded to the server that contains Ektron CMS400 NET
369. order A menu appears 5 Click the Add Content button 6 The original language content appears 7 If the screen uses an XML configuration select the text that you want to translate NOTE You cannot use Machine Translation to translate field names in an XML configuration XLIFF files are a good way to translate XML field names See Also Using the Language Xport Feature on page 325 8 Click the Translate Content button 4 9 The translation screen appears Machine Translation Source Language English x Target Language English z Glossary Gener o x Translate Lots of new features in Ektron cms300 10 Select the source old and target new languages 11 If the content should refer to a specific glossary select one from the dropdown list 12 Click the Translate button 13 The translation appears If it looks OK press Paste Content 14 The translated content replaces the original content in the editor Modify as needed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 323 Multi Language Support 15 In order to add metadata to content metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language See Also Metadata on page 62 16 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Accessing Content via its Content Folder To machine translate content by identifying its content folder follow these
370. ore than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 193 Using the Data Designer Field Description Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically SH AE ARH El Apply Style gt N art music sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally SHSBRRAA pi Apply Style v Normal C art music sports Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Value Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here
371. ormation about creating virtual directories in IIS Setting Up Ektron CMS400 NET Load Balancing Review With the completion of setting up the virtual directories on both Web server machines you are ready to create the load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET Before we begin let s review the virtual directories that have been created Computer1 Virtual Directory Points to Uploadedimages C lnetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedimages UploadedFiles C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFiles LB_Images1 Computer2 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedim ages LB Files1 Computer2 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 411 Load Balancing Computer1 Virtual Directory Points to LB_Images2 Computer3 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedim ages LB Files2 Computer3 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es Computer2 Virtual Directory Uploadedimages Points to C MnetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedimages UploadedFiles C MnetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFiles LB_Images1 Computer1 C lInetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploadedim ages LB Files1 Computer1 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFil es LB_Images2 Computer3 C lInetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploa
372. ormation for the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site including License keys Default language Maximum content and summary sizes email notification Physical library folders on file server Builtin user information Editor options Work page size settings You must complete this before any user can access your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing Application Setup Information To view Ektron CMS400 NET setup information follow these steps 1 Fee Access the Workarea See Also Accessing the Workarea on page 6 Click the Settings folder button in the left frame Expand the folder tree and click the Configurations folder Click the Setup folder The Application Setup screen is displayed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 20 Modifying the Application Setup Screen Updating Setup Information To update setup information follow these steps 1 Access the Application Setup screen as described in Viewing Application Setup Information on page 20 Click the Edit button C The Application Setup screen appears Update the fields as needed The following table explains the fields Field Description License Key s Enter the license key sent to you from Ektron via email into this field Module Licenses Enter the license key for WeblmageFX that was sent to you via email See Enabling WeblmageFX on page 24 for more information Default Application Language
373. ory Setup screen e A user is added to Ektron CMS400 NET or his group membership changes in the Active Directory e The user logs in or someone clicks on the Refresh button 3 on the user s View User Information screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 450 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Mapping the Administrator Group On the Ektron CMS400 NET Active Directory Setup screen you can identify an AD user group that maps to the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator group Active Directory Setup Ly Active Directory Authentication is Enabled and Requires More Configuration Active Directory Installed Active Directory Authentication Enabled Active Directory Integration Enabled Auto Add User Enabled Auto Add User To Group Enabled User Property Association CMS Property Active Directory Property EmailAddri mail FirstName givenName LastName sn CMS Administrator Group Association AD Group Name AD Domain Administrators planets com Domain All Domains Administrators have access to all functions documented in this documentation Unlike other Ektron CMS400 NET user groups whose names are copied from the AD the Administrator and Everyone group names cannot be changed Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 451 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature For example if the AD has a user group named CMSAdmin whose me
374. ou implement this feature the possibilities become endless and the time required to update each Web site is drastically reduced In the diagram above the Ektron site is displayed as the hosting company s Web site while the sample site is the Web site where the content is also displayed Setting up a Syndicated Template Before a Web site can use your content you must set up your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site to send out the content The template used to syndicate the content is left blank except for the code that handles the syndication This is done so that the content being displayed on the other server only shows content from the content item and no other images that might change the look and feel of the Web site To do this create an Ektron CMS400 NET template that includes the following custom tag and nothing else lt Soption explicit gt lt include file web config gt lt dim currentUserID jsObj Dim cConts conObj Dim ErrString id Site IF request cookies ecm HasKeys THEN currentUserID request cookies ecm user_id Site request cookies ecm Site_id else currentUserID 0 Site end if Set jsObj CreateObject Scripting Dictionary jsObj Add Browser Request ServerVariables http_user_agent jsObj Add ServerName Request ServerVariables SERVER_NAME jsObj Add ResolveImgPath TRUE jsObj Add ResolveHrefPath TRUE jsObj Add jsPath Request
375. ou will get many fewer hits After you click Search a new screen appears listing all AD groups that satisfy the search criteria Click the box next to groups that you want to create in Ektron CMS400 NET Then click the Save button to copy their information Setup Guidelines 1 Make sure that the users and user groups in the Active Directory are defined correctly Remember that when you enable AD integration first name last name and email are copied from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Determine which AD users and groups will be used in your Ektron CMS400 NET 3 Try to match up names For example if a user in Ektron CMS400 NET has the username of jsmith but that user in AD has a username of john smith rename the user in Ektron Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 468 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature CMS400 NET or in Active Directory so they match This can be done during the actual integration but doing it beforehand will simplify the process later John Smith Properties 21x B Published Certificates Member Of Dial in Object Security Environment Sessions Remote control Terminal Services Profile General Address Account Profile Telephones Organization Add a New User to the System User logon name Be planets com a User logon name pre Windows 2000 Username jsmith PLANETS Jismith First Name Logon Hours Lo
376. ough your Web site until you find content that has a staged version to be compared with 3 If the floating toolbar does not appear right click the mouse to display it 4 Click the View Differences button g eWebDiff opens in a new window NOTE See Comparing Versions of Content on page 85 for additional information about the CMS Compare utility Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 16 Getting Started Approve E When logged in as a user who is part of an approval chain you may see content with a yellow border The yellow border indicates that the content is in the approval chain If you are the next approver of the content an Approve button Ez appears in the toolbar To approve submitted content follow these steps 1 Browse to a content that is submitted and awaiting your approval 2 Ifthe floating toolbar does not appear right click the mouse to display it Click the Approve button i4 4 The Approve Content screen is displayed 5 Perform one of the following actions Approve E the content and submit it to the next approver If you are the last approver the content is published to the site Decline E the content which checks the content in and makes it available for editing by all users with permissions NOTE If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affec
377. our Web pages display open the page s Web form and place a lt link rel stylesheet tag within its lt HEAD gt tags Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 34 Managing Content Folders Field Description Template filename for this folder leave blank to inherit Specify a new template for the content folder Or leave this field blank to inherit the template from the parent content folder Content in this folder appears on your Web site within the template you choose XML Configuration Choose the XML configuration to assign to the content folder from the drop down list or check off the inherit box to inherit the XML configuration from the parent content folder See Also Assigning XML Configurations on page 136 Metadata Custom See Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 Fields available for folder Should Office documents added to this folder be published as PDF Specify if Office documents in this folder are published to the Web as PDF files This property appears when the Publish as PDF property is checked in Settings gt Configuration gt Setup See Also Updating Setup Information on page 21 Note This property appears when Ektron DMS400 v1 1 or later is installed For more information see PDF Generation on page 495 5 Purge History Click the Update button E The Purge History option lets you delete historic
378. p to replace the group you selected in Step 2 5 Click the Save button E to finalize the change Deleting a User Group Deleting a User Group in AD If you delete a user group in AD and users are assigned to the group within Ektron CMS400 NET the group is not automatically deleted in Ektron CMS400 NET However any Ektron CMS400 NET users who were members of the group are no longer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 453 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature members the next time their Ektron CMS400 NET information is updated The discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens Deleting a User Group in Ektron CMS400 NET If you delete a user group in Ektron CMS400 NET and users are assigned to that group within AD nothing happens This is because the AD Integration Feature assumes that in Ektron CMS400 NET the administrator only sets up user groups that are meaningful to Ektron CMS400 NET and some AD groups are not meaningful to Ektron CMS400 NET The Screens of the Active Directory Feature The Active Directory feature uses the following screens e the Active Directory Setup screen e the Active Directory Status screen e the View Users Screen e the View User Groups Screen This section explains how to use each screen The Active Directory Setup Screen The Active Directory Setup screen illustrated below lets you enable and disable
379. pen Tasks All open tasks that is tasks in one of these states for all users e not started e active e awaiting data e on hold e reopened e pending e Edita task e Sort tasks by column Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you e Assign tasks to a different user e View a task e Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or others e Assign tasks to a different user e View a task e Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created e View a task e Sort tasks by column Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you select e Select any user and view all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks e View a task e Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started See Also Task States on page 277 e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 281 Managing Tasks Folder Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Active All whose state is Active e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column On Hold All whose
380. permissions You assign permissions in each category from a different screen e Standard Permissions basic functions e Advanced Permissions administrator level functions The following table explains the permissions in Ektron CMS400 NET Category Permission Allows user user group to perform this action on content in selected folder Standard Read Only View content Edit Edit content Add Add content Delete Delete content Restore Restore old versions of content Library Read Only View items in the corresponding library folder See Also Managing Library Items on page 94 Add Images Upload images to the corresponding library folder Add Files Upload files to the corresponding library folder Add Hyperlinks Add hyperlinks to the corresponding library folder Overwrite Library Overwrite images and files the corresponding library folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 80 Setting Permissions Category Permission Allows user user group to perform this action on content in selected folder Advanced Collections Manage collections See Also Collections on page 288 Add Folders Add sub folders Edit Folders Edit folder properties See Also Folder Properties on page 31 Delete Folders Delete the current folder or its subfolders Traverse Folders View the subfolders under the main content folder By default the everyone user
381. pes of Users Ektron CMS400 NET lets you control the content of your Web site The tasks of creating and maintaining your Web site are allocated among different types of users The types of Ektron CMS400 NET users are User Job Developer Builds templates Administrator Sets up the site adds users and user groups sets permissions and maintains the library Content Maintains Web site by adding modifying and Contributor publishing content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 2 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET You assign privileges to Ektron CMS400 NET users based on the actions for which they are responsible Each user may be assigned any or all types of privileges Users without administrative permissions are known as content contributors This document describes features and actions available to a user with administrative privileges Information about Ektron CMS400 NET s editing and publishing features may be found in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Documentation Management of Content The Ektron CMS400 NET content manager uses database technology to store build and retrieve Web page content The placement of the content on a Web page is determined by templates which you can build with external tools Ektron extends VisualStudio to support the template design process Templates can be thought of as mechanical layouts of your Web pages They incorporate powerful custom functions
382. ply to tabular data Read that section to gain a full understanding of working with tabular data Creating a Table First you insert the table Then you insert an appropriate type of field into each column As examples in the table above the Description field type would be plain text while the In Stock field type would be choices When you insert a field into a table its caption initially appears to the left of the data entry region see below Contact List ame Phone Address Ektron recommends moving the caption into the column headers see below Contact List Name Phone Address I Table commands such as add row and add column are available by placing the cursor inside a table cell and right clicking the mouse IMPORTANT Only table cells into which you place a field are available to visitors of your Web page Editing Tabular Data Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 175 Using the Data Designer To edit tabular data hover the cursor carefully over any table border line until you see a four headed arrow Then click the right mouse button and select Field Properties NOTE You cannot reduce the number of columns by editing the Tabular Data dialog s Columns field To delete a column place the cursor in the column and select Delete Column from the table commands The table commands are available in the table drop down menu the table toolbar
383. pt SharepointMain Gall Virtual Server Galle Online Gallery Web Part List CMS300 Approval CMS300 Calendar CMS300 Collectior CMS300 Content CMS300 Form CMS300 ListSumm CMS300 Login CMS300 Profile EER E E R ETET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 362 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Method Screen 1 Click a Web Web Part List Part 2 Choose the O cms300 Approvals location at the CMS300 Calendar bottom of the al page O cms300 Collection 8 ikad 5 msaren E CMS300 Form CMS300 ListSummary CMS300 Login CMS300 Profile TETE TET CMS300 Search ito 9 of 9 Add to Middle Left Zone Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 363 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration The selected Web Part is added to the selected zone Browse News Sites Ektron CMS300 Samples Jeff demo Ektron CMS300 Integratior Select the gallery you wo browse od This topic Web Part Page Gallery SharepointMain Edit Ektron CMS300 Integration SharepointMain Gallery Online Gallery Web Part List E cms300 Approvals _ CMS300 Content CMS300 Calendar Welcome to RC International CMS300 Collection CMS300 Content CMS300 Form RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We CMS300 ListSummar eat work play and live RC racing In three short years RC Inter
384. r on page 108 Click the Username of the user you want to delete The View User Information screen is displayed Click the Delete button 1 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 109 Managing Users amp User Groups Removing Users from User Groups NOTE Removing a user from a user group does not delete the user from Ektron CMS400 NET Also you cannot remove users from the Everyone or Admin user groups To remove a user from a user group follow these steps di oN Oo ar w Access the User Groups folder as described in Accessing the User Group Folder on page 106 Click the User Group that includes the user you want to remove Members of the selected group appear Click the user to remove The View User Information screen is displayed Click the Delete button 1 to delete the user from the group A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Managing User Groups Creating a New User Group To create a new User Group in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Access the User Groups folder in the administrator Workarea as described in Accessing the User Group Folder on page 106 Click the Add User Group button 8 3 The Add a New User Group to the System screen is displayed Enter a name and brief description of the user group you want to create Click the Save button I Ektron CMS400 NET Admin
385. r Suggest changing it to 20MB 20971520 and see if Limit that helps Exceeded Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 125 Using eWebEditPro Using eWebEditPro This is the editor supplied with Ektron CMS400 NET eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS300 Workarea for Application Administrator Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Ektron Inc Edit Content bh ty XK Title Home Page Content English U S Content Summary Comment E App style Heading4 Arial AAB zu Al S BBBBAA SOX Cao Oe B7S wm x 2 s mpoeme BOlPR LEE Fr Esne u mi I Welcome to RC International RC International is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC racing three short years RC International has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and fly vehicles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products t the RC community We will continue striving to improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC International member For more information about using the editor please refer to the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Prompting the User to Save Upon Closing Browser If a user is editing content and closes the editor s browser window by default the window closes and any unsaved changes are lost You can change this behavior such that if a user closes a window the following mes
386. r browser based editor eWebEditPro XML supports the industry s best in context editing environment ensuring user adoption and project success Ektron CMS400 NET also helps to move paper based forms processes to the Web Our editor lets users create Web forms such as expense reports health records and insurance forms deploy them to internal users collect data apply validation and math functions and run forms through workflow all within a browser Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Who Should Read This Documentation This document introduces all the concepts features and instructions for using Ektron CMS400 NET as a Web administrator The Web administrator is the person who is responsible for adjusting the setup of the Web site and alters the site as institutional changes require New areas needing to be added to the Web site the changing of personnel and processes over time may cause these adjustments Online Learning Center Much of the information in this documentation is also presented in a tutorial animated format on Ektron s Web site To access Ektron s CMS400 NET Web Training go to http www ektron com cms400 web cms aspx id 922 Sample Site Used in this Document This documentation uses the sample ASPX Web site installed with Ektron CMS400 NET to explain and demonstrate functionality in a Ektron CMS400 NET controlled Web site Ty
387. r you can assign a different one at the folder level When assigning an XML configuration you may choose one of the following options e Inheriting an XML Configuration on page 136 e Assigning a Different XML Configuration on page 137 If you assign no XML configuration Ektron CMS400 NET assumes the content is XHTML Inheriting an XML Configuration Content and folders can inherit XML configuration settings from their parent folders To set inheritance add a check to the Inherit XML Configuration check box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 136 Managing XML Assigning a Different XML Configuration To assign an XML configuration other than the one assigned to the parent folder follow these steps 1 Access the XML configuration setting form as described in Where Can XML Configurations be Assigned on page 136 2 If the Inherit XML Configuration box is checked remove the check by clicking the box 3 Open the drop down list to display available XML configurations XML Configuration for this content I Inherit XML Configuration RC Planes NOTE See Adding a New XML Configuration on page 131 for more information about adding XML configurations 4 Click the XML configuration you want to assign NOTE Choosing None HTML indicates the content is strictly XHTML 5 Click the Preview button a to view the XML configuration The XML configuration appea
388. randecsanabansdeds 46 Viewing CGOMTeMt cissiisrssisni nr ner aeaaea 46 Content Toolbar BUMOMS sussend aae 48 Editing Comteit iisssssiiserisese er On Pr ene eee 49 Moving COMRCIE i iciisccccsccsesacceccsrenacczcenuatuccasennncvkentenaecckensranenassese 50 Before You Move Content vecsscccosceeiseccccsevecste casasevart tesacevanencesiedivin 51 Ra E MOVO n EE 51 Moving COmteNi sersan aE 51 Moving Several Content Items at Once ssssssnnensesenneseeer rrenen 52 Viewing and Restoring Historical Versions of Content 53 Purging Historical Versions of Content cccccesseeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 53 Scheduling Comte nt sscicsac sci ccssecssccccassecsecsscsceecstcaceisecetdaceateennadens 54 De leting ComM nt escien aaaea ia 54 Content HiStOiy eee ieee oe Or Pere ner Beer fer Dever reer epee nrc eromenr ona 55 Content Perini Sslons ius iiissisisesecsssnacasencestecnstncaenncecencasnncscenteonadsies 57 CGontent Approvals enon a ene eee enn 57 Link Gheckihg ce eae cece ee net 57 Assigning Tasks to Content ccsecccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeees 57 Content Propertie ee PP eee ee 57 Content Repor Sessan e arsaa 59 Adding Content Programmatically cccccssssseeeeeeeeeseeeeees 60 Metadata isisisi ionian eaaa iaaa aasi 62 Adding a Metadata Definition seeceeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeneees 65 Converting the Style of a Metadata Definition cece 70 Viewing Metadata Definitions cccccseeeeseese
389. rd search fields This type of metadata known as searchable property helps site visitors find content on your Web site illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 62 Metadata Search Text All the words C Any of the words C Exact Phrase T Match Partial Words City of Origin These search criteria also appear when a user clicks the search button h on the View Contents of Folder screen See illustration below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 63 Metadata Search Content Folder M Content M Forms I Include Archived Search Text PO Search Tep CiS Comments CO Date Created potween None a Eh and None a Ei Date Modified potween None a Ek and None a ait Language Any id Last Editor s Last Name Status Any gt City of Origin Any gt Part Number Any If your site supports multiple languages you create metadata definitions for each supported language These features are explained in more detail in the following sections e Adding a Metadata Definition on page 65 e Viewing Metadata Definitions on page 72 e Editing a Metadata Definition on page 72 e Deleting a Metadata Definition on page 73 e Assigning Metadata to a Folder on page 74 e Adding Metadata to Content on page 77 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 64 Meta
390. re Non FictionPublisher Sams The Properties tab is described below Information on the Properties Screen The content properties screen displays the following information about the selected content Field Description Content Title Title assigned to content Content ID ID assigned to content Status The content s status See Also Content Status on page 14 Last User to Edit Last user to edit this content Last Edit Date Date and time when content was last edited Start Date Date and time when content will go live on the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 47 Managing Content Field Description End Date Date and time when the content s action on end date is triggered This may include being removed from the Web site For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual section Scheduling Content to Begin and End gt Setting Archive Options Setting Archive Options on page 60 Date Created Date and time when this content was created Approval Method The approval method used for this content See Also The Approval Method on page 91 Approvals Approval chain for this content See Also Setting Approval Chains on page 86 XML Configuration The XML configuration assigned to the content or inherited from the content folder If no XML configuration is assigned Ektron CMS400 NET assumes the content is
391. re supported For a formal definition please review the Service Description e CreatePdfFile e CreateMultiplePdfFile 17 Navigate to the pdf995 folder that was installed earlier 18 Double click pdf995s exe If the following dialog box appears click No In order to complete the installation of Pdf995 please install the free Converter If you have not downloaded it you can download it free from www pdf995 com Do you want to download it now 19 Run ps2pdf995 exe 20 Click Accept on the PDF995 User Configuration Screen 21 Run omniformat exe 22 Click Accept to accept the OmniFormat End User Agreement 23 Run ToolsetKey exe 24 Enter your name in the Name field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 501 Asset Management Administration 25 Enter your license key in the Key Value field NOTE This license is separate from Ektron CMS400 NET The license is provided to you when you purchase the PDF generation software 26 Create a new directory under C called pdfoutput 27 Navigate to C omniformat 28 Double click OmniFormat exe 29 Click Options OmniFormat m Watch Folders c Somniformat watch Open Folder Add Folder Clear Save m Output Format PDF Portable Document Format Single Pass Help Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 502 Asset Management Administration 30 Ch
392. re you want to delete this font from the database 4 Click OK to delete the font 5 The screen is refreshed and the updated fonts table is displayed NOTE When you delete a font from Ektron CMS400 NET you do not delete it from your computer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 264 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks NOTE Much of the Task functionality is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Users Manual gt Managing Tasks section As an administrator you should familiarize yourself with this information Tasks are typically assigned to content to help you monitor and manage changes to your Web site Within Ektron CMS400 NET users can assign tasks to themselves and other users Tasks may include updating content publishing content updating an image and reordering a collection There are two kinds of tasks e Tasks not assigned to content e Tasks assigned to content A standard Ektron CMS400 NET user only sees tasks that are either assigned to or by himself However an administrator can view all tasks regardless of who they are assigned to or by This chapter explains how to access manage and assign tasks via the following topics e The Tasks Folder on page 266 e Task Permissions on page 266 e Task Categories and Types on page 267 e Task States on page 277 e Email Notification on page 284 e Archiving a Task on page 285 e Deleting a Task on pag
393. reate the translation files for that content or modify the criteria If you modify you can the view the report again until you are satisfied that the correct content will be included To preview the contents of the translation files follow these steps 1 Complete the criteria on the Select Content To Translate screen See Also Selecting Content To Translate on page 326 Click the Reports button iii 3 The screen displays the report for all content that satisfies the criteria An example is below Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 330 Multi Language Support XLIFF XHTML files created Trg Date FolderID Target Language File Status Title ID Sre Date Bob s new content 29 09 Dec 2004 Contact Ektron 15 26 May 2004 Greeting 24 04 Dec 2003 Home Page Content 1 04 Dec 2003 Introducing the RC Redstar 23 04 Dec 2003 new content 28 07 Dec 2004 Private Content 2 03 Mar 2004 Support Page 8 27 Aug 2002 Trinity In Line Pipe 22 04 Dec 2003 2064 Does not exist NLA ia 07 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date 07 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date 07 Dec 2004 Oo 2064 Up to date 08 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date NA 0 2064 Does not exist 08 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date 08 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date 08 Dec 2004 0 2064 Up to date The following table describes the report s column headers Column Header Description Title The content title ID The content ID number Src date The most rece
394. ription Title Name given to XML configuration ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET upon creation of the configuration Description Detailed description of configuration given by creator or last editor Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 140 Managing XML If the XML configuration was created using external XML files instead of the Data Designer the following information also appears e Editor Information on page 141 e Validation Information on page 141 Editor Information NOTE This section only appears if you do not use the Data Designer to create your XML configuration The editor information contains the file names of the XSLTs used when editing and adding content in the editor Field Description Edit XSLT XSLT applied to the content when being edited If no edit XSLT is specified the Edit Data Design option is enabled in the toolbar Save XSLT XSLT used to transform the XML created in the editor when saved to the database Advanced XML file that contains display information schema Configuration validation and other advanced XML data Validation Information NOTE This section only appears if you do not use the Data Designer to create your XML configuration Content that is created and edited with Ektron CMS400 NET may be validated with a schema if desired The validation information contains information about the schema
395. rivate Content amp Memberships 3 The View Users In Group screen is displayed See Also Membership User Groups on page 121 Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group To add a membership user to a membership user group follow these steps NOTE Only membership users can be added to membership user groups 1 Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group to which you want to add a membership user as described in Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group on page 121 2 Click the Add Membership User button F 3 The Add User to Group screen is displayed NOTE Only membership users who do not belong to the group appear 4 Click the user you want to add 5 Aconfirmation message is displayed 6 Click OK See Also Membership User Groups on page 121 Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User Groups See Assigning Permissions for Memberships on page 123 Editing Membership User Group Name To edit a membership user group name follow these steps NOTE The membership user group All_ members cannot be edited 1 Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership group you want to edit as described in Viewing Membership Users in a Membership User Group on page 121 2 Click the Edit button Cy 3 The Edit User Group screen is displayed Change the membership group name Ektron CMS400 NET A
396. rmat This may take a few moments Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned Off Library Folder CenturyMedical quicklinks Title ID Date Modified URL Link center column lower middle 86 2 7 2005 4 12 37 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 45 center column top home 87 2 7 2005 4 12 38 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 46 common footer 85 5 29 2005 1 47 40 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 44 home page main content 88 7 15 2005 2 58 57 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 47 privacy policy 84 2 7 2005 4 12 36 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 43 Syndicated content 91 3 8 2005 11 52 46 AM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 50 Syndicated content demo 90 6 29 2005 3 44 04 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index aspx id 49 Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned On Library Folder CenturyMedical quicklinks Quicklinks English U S Q Title ID Date Modified URL Link center column lower middle 86 2 7 2005 4 12 37 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid45 aspx center column top home 87 2 7 2005 4 12 38 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid46 aspx common footer 85 5 29 2005 1 47 40 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid44 aspx home page main content 88 7 15 2005 2 58 57 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid47 aspx privacy policy 84 2 7 2005 4 12 36 PM CMS400Example centurymedical index_ektid43
397. rms the user submitting the form that his entry has been completed Then enter a post back message for the form The postback message can be as long as you want and include images files hyperlinks etc Edit Metadata Edit the metadata for the content See Also Metadata on page 62 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 241 Working with HTML Forms Button or Tab Description Schedule Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 56 Comment Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content A Submit Submit content into approval process E Publish Publish content to Web site Note If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button Eal Check In Save and check in content This button does not submit the content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it Save Save the content without submitting it into the approval process If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content Decline This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the co
398. ron CMS400 NET Content When logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint you may perform any action on the collection assuming you have the proper permissions Some collection related actions you may perform include e Adding new content to the collection e Re ordering items in the collection e Removing items from the collection e Editing collection information To manage the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site collection within SharePoint follow these steps 1 Log In to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via the Login Web Part see Login Web Part on page 380 for more information NOTE If the collection Web Part is in a different zone than the login Web Part it may be necessary to refresh the zone in which the content Web Part is located Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 370 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 2 The collection displayed by the collection Web Part is surrounded by a colored border 4 Collection Web Part Collection Plastic Molder 123 Oct 30 2002 RC International is looking for an experienced plastics molder Servo Control Engineer 124 Oct 29 2002 RC International is looked for a highly skilled servo control engineer to join our team 3 Perform actions by using the floating toolbar or by clicking on the Workarea button to access the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea As you can see Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server can b
399. rough folders on Ektron CMS400 NET see the following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Working with Folders and Content gt Search Content Folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 37 Managing Content Managing Content When you enter the Content folder in Ektron CMS400 NET as an administrator you can control every aspect of the content and folders Some controls include setting permissions approvals and adding editing publishing and deleting content Below is an example of the Content folder E enn NO PEE D Content EAEN 20 Human Resources 3 Marketing Contents of Folder Content Title Language ID Status Date Modified Contact Ektron 1033 15 26 May 2004 1 31 News Greeting 1033 24 04 Dec 2003 1C H Products Home Page Content 1033 1 04 Dec 2003 1C 2 Support Introducing the RC Redstar 1033 23 04 Dec 2003 1C 8 Syndication Private Content 1033 2 Support Page 1033 9 Minitciitel CL Cinania Trinity In Line Pipe 1033 22 This chapter explains how to add edit publish and delete content Permissions and Approvals are explained in later chapters 03 Mar 2004 O2 27 Aug 2002 0 04 Dec 2003 11 IW ie gt O lO m o Creating Updating Templates During the setup of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site templates were created for your Web pages A template typically includes page headers and footers as well as placeholders for content forms summaries calendars
400. rs 6 7 Click to close the window 8 The XML Configuration window closes and you return to the Edit Properties window 9 Click the Update button W The XML configuration is assigned to the content folder or item Assigning an XML Configuration to Content See Adding XML Content on page 42 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 137 Managing XML Viewing XML Configurations To view an XML configuration follow these steps 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 2 Click the configuration you want to view View XML Configurations Title ID Date Modified Last Editor ek 5 4 2004 10 4 28 30 Administrator Application ektron sample 6 5 2004 10 1 46 55 Administrator Application Job Postings 3 1 2002 11 4 08 55 Administrator Application RC Cars 1 1 2002 11 4 08 19 Administrator Application RC Planes 2 1 2002 11 4 08 44 Administrator Application The View XML Configurations screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 138 Managing XML XML Configuration Created with Data Designer External Files View XML Configuration Physician Profiles Title Physician Profiles ID 11 Description Properties View XML Configuration Testing using external X EAA Xr Properties Display Informat
401. rs Translate into the new language then delete the original content NOTE Atthis point you can click theTranslate Content button af to have the software translate the content You can then edit it as needed to perfect the translation 7 In order to add metadata to content metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language See Also Metadata on page 62 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Accessing Content via its Content Folder To copy content into a new content of a different language follow these steps 1 ar wo nr Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate Its status must allow editing it cannot be submitted or pending From the View drop down list select a original language Click the content you want to translate It appears on the View Content screen Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content Add selectlanquage select lanquage Danish German Standard The original language content appears Translate into the new language then delete the original content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 321 Multi Language Support 7 In order to add metadata to content metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language See Also Metadata
402. rs have permissions for it 2 Select the language of the new content from the language drop down See Also Working with Multi Language Content on page 312 3 Click the Add Content button E 4 The Add Content window opens M Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Summary Metadata Schedule Comment E apply Style Normal gt Verdana 200 A I BZ U Al SOB RRAA SS Om Y AAAA x x nbsp TM E Ho B 4 a 5 Create content in the editor using the following table Field Description Title Enter a title for the content Add to Check this box if you want to save a Quicklink to Quicklinks this content when you save it Table If you uncheck this box Ektron CMS400 NET does not create a Quicklink for this content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 40 Managing Content Field Description Content Searchable Check this box if you want this content to be included in an external search of your CMS Web site If you uncheck this box Ektron CMS400 NET excludes the content when a search is performed See Also Searching Content on the Web Site on page 309 Body Text Insert content that will be viewed on the Web site NOTE For additional information about using the editor supplied with Ektron CMS400 NET see Using eWebEditPro in the Ektron CMS400 NET U
403. rt displays a login button that lets users log in to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint and be authorized to work with Ektron CMS400 NET related content Here is an example of the login Web Part displayed in the SharePoint portal server Login Web Part Login In this example the Logout Workarea and Preview buttons are displayed because we are currently logged in If we were not logged in only Login would appear Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 380 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Login Web Part Settings The login Web Part includes no configurable settings Logging Into a Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site Via SharePoint Server You can log in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Portal Server and be authorized to manage content as well as perform any other action To log in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Portal Server follow these steps 1 Navigate to the SharePoint Zone that contains the Ektron CMS400 NET Login Web Part Click the Login button The Ektron CMS400 NET Login box appears Enter a valid Ektron CMS400 NET username and password Click the Login button The username and password are sent to the Ektron CMS400 NET server Upon successful authorization you are logged in to Ektron CMS400 NET ou fF WN NOTE Logging in via SharePoint does not refresh the entire screen Instead only the zone that includes the login We
404. s available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt No Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default this text is Event Type To change the default text edit this field Event Types Available If you want to allow users to assign event types to events on this calendar check this box Event Types Required If you want to require users to assign event types when adding events check this box This checkbox can only be checked if Event Types Available is checked Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 296 Calendars Section Description Instructions If you allow users to filter a calendar view by event type text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the selection box By default this text is Select Event Type To View Show All Company Holid Trade Show If you want to change this text edit this field Show All label If you allow users to filter a calendar view by event type the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All Show All Company Holiday If you want to change this text edit this field Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 297 Calendars
405. s 21 T table permissions accessing 81 adding user or group 83 deleting user or group 84 editing user or group 84 tasks archiving 285 deleting 286 email notification 284 folder 266 introduction 265 permissions 266 purging 287 states description 278 introduction 277 user vs system assigned 278 view options 280 options by users 283 templates applying to content folder 35 creating and updating 38 defined 3 toolbar floating 10 translation files importing 335 submitting to agency 335 U URL aliasing automatic activating 416 deactivating 416 enabling 416 introduction 415 result 417 automatic vs manual 415 introduction 414 manual activating 425 adding base reference to tem plate 426 assigning 426 benefits 419 deactivating 425 deleting 430 editing 430 enabling 419 introduction 418 permissions 425 user groups accessing user group folder 106 creating 110 deleting 112 editing 112 introduction 105 membership see membership user groups removing user from 110 viewing 111 users accessing user folder 105 adding to permissions table 83 builtin 26 creating new 106 deleting 109 deleting from permissions table 84 editing 109 editing in permissions table 84 email disabling notification 107 emergency when you cannot log in 26 introduction 105 language introduction 107 membership see membership users password setting 107 preferences force on all users 24 removing from user group 110 viewing 108
406. s cannot edit the content Decline This button appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task x Cancel Close the editor without saving changes Adding XML Content If an XML configuration is assigned to a content folder or item users can create XML content within it Assigning an XML Configuration You can assign an XML configuration to an individual content item or its parent folder Similarly a folder other than the root content folder can have a unique XML configuration or inherit one from the parent folder See Also Assigning XML Configurations on page 136 XML Configuration on Content Properties Screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 42 Managing Content View Properties for the Content Greeting eee 7 XML Configuration I Inherit XML Configuration None HTML 7 R None HTML Job Postings ble RC Cars RC Planes XML Configuration on Folder Properties Screen Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 43 Managing Content Edit Properties for the folder Human_Resources Foldername Human_Resources Description ee Style Sheet filename for this
407. s contents appear Click the Properties E button The folder s View Properties screen appears View Properties for the folder Content Foldername Content ID Description Home Style Sheet filename for this folder CMS400Example default css Template filename for this folder contentblock aspx XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content Assumed Metadata Custom Fields available for folder Assigned Required Name a iv title Iv E keywords IV E description v E page M E robots Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 32 Managing Content Folders Folder Properties Toolbar The Folder Properties screen contains these toolbar buttons Button Name Description More Information E Edit Properties Access the Edit Folder properties Editing Folder Ei screen Properties on page 33 a Permissions Access the folder s permissions table Setting Permissions a on page 78 Approvals Access the folder s approvals table Setting Approval B Chains on page 86 Fh Purge History Access the folder s purge history Purge History on T table page 35 Back Go to previous screen T Editing Folder Properties A content folder s properties consist of e name e description e style sheet e template e XML configuration e Metadata To edit any properties for a folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Properties screen
408. sage appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 126 Using eWebEditPro Microsoft Internet Explorer i xi i Click OK to preserve changes when moving to another page Click Cancel to discard changes Cancel i As you can see the user has the option to save changes or exit without saving To enable the above message follow these steps 1 Open the web config file located in your Web site s root folder 2 Change the value of eWebEditProPromptOnUnload tO 1 3 Save web config Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 127 Managing XML Managing XML Ektron CMS400 NET allows you to access the full power of XML by separating Web content from presentation In addition to hiding the XML tags from users Ektron CMS400 NET can serve content to various presentation devices e g PDAs mobile phones WebTV saving users from the tedium of creating duplicate content Review and revision are drastically reduced because the accuracy and format of your Web content is managed using XML schema validation Using XML with Ektron CMS400 NET provides the following benefits e Strictly enforce content and page layout with Ektron s editor Ektron eWebEditPro XML XSLT and WYSIWYG templates for content contributors e Deliver content to multiple devices e g PDAs mobile phones WEB TV e Easily share content across B2B transactions e Advanced XML authoring Ektron s highl
409. screen is displayed From this screen you can edit or delete membership users Editing Membership Users To edit a membership user follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 119 Private Content amp Memberships 1 Access the View Membership User screen of the membership user you want to edit as described in Viewing Membership User Information on page 119 2 Click the Edit button L 3 The Edit Membership User Information screen is displayed Use the following table to assist with editing the membership user s information Field Description Username Enter a unique username for the membership user First Name Enter the first name of the user Last Name Enter the last name of the user Password Enter a password for the user Confirm Pwd Re type the password to confirm it is correct Email Address Enter an email address for the user 5 Click the Update button fi Deleting Membership Users To delete a membership user follow these steps 1 Access the View Membership User screen of the membership user you want to edit as described in Viewing Membership User Information on page 119 2 Click the Delete button 1 3 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 120 Private Content amp Memberships Membership User Groups Membership user groups organ
410. searchable property type metadata Ektron CMS400 NET attempts to maintain any data stored in content blocks that use the definition For example if the data style was number and you change it to text the number stored for that metadata definition is converted to text and maintained in all content that uses it However sometimes Ektron CMS400 NET cannot maintain the data when you change the style For example if you change a metadata definition style from number to date Ektron CMS400 NET cannot Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 70 Metadata convert those styles In this case any data stored in metadata definitions is lost The following table illustrates all conversion scenarios and how Ektron CMS400 NET handles each one It indicates whether data is maintained after you convert from a data style in the left column to a style to its right Text Number Date Boolean Single Multiple Select Select Text _ OK OK NO NO NO Number OK E NO NO NO NO Date OK NO z NO NO NO Boolean OK NO NO _ NO NO Single Select OK NO NO NO _ OK Multiple Select OK NO NO NO NO E Table legend e OK Data is maintained e NO Data is lost during conversion When you change the style of a metadata definition the screen often gives you these choices e Use existing data if possible else default e Use default value Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revisi
411. ser Manual 6 After you enter the content you have the following options Button or Tab Summary Metadata Description Edit the summary for the content See Also Adding a Content Summary in the Ektron CMS400 NET User manual Adding a Content Summary on page 63 Note You can restrict a summary s length in the configuration setup screen Edit the metadata for the content See Also Metadata on page 62 Schedule Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 56 Comment Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content A Submit amp Publish Submit content into approval process Publish content to Web site Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 41 Managing Content Button or Tab Description Eal Check In Save and check in content Clicking this button does not submit the content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it Save Save the content without submitting it into the approval process If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other user
412. sing the Data Designer an XSLT is produced to assist you with creating your display XSLT This XSLT includes the structure for your XML documents If a display XSLT is not applied to an XML configuration content is displayed using the default XSLT displayed in the View XSLT screen To view the XSLT for an XML configuration follow these steps 1 Access the View XML Configurations screen as described in Accessing XML Configurations on page 130 2 Click the XML configuration whose XSLT you want to view View XML Configurations Title ID Date Modified ek 5 4 2004 10 4 2 ektron sample 6 5 2004 10 1 Job Postinas 3 1 2002 11 4 C o x NOTE The XSLT only appears if the XML configuration was created using the Data Designer 3 The View XML Configuration screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration 4 Click the View XSLT button Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 147 Managing XML 5 The View XSLT screen is displayed Display Xslt lt xml version 1 0 gt lt xslistylesheet version 1 0 xmlns xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt lt xslioutput method xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 indent ye xml declaration yes gt lt xsl istrip space elements gt lt xsl template match xml space preserve gt lt p gt lt p gt lt div class design_group id jobposting title job posting gt lt div
413. sions of Content See Purge History on page 35 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 53 Managing Content Scheduling Content Scheduling content allows you to specify a future date and time when content will be visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content from the Web site on a specified date and time For more information see Scheduling Content to Begin and End in the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Deleting Content The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site You can only delete content if its status is Approved Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 75 You can delete one or several content items in a folder Both procedures are explained below Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 46 2 Click the Delete button DO 3 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E x CA 4re you sure you wish to submit this content block to the approvers for deletion 2 This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete
414. sk Type Availability on page 275 8 Click Save M 9 Your new Task Categories and Task Types appear on the View Categorization screen Adding a New Task Type to an Existing Task Category To add new Task Type to an existing Task Category follow these steps 1 Click the Add Task Type button L 2 The Add Task Type Screen appears 3 Click the Add Task Type to New Task Category radio button or click the drop down box Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 272 Managing Tasks 4 Choose a category from the drop down box Task Type Ohaa Task Type to Existing Task Category ee 5 Complete Steps 5 9 from Adding a New Task Category and Task Type on page 271 Editing Task Category You can edit a Task Category names To edit a Task Category click the Task Category link View Categorization C Check to Delete Task Category E g Administration Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability Fl Add New User Email Available g Set Up Email Accounts For New Users Available A text box screen appears next to the category name Use the text box to change the name Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 273 Managing Tasks Task Category 3 Administratio Administration i Rp You can either save E the changes or cancel p the edit Editing a Task Type From the View Categorization screen you can edit a Task Type This allows
415. sonalized by different users assuming they have the necessary permissions The type of Web Part you are working with can be important because e You may have permission to modify only some types of Web Parts on certain Web Part Pages but not on other Web Part Pages e You may be able to connect to certain types of Web Parts ona Web Part Page but not to other types of Web Parts on the same Web Part Page Web Part Zones The areas or zones are the locations on a SharePoint Web Parts page where Web Parts can be inserted Web Part zones can contain one or more Web Parts Microsoft defines a Web Part zone as Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 359 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration A container with a set of properties that can be configured to control the organization and format of Web Parts on a Web Part Page Web Part zones can also be used to provide protection against changes to Web Parts Although their sizes are customizable all Web Part pages contain these four Web zones Middle Left Zone Middle Right Zone Bottom Zone SharePoint Server Permissions Regardless of other permissions a SharePoint Portal Server user must have at least Member permissions to be able to insert and customize Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts These permissions are configured on the SharePoint server by the SharePoint Portal Server administrator not the Ektron CMS400 NET administrator Refer t
416. splayed Click Shared View or Personal View to display the respective view 4 The page refreshes and the change is reflected 5 Repeat this process to return to the previous view Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts When configured properly all Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts are available to be inserted by browsing to the SharePoint Portal Virtual Server Gallery Inserting Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts This section explains the basics behind inserting Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts 1 Log in to SharePoint Portal Server 2 Create or navigate to the Web Part zone into which you want to insert an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Part 3 Click Edit Page at the bottom of the left navigation menu Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 361 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration You are in Edit Page Mode Click Modify Shared Page Add Web Parts then Browse The Web Part zones are displayed and the Add Web Parts menu appears on the right side of the screen Click Virtual Server Gallery A list of all Web Parts that have been added to the Virtual Server Gallery including the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts appears at the bottom of the page NOTE For information about Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts see Managing Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts on page 365 9 Insert an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Part one of two ways Method Screen Drag and drop the Web Part to the desired zone l CMS300 Co
417. sset Management Server AMS Registration For administrators using Ektron CMS400 NET to initiate a connection to an AMS or change your AMS registration information is easy The following sections explain how to register and manage an AMS with Ektron CMS400 NET e Steps to Setup a New AMS Connection on page 490 e Managing AMS Connections on page 491 Steps to Setup a New AMS Connection 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Asset Server Setup Click the Edit button C Add the location of the AMS in the Asset Management Server Address URL field 4 Click Save fA The following appears Asset Management Server Registration Asset Management ID 55e05fc4 803d 4959 a818 3b70aa188a0b Registered Asset Management Servers e http localhost AssetManagement Show detailed registration information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 490 Click the Show detailed registration information link to see Asset Management Administration which plug ins and extensions are registered The following is an CONNECTIONINFO example ID NAME PLUGIN 101 Office Documents Documents NAME EXT MIME msword doc application msword msword dot application msword ms excel xla application vnd ms excel ms excel xic application vnd ms excel ms excel xim application vnd ms excel ms excel xls application vnd ms excel ms excel xit application vnd ms excel ms excel xlw applicat
418. ssetManagement Contfig file to configure the Asset Management feature By making changes in the AssetManagement Config file you can e control what file types users can upload For more information see Allowing File Types on page 486 e control whether users automatically preview an asset when the link is clicked If not the user must click the View Preview button to view the asset For more information see Setting the View Type on page 487 For a description of the AssetManagement Config file see The AssetManagement Config File on page 485 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 484 Asset Management Administration The AssetManagement Config File The following table describes the AssetManagement Config file s tags Tag Description lt WebAppPath gt The path of the Web application This is the path to the Asset Management folder For example C Inetpub wwwroot AssetManagement lt WebApp gt The Asset Management folder For example AssetManagement lt StorageLocation gt The location of the Asset Library For example C Domain Name or IP Address or Machine Name assetlibrary lt WebRoot gt lt WebShareDir gt The web root of the server For example C Inetpub wwwroot The folder where temporary data files that are waiting to be checked in saved or published are stored For example dmdata lt CatalogName gt The name of the Asse
419. sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 312 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 348 Web SCR VNC S sspe spaa ene 387 Syndicating Web Content as RSS csecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 388 JavaScript Syndication sssssssssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 389 Load Balancing saccciisecrecsscsscsssseetsneesienemrmasnaeanen 395 URE Alia SIMO ee ee eee 414 email FONG Ssusse isiereie seneese iieii 432 Active Directory Feature sicccciccisosiissccccsassnensiiccsesssiessessncese 438 Active Directory Integration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 440 User Authentication Only Mode cssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 472 Ektion ExDlOVer ssicoscisccccasssseaccdiosas renner 476 Asset Management Administration sscsessseeeeee 484 Additional Informatio Missin 509 Appendix A List of Supported Languages 511 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 ii Detailed Table of Contents What s New in the 5 0 Release ccccccsseeeseeeeceneeeeeeees i Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET ese 1 About Ektron CMS400 NET wssscccieccessescdscvasscccisaressectastesseesssscetnaces 1 Who Should Read This Documentation ssseecceseeseeeees 2 Online Learning Genter scisccisecsiccececceetete tte ee 2 Sample Site Used in this DoCument cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenes 2 TYPOS OF USNS cssccscicccsscstwtcrecscstntcrtescccstetactecicte
420. st as you can create separate editions of content for each enabled language you can set up a language specific approval chain and method When determining a folder s approval chain first select a language then select users and groups with authority to approve content in that folder and that language Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 336 Multi Language Support The screen below shows the language selection drop down list on the View Approvals screen View Approvals for the Folder Content S Approval Typ a English US v English US French Standard German Standard User or Group Name ID Approval Method Force All Approvers Only users in the language specific approval chain for a folder can approve content in that language You can also set a language specific approval method See Also The Approval Method on page 91 Working with Tasks in a Multi Language System If you create content then add a task to it the task can be in any enabled language This would be helpful if for example you review English content then want to assign the task of translating it into another language in that language If you create a task then try to assign content to it you can only choose from content in the language of the task Working with Collections in a Multi Language System In a multi language Ektron CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition
421. stall If you let Ektron DMS400 install create the user the default is EKT_ASSET_USER lt Password gt The password for the user created during the install This password is encrypted during the install If you are changing the user and need to encrypt a new password use the dms400encryptpassword exe encryption tool located in C Program Files Ektron CMS400v50 DMS400v11 utilities lt UserDomain gt The domain for the user created during the install lt PdfGenerator gt The location of the PDF generation software If you are using local PDF generation software the path needs to be changed to show the location of your local PDF generation software If you are using Ektron s PDF generator the default location is http pdf generator ektron com PdfManager PdfGenerator asmx For more information see e Setting Up a Local PDF Generator on page 497 e Modifying the lt PdfGenerator gt Tag Information on page 506 Allowing File Types Administrators control which file types are allowed in the Asset Management feature by editing the AssetWanagement config file Reasons for limiting the file types include e Security For example you do not want users to load exe files to your Asset Management server e Ease of Management For example you want your Asset Management server to store doc files only The lt FileTypes gt tags in the AssetManagement config file contain the file types users can uploa
422. state is On Hold e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Pending All whose state is Pending e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Reopened All whose state is Reopened e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Completed All whose state is Completed e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Archived All whose state is Archived e Change to any other state e View a task e Sort tasks by column Deleted All whose state is Deleted e Change to any other state e Purge tasks e View a task e Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 282 Determining Which Tasks a User Can View To provide security Ektron CMS400 NET restricts which users can use the task views These restrictions are listed on the following table Managing Tasks View Administrator User or User who User who All users option group member group to assigned created whom task task task assigned All Open X Assigned by X X Me Assigned to X Me Created by X Me Assigned to X X X X X User Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 283 Managing Tasks View Administrator User or User who User who All users option group member group to assigned created whom t
423. steps 1 Log into the Workarea and go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate Its status must allow editing that is its status cannot be submitted or pending 2 From the View drop down list select an original language that is the language from which it will be translated 3 Click the content you want to translate It appears on the View Content screen 5 Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content It must be a language supported for machine translation English Dutch French German Italian Portuguese Brazil or Spanish Danish German Standard 6 The original language content appears Edit the title if appropriate 7 Continue directions from Click the Translate Content button on page 323 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 324 Multi Language Support Using the Language Xport Feature The Language Xport feature lets you copy content into XLIFF files that can be submitted to a translation agency The agency translates the files and returns them In the final stage you import the translated content back into Ektron CMS400 NET What is XLIFF XLIFF XML Localisation Interchange File Format is a format that stores extracted text and carries data from one step to the next in the localization process To learn more about XLIFF visit these Web sites http www 1
424. system Modifying the lt PdfGenerator gt Tag Information In provide the Asset Management with the location of the local PDF generator modify the lt PdfGenerator gt tag in the AssetManagement Config file Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 506 Asset Management Administration To modify the file follow these steps 1 Open the AssetManagement Config file located in C Inetpub wwwroot AssetManagement 2 Change the information located between the lt PdfGenerator gt tags to the location of the local PDF generator For example lt PdfGenerator gt http pdfgenerator ektron com PdfManager PdfGenerator asmx lt PdfGenerator gt might become lt PdfGenerator gt http localhost Ekt ronPdfGenerator PdfGenerator asmx lt PdfGenerator gt 3 Save and Close the file Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation Administrators decide if this feature is enabled and to which folders it applies By enabling this feature for CMS400 NET administrators can change a folder s properties to allow PDF generation The following steps explain how to enable or disable this feature 1 In the CMS Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Setup Click the Edit Properties button C 3 Click the Enable Office documents to be published as PDF checkbox Publish as PDF Enable Office documents to be published as PDF 4 Click the Save button fq Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Autom
425. t Asset Server Setup Click the Edit button LY Select the Register with an asset management server AMS radio button 4 Add the location of the AMS in the Asset Management Server Address URL field 5 Click Save iq Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 492 Asset Management Administration The following appears Asset Management Server Registration Asset Management ID 55e05fc4 803d 4959 a818 3b70ae Registered Asset Management Servers e http localhost AssetManagement http sqa lisa AssetManagement Show detailed registration information Update Registration with an AMS that has a New Address If you move your AMS to a new server or change the existing server s address you can update the connection information by following these steps 1 From the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Asset Server Setup Click the Edit button C Select the Update registration with an AMS that has a new address radio button 4 Select the AMS to update by choosing it from the Select asset management server dropdown box 5 Add the new location of the AMS in the Asset Management Server Address URL field 6 Click Save fq Unregistering an Asset Management Server If you decide not to use an AMS you can unregister it from Ektron CMS400 NET Unregistering an AMS does not delete the information from the database nor the assets themselves When unregistering an A
426. t CMS400 NETSample Uploaded Files Computer2 Virtual Directory Points to Uploadedimages C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedImages UploadedFiles C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample UploadedFiles LB_Images1 Computer1 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploaded Images LB Files2 Computer1 C InetPub wwwroot CMS400 NETSample Uploaded Files Setting Up Load Balance Paths in Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE In this section we set up load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET that point to the LB_Images1 and LB_Files1 virtual directories that we created earlier For additional information about working with load balance paths in Ektron CMS400 NET refer to Load Balancing on page 100 To add a load balance path in Ektron CMS400 NET 1 Log in as an administrator to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site you set up in Setting Up Multiple Ektron CMS400 NET Web Sites on page 397 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 407 Load Balancing 2 Access the Load Balance Settings Screen in the library folder as described in Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen on page 100 View Library Load Balance Settings Di Web Path Type Relative Verified Physical Path 3 Click the Add button qq 4 The Add a Library Load Balancing Path screen is displayed Add a Library Load Balance Path Images This path is for image assets Files This path is f
427. t Catalog This name is used when setting up the index service lt CatalogLoc gt The folder location of the Asset Catalog This location is used when setting up the index service For example C assetcatalog lt PublishStorageLoc gt The folder location where published assets are stored For example C Inetpub wwwroot assets lt PublishStorageName gt The name of the folder where published assets are stored For example C assets lt DomainName gt Can be Domain Name IP Address or Machine Name An example is localhost This is the address a web client system uses to open managed documents through HTTP lt InstalledVersion gt The version number of the Ektron DMS400 installed lt FileTypes gt Files types that users are allowed to upload to Asset Management For more information see Allowing File Types on page 486 The default file types installed are doc xls ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg txt log vsd dot zip lt Build gt The build number of Ektron DMS400 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 485 Asset Management Administration Tag Description lt ViewTypes gt View Types allows users to preview an Office document when a they click an Office document in the Workarea For more information see Setting the View Type on page 487 The default is document lt UserName gt The user created during the in
428. t Program from Ektron and translate the Web site Email Address Enter the email address of the user Disable Email Select to disable the email notifications for Notification the user If you do the user will not receive the automatic email notification described in Automatic eMail Notification on page 432 However this field has no effect on the user s ability to receive instant email Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 107 Managing Users amp User Groups Field Description Work Page Size See Work Page Size on page 22 Landing Page after See Landing Page after login on page 23 login e Username See Task Permissions on page 266 e Create Task e Redirect Task e Delete Task NOTE If email notification is turned off in the setup page you are notified when editing adding or viewing a user 5 Click the Save button I 6 The View Users in Group Everyone screen appears with the new user included in the table NOTE When you add a new user he is automatically placed in the Everyone user group To assign users to other groups see Assigning Users To User Groups on page 111 7 Continue this process until you add all users of your Web site or are allowed to depending on your license NOTE Contact Ektron Sales for pricing of adding more users to your license Viewing a User After adding a user you can
429. t to preview NOTE Content items with staged content can either have a green or yellow border Look for the preview toolbar button which indicates that the content has a staged version 3 Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar 4 Click the Preview button Q A new browser window opens with the staged version of the content viewable in the template Workarea gy The Workarea is the centralized location of all Ektron CMS400 NET actions that you can perform As an administrator you have access to many more actions than a standard user To access your Workarea follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 18 Getting Started 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as described in Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 2 Navigate to any page that has Ektron CMS400 NET content displayed on it 3 Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar 4 Click the Workarea button GB 5 The Workarea opens in a new window Logout This button logs you out of Ektron CMS400 NET Site Preview To learn about Site Preview mode see Logging In and Out gt Site Preview in the Ektron CMS400 NET User manual Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 19 Modifying Screen Modifying the Application Setup Screen the Application Setup In the setup section of the configuration folder you can enter or edit inf
430. t you read the following section of the documentation It provides information about installing and configuring the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts as well as overview information about Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2003 Once completed you can move on to Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts on page 361 for information about how to use the Ektron CMS400 NET Web Parts Overview Ektron CMS400 NET can easily be integrated with Microsoft s SharePoint Portal Server Ektron CMS400 NET s custom display functions as well as other functions have been configured to be used as Web Parts within the SharePoint Portal Server By combining the simplicity of Ektron CMS400 NET and the power of Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server users can easily access share and manage Ektron CMS400 NET Web site content from a single application This section explains how Ektron CMS400 NET easily and seamlessly integrates with Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Prerequisites Ektron CMS400 NET Server A server running Ektron CMS400 NET must have a directory under the root folder called cms400zxampie which contains the necessary SharePoint Portal Server aspx display pages These pages are included in the zip file that you received with the SharePoint integration files They are commonly inserted into the following directory Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 348 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration CMS400 NETScrip
431. tart Manual e Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual If you are experiencing trouble with any aspect of Ektron CMS400 NET please contact the Ektron Support Team via our Web Site http www ektron com support cms400_support aspx For questions and answers about purchasing Ektron CMS400 NET from Ektron contact the sales department by sending an email to sales ektron com For general information about Ektron and its products you may send an email to info ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 509 Additional Information Ektron Inc 5 Northern Boulevard Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 http www ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 510 Appendix A List of Supported Languages Appendix A List of Supported Languages Language Locale id value Afrikaans 1078 Albanian 1052 Arabic Algeria 5121 Arabic Bahrain 15361 Arabic Egypt 3073 Arabic Iraq 2049 Arabic Jordan 11265 Arabic Kuwait 13313 Arabic Lebanon 12289 Arabic Libya 4097 Arabic Morocco 6145 Arabic Oman 8193 Arabic Qatar 16385 Arabic Saudi Arabia 1025 Arabic Syria 10241 Arabic Tunisia 7169 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 511 Appendix A List of Supported Languages Arabic
432. te the content on the HTML page changes as well File Edit View Favorites Tools Help yj Weather Microsoft Internet Explorer Bak Search Favorites O a ls ES File Edit View Favorites Tools Help eer ao NSE O m i i ia AEE gt Favorites RC International Ele Home Products Support Nevs Careers EETRI 43 F Feels Like 36 F 43 F OMil 43 F Light Drizzle Feels Like iditv 100 36 F EE UV Index 0 Minimal 1 8 miles Dew Point 43 F E 30 37 inches and steady idi 100 ind From the South Southeast at 1 8 miles 13 mph Pressure 30 37 inches and steady Wind From the South Southeast at 13 mph Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc Sample Site Notice that the two content items are the same If the content on the sample site changes the content on the static HTML page automatically reflects the changes Hosting amp Syndication Syndication can be a very powerful tool if you are a hosting company The JavaScript used to post syndicated content can be inserted into ASP HTML CFM or any other types of templates If you host many Web sites you can create a special place on each site to display syndicated content For example you could include up to date pricing for your services information about your hosting company etc Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 392 JavaScript Syndication When y
433. te event calendars for your Web site Once created users may add calendar events that are posted to the calendar for visitors to see NOTE The Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual s Working with Calendars chapter explains calendar concepts and procedures that end users need to know This section does not repeat that information So you should be familiar with that information before reading this Also the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Manual provides instructions on using the Calendar server control custom function This chapter explains Ektron CMS400 NET calendars through the following topics e Calendar Toolbar Buttons on page 292 e Accessing the Workarea Using Calendars on page 294 e Calendar Permissions on page 294 e Adding a New Calendar on page 295 e Calendar Event Types on page 300 e Displaying Calendars on Web Pages on page 303 e Creating a Foreign Language Calendar on page 303 Calendar Toolbar Buttons Within the Calendars feature several buttons described below help you perform actions Button Name Lets you More Information Add Access Add Calendar screen Adding a New Calendar r Calendar on page 295 Save Save calendar or calendar event Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 292 Calendars Button Name Lets you More Information Show Display calendar in Workarea Viewing a C
434. ted 1031_1033_29 0 cb xml ID 29 4 Imported 1046_1033_29 0 cb xml ID 29 5 Imported 1046_1033_28 0 cb xml ID 28 6 Imported 2055_1033_29 0 cb xml ID 29 As you can see content ID 24 was not imported because it has a future start date You also cannot import content that is currently checked out When such content is flagged on the report check it back in then import the files again Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 335 Multi Language Support New foreign language editions of the Imported content on the report are now created For each new edition e the next available number is appended to the title to distinguish it from the source edition For example Home Page Content 1 e its status is checked in It can now enter the approval process just like any other content e its history indicates it was checked in at the time the report was run After you import the translation files Ektron CMS400 NET removes them from the file system Viewing Foreign Language Content 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content 2 Click the View language drop down list and select the desired language Human_Resources ID Status O Bulgarian Ta Danish 13 A 3 a English US 414 A 2 French Standard 3 Only content in that folder and the selected language appears You can perform the same activities with this content as any other content Multi Language Approval Chains Ju
435. ted in AD Ektron CMS400 NET does not automatically delete the user However the user s login fails because he cannot be authenticated The user remains in Ektron CMS400 NET and the discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens You should delete the user from Ektron CMS400 NET using the Delete User function See Also Deleting a User on page 109 NOTE If you mistakenly delete all users with administrative privileges you can still sign in using the builtin user s username and password For more information see BuiltIn User on page 26 Replacing a User If you associate the wrong AD user with a Ektron CMS400 NET user you can replace the user If you do so all Ektron CMS400 NET privileges and workflow responsibilities assigned to the old user are transferred to the new one Follow these steps to associate a Ektron CMS400 NET user with a new AD user 1 From the left side of the Workarea click Users Click the user that you want to replace Click the Associate CMS User with Different AD User button 4 Select a user to replace the user you selected in Step 2 5 Click the Save button E to finalize the change When you complete this procedure the first user is deleted from Ektron CMS400 NET User Groups This section explains how a user s group membership is copied from the AD to the Ektron CMS400 NET system when integration Ektron CMS400 NET Administr
436. ted on the Web page See Also Searchable Additional Fields on page 67 e an HTML tag for example lt title gt See Also HTML Tag Additional Field on page 66 e a Meta tag lt meta gt See Also Meta Tag Additional Fields on page 66 Editable Check this box if you want to allow users to edit the contents of the metadata when creating or editing the metadata s content Uncheck this box if you want uniform metadata for each content item that uses this metadata HTML Tag Additional Field Field Description Default Text Enter default content for the HTML tag For example content document management web content management content management cms Meta Tag Additional Fields NOTE For background information about metadata see http www w3 org TR REC htm140 struct global html edef META Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 66 Metadata Field Description Style Select from the drop down list to indicate whether you want the style to be name or http equiv For more information see http www w3 org TR REC htm 40 struct global html h 7 4 4 2 Remove Duplicates Check this box to remove duplicate words or phrases from the metadata Case Sensitive Check this box to remove duplicates only if the letters and case of each letter match Separator Enter a character to separate the metadata values The default is a semicolon
437. tegrationActive Directory Feature Active Directory Setup Active Directory Authentication is Enabled and Requires More Configuration Active Directory Installed Active Directory Authentication Enabled Active Directory Integration Enabled Auto Add User Message Explanation Active Directory Authentication is Some Ektron CMS400 NET users Enabled and Requires More are not associated with AD users Configuration Also if you are using full active directory integration mode user groups and or user group relationships may not be associated Active Directory Authentication is Some Ektron CMS400 NET users disabled but needs further and or groups are no longer unique configuration This happens because in the AD users and groups can share a logon name as long as their domains are different But when AD authentication is disabled two Ektron CMS400 NET users or groups can no longer share a name each name must be unique If you see either message click it You proceed to the Active Directory Status screen which helps you resolve the discrepancies See Also The Active Directory Status Screen on page 459 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 458 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature The Active Directory Status Screen Use the Active Directory Status screen to resolve the following discrepancies between Ektron CMS400 NET and AD e an Ektro
438. tem on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the File Link field If you later try to edit the field the Caption field is not on the dialog However you can edit the Caption text within the editor Data Style See The Data Style Field on page 218 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 216 Using the Data Designer Fields that Appear on Several Dialogs The Use Field Click May not be removed if this field must be included on the screen Otherwise click May be removed If you check May be removed when this field appears on a data entry screen an icon H appears to the left of the field If the user clicks the icon a dropdown menu provides an option to remove the field as shown below EILL App sve Street Address 5 St insert Above neen Below Boplicate Sove Up gt wove Wown Remove If the user removes the field amp add field display name replaces the field on the data entry screen to indicate that the field was removed and can be added if necessary For example if the field s display name is street address and the user removes the field 294 Steet Address field appears in place of the NoTE The menu icon 8 can also
439. tered in the search text field In other words it returns content with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that has all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that phrase Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then check off the Match Partial Words box The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 310 Searching Content on the Web Site search returns all content with the letters at This search finds words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 311 Multi Language Support There are several aspects to translating within Ektron CMS400 NET They are listed below Type of Translation Seen by For more information see Content Content contributors when viewing or editing visitors to your site Working with Multi Language Content on page 312 Spell check dictionary Set the Language of Spell Checking on page 347 Visitors to your site Special Character Encoding Character Encoding on page 347 Visitors to your site Working with Multi Langu
440. th an Ektron WeblmageFX license key Library Folder Content images Title ID Date Modified Filename RedStar Airplane smaller version 2 05 Sep 2002 05 46 PM CMS300Sample uploadec NOTE For information about acquiring an Ektron WeblmageFX license key for Ektron CMS400 NET contact the Ektron Sales Department Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 104 Managing Users amp User Groups Managing Users amp User Groups Users are people who administer the Web site create content or publish content Without users the Web site would be blank In Ektron CMS400 NET you can add edit and delete users to and from the application through the Settings folder in the Workarea Every Ektron CMS400 NET user belongs to a User Group User groups are used when creating permissions and approvals for content folders User groups can be departments in your company Human Resources Sales Engineering or indicate a user s role Publishers Administrators Editors etc IMPORTANT If your system uses the Active Directory Integration Feature proceed to Active Directory Feature on page 438 to learn about user management functions This chapter only applies to systems that do not use Active Directory Integration This section explains the most common actions that you will perform on users and user groups These actions include e Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders on page 1
441. the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Reference Manual Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 387 Syndicating Web Content as RSS RSS stands for Really Simple Syndication a common method of syndicating Web content as an XML document There are several versions of RSS Ektron has implemented version 2 0 In Ektron CMS400 NET you use RSS to prepare a collection list or a list summary for reading by an aggregator An aggregator consumes an RSS feed and displays it to the user An aggregator is similar in function to a portal There are several popular aggregators including e AmphetaDesk http www disobey com amphetadesk e NewzCrawler http Awww newzcrawler com For information about how to syndicate Ektron CMS400 NET as RSS refer to Syndicating Web Content as RSS in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Reference Manual Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 388 JavaScript Syndication With the help of some JavaScript Ektron CMS400 NET allows you to receive syndicated content from a server other than the one Ektron CMS400 NET is running on Syndication lets you display or send out content that may or may not be your own The content can be viewed on an HTML Web page instead of an aspx page that Ektron CMS400 NET typically runs with What is Syndication JavaScript syndication on a static HTML based Web site lets you retrieve content from an Ektron CMS400 NET Web sit
442. the Save button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 131 Managing XML 6 The XML Configuration Data Designer screen appears itle Job Postings Select a style sheet that you wish to apply for this design Selectastylesheet v z S B Q Q Ma Soa AAAA WE eem E le Apply Style Normal gt TimesNewRoman 3 12 pt A BIUA 2 a zZz se Ur eA xy al ERETS CE Job Title Job Number Description The successful candidate must possess following attributes 7 If desired you may specify a style sheet for the XML configuration Use the field on the right above the editor To do so either type the path and file name of the CSS file or select an Ektron CMS400 NET registered style sheet from the drop down list 8 Design your XSLT in the Data Designer See Using the Data Designer on page 158 for information about creating XSLTs using the Data Designer 9 Click the Update button You are ready to assign the XML configuration to a folder or content item See Assigning XML Configurations on page 136 for more information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 132 Managing XML Adding an XML Configuration Using External XML Files To add an XML configuration using external XML files follow these steps 1 o N ON Fo N 9 10 11 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Ma
443. tiedatetseeaccausizecwteates 2 Management of Content sccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeenenseees 3 Conventions of the Documentation cecesesteereeeeeeeeeeees 4 G tting Started iioii ia aai 5 Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site cceeee 5 Changing Images Used for Logging In and Out sssssseseeesseeeseeeee 5 Editing Content Within Ektron CMS400 NET csssseecseeeee 5 Accessing ING Workarea sitnsaccccsdescscessecsecccceatiaectecncdccbadibentlertecas 6 CIOSING the WORKARCS ssrin aa TNR 7 Workaread Naviga tOM iissa cn iios isinna 8 Recognizing COONAN cscs cece aicinn ioii diania 9 Meaningot Border Color srsassrrsnnseenesnonaemnnaeeipinare rinia 10 To FOAMING TOOD sa 10 Returning to the Classic CMS Interface 0 cccceeeceecesssteeeeeeeeee 12 Floating Toolbar BUNN cini 13 COMME SIAUIS E A E E A T T A nee 14 Edit nsnsi aAA E aT 15 View Content Difference escccccsseeeeseeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeaeeeetenaeeeeeaes 16 PAD VOWG hicrana inact seein Saag ses den bok binvenn Go Settvect cath dd hracneemadeece 17 MOW HISTON osaa ule PEN naa tecnataaaas 18 Workarnea Jenica Anema aie 18 OG OUND E E E T E E eae eases aaa 19 Site PreyieWi rsss aG 19 Modifying the Application Setup Screen ssssssssssssssnnnnns 20 Viewing Application Setup Information ssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 20 Updating Setup Information ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 2
444. ties this section explains each field type you can insert As you will see they are very flexible and should accommodate all of your needs when designing a data entry screen a Group Box a A Group Box field lets you group related fields together on a screen by surrounding them with a box and optionally placing a caption above them After you insert a Group Box field to insert other kinds of fields within the box e drag the fields into the box if you are using the drag and drop toolbar or e place the cursor inside the box then select a field type button if you are using the horizontal toolbar Advantages of Grouping Fields Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 170 Using the Data Designer One advantage of grouping fields is that you can allow the user in Data Entry mode to add another instance of a group For example if a screen collects several fields of information about each telephone call the user could simply click the Insert Below button to insert a new group of fields ready to collect information about the next call St Insert Above AF Inser Below P Duplicate r fy ove 5 Move Down Bemaowve Another advantage of grouping fields is that you can suppress a group of irrelevant fields For example if a screen includes two groups of fields that collect information about hardcover and paperback books and you are adding information about a hardcover book
445. ting profile information you must be logged in to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint See Logging Into a Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site Via SharePoint Server on page 381 for more information Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 382 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 1 Access the SharePoint portal page that contains the Ektron User Profile 4 Web Part CMS400 NET profile Web Part Profile View User Information jedit Ly Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit User Language App Default E Mail Address None Specified E Mail Notifications E Mail Disabled This User currently belongs to these User Groups e Everyone Click the Edit button L The Edit User Information screen is displayed Change your user information Click the Update button E to save the changes The Web Part is refreshed and the view user information screen is displayed with the updated information oa Fw DN Search Web Part The search Web Part lets you insert a search text box and search button that search your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site from SharePoint Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 383 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration Here is an example of a search Web Part inserted into a SharePoint portal server screen Search Web Part Search All the words O Any of the words O Exact Pt E match Partial Words
446. tion Screen on page 268 View Categorization Screen The View Categorization screen allows administrators to work with Task Categories and Task Types From this screen you can create edit and delete them To access the View Categorization Screen access the Workarea gt Settings gt Configuration gt Task Types The following screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 268 View Categorization Managing Tasks C Check to Delete Task Category oO a Administration Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability oO Add New Users Available i Set Up Email Accounts For _ E oO eae Available g a Docs Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability F Edit Available Ej Review Available oO a Moving Check to Delete Task Type Title Availability Oo Move Available F Prep Available Viewing Task Categories While in the View Categorization screen you can collapse and expand Task Categories To collapse a Task Category click the 3 button next to the Task Category name To expand one click the button next to the Task Category name The following example shows the View Categorization screen with one Task Category minimized Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 269 Managing Tasks View Categorization C Check to Delete Task Category oO a Administration Check to Delete Task Type Title g Add New User Email F
447. to delete as described in Viewing the Users in a User Group on page 111 Click the User Group you want to delete The View Users In Group screen is displayed Click the Delete button 1 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK The User Group is deleted from the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site NOO ee ee Ie Removing Users from User Groups See Removing Users from User Groups on page 110 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 113 Private Content amp Memberships Private Content amp Memberships This section explains the concepts to understand and procedures to follow when working with membership users and groups through the following topics e Private Content on page 114 e Memberships on page 117 e Accessing the Membership Module Folder on page 118 e Membership Users on page 118 e Membership User Groups on page 121 e Assigning Permissions for Memberships on page 123 Private Content Private content is stored in Ektron CMS400 NET folders that are designated as private Private content is only viewable by browsing the Web site while logged in by users who have at least Read Only permissions for content or a folder Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 114 Private Content amp Memberships To help explain private content the following table shows three scenarios and how the user s status affects the display of the
448. trator Permissions Similar to content users in the administrator user group have full control over form features You must be a member of the administrator group to e Adda form e Edit a form e Delete a form e Assign content to a form You may also perform all actions on a form s content User Permissions Users who are not members of the administrator user group can add edit delete and restore form content if granted these permissions for the content folder or item Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 230 Working with HTML Forms Preparing the Server to Send email Since email generated by forms is created on and sent from the server that hosts Ektron CMS400 NET the server must be enabled to handle those responsibilities To configure your Web server to send email refer to Configuring email Notifications in the Ektron CMS400 NET Setup Manual WARNING A form typically includes fields for source and destination email addresses which are used to transmit the form via email An unscrupulous attacker can post a form to a Ektron CMS400 NET page and send email from any email address to any email address The attacker s form can be on an HTML page on a server that is remote from the Ektron CMS400 NET installation Any Ektron CMS400 NET on a public site that includes the Ektron CMS400 NET sample site with the form aspx page and properly configured SMTP can be used to send spam Accessing the
449. ts Portals SharePoint2003 This directory is referenced by your SharePoint Portal Server s Web config file NOTE These files enable Ektron CMS400 NET s Web Parts to work SharePoint Portal Server For Ektron CMS400 NET to successfully integrate with Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server a Web server must first be set up and configured with the following applications e Windows 2003 Server Operating System e Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2003 IMPORTANT SharePoint requires its own IIS site it cannot use the IIS site set up for Ektron CMS400 NET This is because SharePoint alters some of the settings in the IIS site to which it is installed Configuring Your SharePoint Portal Server Ektron CMS400 NET includes a separate installation program to install necessary files onto your SharePoint Portal server as well as update necessary files What Does the Installation Program Do The installation program performs many actions including e Installs all Ektron CMS400 NET Web parts e Registers Web Parts in your SharePoint Web config file e Adds a necessary reference to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site within your Web config file Performing the Installation To configure your SharePoint Portal server using the Ektron CMS400 NET SharePoint integration exe follow these steps 1 Move the installation file SharePointForCMS exe to your SharePoint Portal Server 2 Double click the exe file Ektron CMS400
450. ts the task Click E3 at the top corner of the window to close without doing anything View History t Each time content is checked in or published a snapshot is made of it and stored in Ektron CMS400 NET You can access and view historical versions of the content To view the history for a content item follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as described in Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 17 Getting Started Find the content whose history you want to view Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar 4 Click the View History button E The Content History window appears NOTE See Content History on page 55 for more information about viewing comparing and restoring historical versions Preview LQ If content s state is other than Published or checked out this button displays the entire template as though everything that is currently staged has been published So you can see what your changes will look like on the Web site before publishing If necessary you can fix any problems and perfect the page before submitting it into the approval chain To preview staged content follow these steps 1 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as described in Logging Into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web Site on page 5 2 Browse through your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site until you find the content you wan
451. ts you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by either e asmall mail icon next to a user or group name as indicated in red below e asmall mail icon on the toolbar see second image below Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Content Awaiting Approval 1 View All Approvals Title Request Type Start Date Submitted by P Trinity In Line Pipe Publist None Specified Edit sohn L Content Currently Checked Out 1 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 433 email Features View User Groups User Group Name e Administrators l ai Mel A alb asal When you click such a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users z 4 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 434 email Features Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Subject Content Trinity In Line Pipe Times New Roman y 312 pt X A B Z U ABBA Nocalhost CMSS le index asp id 22 cece The following sections explain how to set up and use Instant email Conditions for Instant eMail e The user who is using Ektron CMS400 NET must have a valid from email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET e The email software
452. ual Version 5 0 Revision 6 299 Calendars 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to edit 2 Click the Edit button L 3 The Add or Edit Calendar screen is displayed Make the necessary changes to the calendar using the table in Adding a New Calendar on page 295 as a reference 5 Click the Save button j Deleting Calendars You can delete calendars that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a calendar deletes all events assigned to it To delete a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Screen for the calendar you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button 1 3 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Calendar Event Types Any calendar event can have one or more Event Types assigned to it An event type might be a meeting product demonstration or deadline When a user views a calendar he can change the display to view only events that are relevant to him This section explains how to manage calendar Event Types through the following subtopics e Enabling Event Types on page 301 e Viewing Event Types on page 301 e Adding Event Types on page 301 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 300 Calendars e Editing the Event Type Name on page 302 e Deleting Event Types on page 302 e Assigning an Event Type to an Event on page 303 Enabling Event Types To enable event types edit the calendar and che
453. uce the source code and thereby the size of a content For this reason they are becoming more popular than font related tags for marking up content The editor options section lets you determine how the editor handles this issue Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 26 Modifying the Application Setup Screen The following table explains the editor options you may set Editor Option Description Enable Font Buttons This option displays the following font related buttons on the editor toolbar e Font Face e Font Size e Font Color e Font Background Color See Also Enable Font Buttons on page 28 Note If Remove Styles is checked see below all inline styles added to the content are removed when the HTML is cleaned Disable Font Buttons This option removes the buttons specified above If you choose this option but want to let users apply font related attributes to text set up a style sheet for the content folder to which the content belongs See Also Disable Font Buttons on page 28 Remove Styles Do not Remove Styles If Remove Styles is checked all inline styles added to the content are removed when the HTML is cleaned Note Ektron recommends removing inline styles It gets rid of inline styles added to content pasted from Microsoft Word Preserve MS Word Styles only available if you choose Do not Remove Styles When content from MS Word
454. ues on page 235 Subject Text that appears in the email s subject field See Also Letting the User Override email Values on page 235 Preamble Beginning text of the email See Also Letting the User Override email Values on page 235 Send data in XML Format A green check means email data will be in a structured XML packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format See Also Sending Data as XML on page 244 Form Content Content associated with the form Post Back Content Summary of content associated with form This content is displayed when form is submitted The view form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see Form Module Toolbar on page 232 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 257 Working with HTML Forms Viewing a Form s Content Properties From the View Form screen you can see the View Form s Content Properties screen From this screen you can see additional information about the content that does not appear on the View Form screen To view the properties for a form s content follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Form screen of the form whose properties you want to view as described in Viewing a Form s Content Properties on page 258 2 Click the View Content Properties button E 3 The View Content Properties screen for the selected content
455. up screens change to primarily view screens When adding a new user or user group toEktron CMS400 NET you can only select users and groups in the AD If the user or user group does not exist in the AD create them there first and then import the user or group into Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 440 Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET accesses the following AD user information e Authentication password user logon name and domain for signing in to Ektron CMS400 NET The password is not stored in Ektron CMS400 NET the application only refers to the password during sign in e User information listed in the following table Field in AD AD attribute Corresponding field in Ektron CMS400 NET User logon name pre sAMAccountName Domain and Username Windows 2000 Note Users can share a name in different domains For example juser planets com and juser saturn com Otherwise user names must be unique Last Name sn Lastname First Name givenName Firstname Email mail email Address e user group information listed in the following table Field in AD AD attribute Corresponding field in Ektron CMS400 NET Group Name pre Windows cn Domain and User group name 2000 Note User groups can share a name in different domains For ex
456. urge and displays a 1 Navigate to and click the folder within which you want to create a subfolder 2 Click the Add Folder button E 3 The Add a Subfolder to Folder screen is displayed Enter the required information in the fields See Fields on the Edit Content Folder Screen on page 34 5 Click the Save button E You can modify the subfolder s properties permissions approval chain etc For a list of options see Folder Properties Toolbar on page 33 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 36 Managing Content Folders Deleting Folders You can delete obsolete folders from the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site CAUTION Deleting a content folder permanently deletes the content and Quicklinks that belong to the content folder as well as its subfolders To delete a content folder follow these steps 1 In your Workarea navigate to the content folder you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Folder button E 3 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK Search Content Folder You can search a folder to locate content within your Web site Use this feature to find content when you know the text that needs to be updated but are unsure of its folder or where it is on the Web site The search only looks through the current folder and its subfolders So if you want to search the entire site begin with the root content folder To learn more about searching th
457. version 1 0 gt lt xifixliff version 1 1 xmins xlf urn oasis names tc xliff document 1 1 gt lt xlf file datatype xml original 1035_1033_2_0_cb xml source language 1033 target langquage 1035 gt filename lt xlfi skl gt lt xlfi external file href 1035_1033_2_0_cb xml gt lt xifi skl gt lt xlf header gt lt xif body gt lt xlt group id 6 restype x html contentcomment resname contentcomment gt lt xlf trans unit id 6 datatype plaintext gt lt xlf source gt only users and member member can see this content lt xIf source gt lt xlfitarget gt TODO only users and member member can see this content lt xlf target gt lt xlfi trans unit gt lt xlfi group gt The file name syntax is explained below XLIFF XHTML File Names When an XLIFF or XHTML edition of content is created for a translation agency it is named according to the following pattern folder path _target language_source language_content block ID_ folder ID_cb xml For example c inetpub wwwroot CMS300Sample uploadedFiles xliff 1031_1033_24 0_ cb xml NOTE The XLIFF files are saved to webroot uploaded files xliff while the XHTML files are saved to webroot uploaded files xhtml The above file was created from English 1033 for translation into German 1031 It is content item 24 in the root folder folder ID 0 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 334
458. w Types to blank a preview doesn t appear until it is asked for The following is an example of what appears when a user clicks an Office asset s link and the preview is set to not appear Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 488 Asset Management Administration View Content Test Asset Management 7 i OS amp amp amp lt 4 ce GD view English U S Y Add selectlangt Content Content File Test Asset Management doc View read only Asset You control the preview in the AssetManagement config file s lt ViewType gt Tag The table below describes possible settings for the lt ViewType gt tag Setting Description Example document Automatic preview when clicking an Office lt ViewType gt document lt ViewType gt document s link blank Disables automatic preview lt ViewType gt lt ViewType gt Steps to Change Automatic Preview Setting To change automatic preview setting for Office documents follow these steps 1 Open the AssetManagement config file The default location iS webroot AssetManagement 2 Find the lt ViewType gt Tags For example lt ViewType gt document lt FileType gt 3 Choose a setting as described in the table above see Setting on page 489 4 Save and close the assetManagement config file Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 489 Asset Management Administration A
459. window opens 6 Make the necessary changes to the content Refer to Adding HTML Content on page 39 or Adding XML Content on page 42 for details about the information you can change When completed choose a workflow option at the top of the window Moving Content You can move content from any folder to any other folder This section explains how Who Can Move Content Only members of the Administrators user group can move content Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 50 Managing Content Which Content Can Be Moved Only content with a status of Approved Published can be moved This included expired content If the content s status is not published you must wait for it to reach that status before moving it Before You Move Content Since content is either HTML or XML you may encounter several scenarios when moving content The following table explains each scenario Content to be moved Destination Folder Issues HTML HTML Only None XML Content Folder Content does not use XML configuration applied to content folder If desired this needs to be set in the Content Properties screen XML inherited from HTML Only Content inherits properties of the destination parent folder Can be changed on the folder or content XML Content Folder levels XML not inherited from HTML Only Content keeps assigned XML configuration parent Can be changed on the folder or content l
460. with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failur
461. x A List of Supported Languages 511 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 xi Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 xii Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Thank you for purchasing Ektron CMS400 NET the best and most affordable solution for Web content management We welcome you to use Ektron CMS400 NET to maintain update and modify the contents of your Web site All these efforts are easily achieved while preserving the look and feel that you originally designed for your site With Ektron CMS400 NET the tasks of maintaining your site and updating content are passed on to subject experts Based on the page layouts and processes that you create the highest level of quality is preserved and maintained throughout the life cycle of the site About Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET is a powerful easy to use and affordable XML content management solution that empowers anyone to take an active role in managing Web content and optimizing online strategies It streamlines site management automates workflow processes and supports collaboration Ektron CMS400 NET reduces costs saves time and makes Web sites extranets and intranets more effective while generating rapid ROI Business users like marketing or PR pros can author manage and publish Web content build and deploy Web forms and collect and leverage visitor info Ou
462. xed Check if you want to index this field For more information see Indexing the Fields of a Data Design Document in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide The Indexed field may or may not appear depending on how your administrator has set up your system Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the name cursor over this field Default If you want this screen to have a default date when the value user first sees it click the calendar icon to the right and select a date The user can change the date in Data Entry mode Note If you enter a default date you cannot later remove it You can change it If necessary you can delete the field and enter a new one Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See The Allow Field on page 217 Validation If you want to require the user using the calendar to enter a response click the down arrow to the right of this response field and select Cannot be blank Validation Validation No validation No validation Cannot be blank Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 211 Using the Data Designer Field Description Caption Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Note The Caption field
463. y Contact Ektron Greeting Home Page Content Introducing the RC Redstar Login Information Support Page Trinity In Line Pipe If you are logged into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server you can also manage the summary list see Managing the Summary List on page 379 for more information NOTE See Login Web Part on page 380 for information about adding a login Web Part and logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site via SharePoint Server List Summary Web Part Settings The list summary Web Part can be configured to fully customize the summary list Several options are configurable including e Starting folder e Style information e Maximum amount to display To configure the list summary Web Part follow these steps 1 Access the Modify Shared Web Part area for the content Web Part as described in Modifying Web Parts on page 364 2 Minimize the Appearance Settings and expand the CMS400 NET ListSummary settings Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 377 Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration 3 The List Summary Web Part Settings screen is displayed 4 Make the necessary changes to the List Summary settings using the following table as a guide Field Description Default Starting Folder Ektron CMS400 NET content folder from which the summary list begins to retrieve summary information Examples Products RC Cars
464. y Integration If enabled the Active Directory feature is functional Can only be enabled if Active Directory Authentication is enabled Active Directory Integration on page 440 Auto Add User If enabled user information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400 NET when that user logs in or when the user is added to Ektron CMS400 NET Can only be enabled if Active Directory Integration is enabled Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400 NET on page 443 Auto Add User To Group If enabled a user s group membership is first copied from the AD when a user logs in or is added Can only be enabled if Active Directory Integration is enabled User Groups on page 447 User Property Mapping the user s last name in Ektron CMS400 NET By default this is set to mail but you can change it to any AD property Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Group Mapping FirstName Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to MSDN Library http the user s first name in Ektron CMS400 NET By msdn microsoft com library default this is set to givenName but you can default asp gt Active Directory change it to any AD property ADSI and Directory Services gt Directory Services gt Active Directory gt Active Directory Reference gt Active Directory User Interface Mappings LastName Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to same reference as F
465. y IntegrationActive Directory Feature NOTE The Everyone group unlike other Ektron CMS400 NET groups is not associated with an AD group It is an all encompassing group with no special permissions If a user belongs to an AD user group that does not exist in Ektron CMS400 NET nothing happens because the feature assumes that all AD groups are not meaningful in Ektron CMS400 NET If a user belongs to an Ektron CMS400 NET user group that does not exist in AD the discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens From these screens you can copy the AD group information into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Associating User Group Membership with Active Directory User Group Membership on page 461 and Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups on page 462 To learn how membership is updated from then on see After Integration is Enabled on page 450 Ektron CMS400 NET is Being Installed so No User Groups Exist Follow the procedure described in Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 448 to copy AD user groups to Ektron CMS400 NET As users in those groups are added to Ektron CMS400 NET their group membership is copied from AD to Ektron CMS400 NET After Integration is Enabled A user s group membership is updated in Ektron CMS400 NET when all of the following are true e The Enable automatic addition of user to groups field is checked on the Active Direct
466. y acclaimed XML editor Ektron eWebEditPro XML lets developers hide XML tags from content contributors and provides an easy to use WYSIWYG editing interface XML configurations are used in Ektron CMS400 NET to define the necessary files to display save and validate the content properly This section explains how to take advantage of Ektron CMS400 NET s XML capabilities What s in This Chapter Here is what s covered in this chapter e Before You Manage XML Configurations on page 129 e Adding a New XML Configuration on page 131 e Assigning XML Configurations on page 136 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 128 Managing XML e Viewing XML Configurations on page 138 e Editing XML Configurations on page 143 e Editing Data Design Packages on page 143 e Creating XML Configurations Based on Existing Configurations on page 146 e Viewing Data Designer XSLTs on page 147 e Deleting XML Configurations on page 148 e XML Indexing on page 150 Before You Manage XML Configurations Use the XML configuration feature to define each XML configuration that will be used in your Web site Each configuration is assigned to a content folder or content item and lets you specify how XML content appears in the editor is validated and is displayed in an output device There are two ways to create an XML configuration e Using external XML files e Using the WYSIWYG Data Designer
467. you can collapse the paperback book questions because they are not relevant to your current task Use the eyeglass icon to expand or collapse the display of fields within a group Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 171 Dialog Box Using the Data Designer Expanded Group Field with glasses icon highlighted ktron Book Store m ook The Confidence Man mores 11 D6 Fal Fics ankaa Collapsed Group Field Ektron Book Store Fo Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 172 Using the Data Designer Group Box Ed Name Address Display name Address Use Allow May not be removed Only one C May be removed More than one Appearance No border Show border and caption Caption address o omen Fields on the Group Box Dialog Field Description Name Enter the name of this field Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt IN into this field The Name Field s Default Value By default the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number So the first field s default name is Field1 the second field s default name is Field2 etc You can change the default if you want Display Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the Name cursor over this field Use See The Use Field on page 217 Allow See T
468. z k tr on ___ Redefining Web Content Management Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Version 5 0 Revision 6 Ektron Inc 5 Northern Blvd Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 5 0 Revision 6 August 11 2005 For the latest version of this manual go to http www ektron com cms400 web cms aspx id 1701 documentation EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for us

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LE RUBY 500  GE DVM1665 User's Manual  PosiTector 6000 - DeFelsko Corporation  MANUAL DEL USUARIO MOTOCICLETA JAWA 300  Manuale di istruzioni Serie WV-SF340 Serie WV - psn  RCA IP060 Quick Start Guide  Blanco 511-650 User's Manual  Section I. Instructions to Bidders  Motorola SG2-DRT-3X Network Card User Manual  SoftWall Finishing Systems SW9723352027 Instructions / Assembly  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file